GE Digital Energy

Multilin

345
Transformer Protection System
Transformer protection and control

Instruction manual
345 revision: 1.41
Manual P/N: 1601-9098-A4
GE publication code: GEK-113568C
Copyright © 2011 GE Multilin
GE Multilin
215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario
Canada L6E 1B3
Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098
Internet: http://www.GEmultilin.com

*1601-9098-A4*

GE Multilin's Quality
Management System is
registered to ISO9001:2000
QMI # 005094

© 2011 GE Multilin Incorporated. All rights reserved.
GE Multilin 345 Transformer Protection System instruction manual for revision 1.41.
345 Transformer Protection System, EnerVista, EnerVista Launchpad, and EnerVista SR3
Setup are registered trademarks of GE Multilin Inc.
The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc. This documentation is
furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission
of GE Multilin. The content of this manual is for informational use only and is subject to
change without notice.
Part number: 1601-9098-A4 (May 2011)

Table of Contents
1. INTRODUCTION

Overview ............................................................................................................................ 1 - 1
Cautions and warnings ............................................................................................... 1 - 2
Description of the 345 Transformer Protection System .............................. 1 - 3
345 order codes.............................................................................................................. 1 - 7
Specifications................................................................................................................... 1 - 8
Password security................................................................................................................1 - 8
Protection.................................................................................................................................1 - 8
Metering....................................................................................................................................1 - 10
Data capture ..........................................................................................................................1 - 10
Controls.....................................................................................................................................1 - 11
Inputs/Outputs ......................................................................................................................1 - 11
Power supply ..........................................................................................................................1 - 12
Communications ..................................................................................................................1 - 13
Testing and certification ...................................................................................................1 - 13

2. INSTALLATION

Mechanical installation ............................................................................................... 2 - 1
Dimensions..............................................................................................................................2 - 1
Product identification .........................................................................................................2 - 2
Mounting ..................................................................................................................................2 - 3
Unit withdrawal and insertion........................................................................................2 - 4

Electrical installation .................................................................................................... 2 - 6
Terminal identification .......................................................................................................2 - 7
Phase sequence and transformer polarity...............................................................2 - 9
Current inputs ........................................................................................................................2 - 10
Ground and sensitive ground CT inputs ....................................................................2 - 10
Zero sequence CT installation ........................................................................................2 - 11
Control power ........................................................................................................................2 - 12
Contact inputs .......................................................................................................................2 - 12
Trip1 and Trip2 output relays..........................................................................................2 - 13
Serial communications ......................................................................................................2 - 15
IRIG-B .........................................................................................................................................2 - 16

3. INTERFACES

Front control panel interface.................................................................................... 3 - 2
Description ..............................................................................................................................3 - 3
Display .......................................................................................................................................3 - 3
Working with the Keypad................................................................................................3 - 3

LED status indicators..........................................................................................................3 - 5
Relay messages ....................................................................................................................3 - 6
Target messages.................................................................................................................3 - 6
Self-test errors......................................................................................................................3 - 7
Flash messages ...................................................................................................................3 - 8

Software setup ................................................................................................................ 3 - 9
Quick setup - Software interface ..................................................................................3 - 9
EnerVista SR3 Setup Software........................................................................................3 - 9
Hardware and software requirements.....................................................................3 - 10
Installing the EnerVista SR3 Setup software..........................................................3 - 10

Connecting EnerVista SR3 Setup to the relay ........................................................3 - 13
Configuring serial communications...........................................................................3 - 13
Using the Quick Connect feature ................................................................................3 - 14
Configuring Ethernet communications ....................................................................3 - 15

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Connecting to the relay....................................................................................................3 - 16

Working with setpoints and setpoint files ................................................................ 3 - 17
Engaging a device ..............................................................................................................3 - 17
Entering setpoints...............................................................................................................3 - 17
File support ............................................................................................................................3 - 18
Using setpoints files...........................................................................................................3 - 18
Downloading and saving setpoints files ..................................................................3 - 19
Adding setpoints files to the environment ..............................................................3 - 20
Creating a new setpoint file ...........................................................................................3 - 20
Upgrading setpoint files to a new revision .............................................................3 - 21
Printing setpoints and actual values .........................................................................3 - 22
Printing actual values from a connected device .................................................3 - 23
Loading setpoints from a file.........................................................................................3 - 24

Upgrading relay firmware ............................................................................................... 3 - 24
Loading new relay firmware..........................................................................................3 - 24

Advanced EnerVista SR3 Setup features .................................................................. 3 - 26
Transient recorder (Waveform capture)...................................................................3 - 26
Protection summary..........................................................................................................3 - 29
Password security ..............................................................................................................3 - 30

4. ACTUAL VALUES

Actual values.....................................................................................................................4 - 1
A1 Status.............................................................................................................................4 - 3
Clock........................................................................................................................................... 4 - 4
Contact inputs ....................................................................................................................... 4 - 4
Output relays ......................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
Logic elements ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
Virtual inputs .......................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
Remote inputs ....................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
Remote outputs .................................................................................................................... 4 - 6
Contact inputs summary.................................................................................................. 4 - 6
Output relays summary .................................................................................................... 4 - 6
Logic elements summary................................................................................................. 4 - 7
GOOSE status......................................................................................................................... 4 - 7
GOOSE HDR status .............................................................................................................. 4 - 7

A2 Metering .......................................................................................................................4 - 8
A3 Records.........................................................................................................................4 - 12
Event records......................................................................................................................... 4 - 12
Transient records ................................................................................................................. 4 - 31
Clear event record............................................................................................................... 4 - 31
Clear transient record........................................................................................................ 4 - 31
Clear thermal capacity record....................................................................................... 4 - 31

A4 Target messages......................................................................................................4 - 32

5. QUICK SETUP FRONT CONTROL
PANEL

Quick Setup menu ..........................................................................................................5 - 3

6. SETPOINTS

Setpoints Main Menu ....................................................................................................6 - 1
Setpoint entry methods .................................................................................................... 6 - 2
Common setpoints.............................................................................................................. 6 - 2
Logic diagrams ..................................................................................................................... 6 - 3
Setting text abbreviations................................................................................................ 6 - 3

S1 Relay setup..................................................................................................................6 - 5

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Clock ...........................................................................................................................................6 - 6
Password security................................................................................................................6 - 7
Passwords ..............................................................................................................................6 - 9

Communications ..................................................................................................................6 - 10
RS485 interface ...................................................................................................................6 - 11
Ethernet...................................................................................................................................6 - 11
Modbus....................................................................................................................................6 - 12
IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication ..................................................................6 - 13
IEC60870-5-104 protocol................................................................................................6 - 27
DNP communication .........................................................................................................6 - 28
IEC 61850 GOOSE communications...........................................................................6 - 42

Event recorder .......................................................................................................................6 - 43
Transient recorder ...............................................................................................................6 - 44
Front panel ..............................................................................................................................6 - 45
Installation ...............................................................................................................................6 - 46

S2 System Setup............................................................................................................. 6 - 47
Current sensing .....................................................................................................................6 - 47
Power system.........................................................................................................................6 - 48
Transformer ............................................................................................................................6 - 49
Transformer setup phase & magnitude compensations ..................................6 - 50
Winding breakers .................................................................................................................6 - 61

S3 Protection.................................................................................................................... 6 - 64
Setpoint group 1(2) ..............................................................................................................6 - 65
Transformer percent differential .................................................................................6 - 67
Transformer instantaneous differential ...................................................................6 - 73
Restricted ground fault ....................................................................................................6 - 75
Transformer thermal protection..................................................................................6 - 80
Phase timed overcurrent protection .........................................................................6 - 83
Phase instantaneous overcurrent protection .......................................................6 - 90
Ground timed overcurrent protection ......................................................................6 - 93
Ground instantaneous overcurrent protection ....................................................6 - 97
Neutral timed overcurrent protection.......................................................................6 - 100
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent protection ....................................................6 - 103
Negative sequence timed overcurrent protection..............................................6 - 106

S4 Controls ........................................................................................................................ 6 - 109
Change setpoint group......................................................................................................6 - 109
Virtual inputs...........................................................................................................................6 - 111
Logic elements.......................................................................................................................6 - 112
Winding breaker failure.....................................................................................................6 - 126

S5 Inputs/Outputs.......................................................................................................... 6 - 129
Contact inputs .......................................................................................................................6 - 129
Output relays..........................................................................................................................6 - 130
Output Relay 1 - W1 breaker "Trip" ............................................................................6 - 131
Output Relay 2 - W2 breaker "Trip" ............................................................................6 - 131
Auxiliary Output Relays 3 to 6.......................................................................................6 - 134

Virtual inputs...........................................................................................................................6 - 134
Remote inputs........................................................................................................................6 - 136
Remote outputs.....................................................................................................................6 - 136

7. MAINTENANCE

M1 Relay information................................................................................................... 7 - 3
M3 Breaker maintenance........................................................................................... 7 - 5
W1 (W2) Breaker trip coil ..................................................................................................7 - 5

M4 Breaker monitor ...................................................................................................... 7 - 9
M5 Relay maintenance................................................................................................ 7 - 10
Ambient temperature.........................................................................................................7 - 10

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

.............Appendix ....................................................................................... Change notes ...............1 Manual Revision history...APPENDIX..............................................................................................1 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ... Appendix ....

0. DNP3. Conveniently located LEDs indicate the relay status. The relay provides advanced algorithms for automatic magnitude and phase compensation for more than twenty types of twowinding transformers. The combination of proven hardware. and communications. The 345 relay provides the following key benefits: • Withdrawable small footprint – saves on rewiring and space. as well as the status of each winding breaker. Equipped with serial (RS485). IEC 61850 GOOSE. good sensitivity for the detection of winding ground faults. SCADA or inter-relay communications. • Multiple protection groups with the flexibility to switch through a wide selection of main and backup transformer protections and controls. USB. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–1 . the 345 relay is the best-in-class for either MCCs. advanced features. makes the relay superior for total transformer metering. LEDs. monitoring. protection and control.Digital Energy Multilin 345 Transformer Protection System Chapter 1: Introduction Introduction Overview The 345 is a microprocessor-based relay for primary and backup protection of small to medium size distribution transformers. and the EnerVista SR3 Setup program. neutral and negative sequence currents overcurrent elements. and Ethernet ports. • Large four-line LCD display. through both its fourline 20 character display. • Fast setup (Quick Setup) menu for power system configuration and protection. as well as a wide selection of protocols such as Modbus. 60870-5-104. and keypad • Multiple communication protocols and simultaneous access with easy integration into monitoring and control systems. pickup. The 345 relay has a small footprint and is withdrawable for easy mounting into either new or retrofit installations. ground. and the flexibility to set any of the phase. operation. and alarm events. IEC608705-103. The 345 provides excellent accessibility and transparency with regard to power system conditions and events.

equipment damage. and dangers. The danger icon provides users with a warning about the possibility of serious or fatal injury to themselves or others. The following icons are used to indicate notes. The caution icon indicates that possible damage to equipment or data may occur if instructions are not properly followed. 1–2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION Cautions and warnings Before attempting to install or use this device. Figure 1: Note icons used in the documentation NOTE CAUTION DANGER The standard note icon emphasizes a specific point or indicates minor problems that may occur if instructions are not properly followed. cautions. or downtime. it is imperative that all caution and danger indicators in this manual are reviewed to help prevent personal injury.

) are based upon the current and voltage phasors. RMS.CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION DESCRIPTION OF THE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM Description of the 345 Transformer Protection System CPU Relay functions are controlled by two processors: a Freescale MPC5554 32-bit microprocessor measures all analog signals and digital inputs and controls all output relays. etc. All signals are then simultaneously captured by sample and hold buffers to ensure there are no phase shifts. and Harmonics Current waveforms are processed twice every cycle with a DC Offset Filter and a Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). This filter ensures no overreach of the overcurrent protection. Hence. a Freescale MPC520B 32-bit microprocessor controls all the Ethernet communication protocols. Analog Input Waveform Capture Magnetic transformers are used to scale-down the incoming analog signals from the source instrument transformers. The resulting phasors have fault current transients and all harmonics removed. Phasors. This is done for all current signals used for overcurrent protection. Protection Elements The protection elements are processed four times per power cycle. Transients. All subsequent calculations (e. The protection elements use RMS current. The waveforms can be retrieved from the relay via the EnerVista SR3 Setup software for display and diagnostics. protection is impervious to both harmonics and DC transients. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–3 . Both current and voltage are sampled thirty-two times per power frequency cycle. based on the magnitude of the phasor. which removes the DC component from the asymmetrical current present at the moment a fault occurs.g. The Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) uses exactly one sample cycle to calculate a phasor quantity which represents the signal at the fundamental frequency. then placed into the waveform capture buffer. power. such that the resulting values have no harmonic components. Processing of AC Current Inputs The DC Offset Filter is an infinite impulse response (IIR) digital filter. all harmonic components are removed. The signals are converted to digital values by a 12-bit A/D converter before finally being passed on to the CPU for analysis. voltage signals bypass the DC Offset Filter. thus emulating a fault recorder. This results in an overcurrent relay that is extremely secure and reliable. one that will not overreach. These ‘raw’ samples are scaled in software. The analog signals are then passed through a 960 Hz low pass anti-aliasing filter.

CDR 1–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .DESCRIPTION OF THE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION Figure 2: Single line diagram Winding 1 Winding 2 50P 50G 50G 50P 51P 50G/ 51G 50G/ 51G 51P 51G 51G 50BF 50BF 51_2 51_2 50N 50N 51N 51N 49P 87G 87G Calculate Restraint Current Calculate Differential Currents 345 RELAY 50/87 Calculate Harmonics 2nd and 5th BLOCK 87T Metering 897743.

and Neutral IOC1(2). Ground-. the type and number of protection elements per setpoint group changes. and Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent elements. if the “Advanced configuration (letter M) is selected in the order code. Ground-. one Instantaneous Differential element. The full set of protection elements will be available in the setpoint group. Setpoint group 2 can be activated by programming the conditions under S4 Control/Change Setpoint Group menu. two Breaker Failure elements. two Restricted Ground Fault elements. two of each Phase-. and others are generic with programmable AC inputs from either winding currents: the Restricted Ground Fault 1(2). one Thermal Model. and the Negative Sequence TOC1(2) elements.CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION DESCRIPTION OF THE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM Table 1: Protection Elements ANSI Device Description 87T Percent Differential 50/87 Instantaneous Differential 87G Restricted Ground Fault 49 Thermal Model 50P Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 50G Ground/Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 50N Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 50BF Breaker Failure 51P Phase Timed Overcurrent 51G Ground/Sensitive Ground Timed Overcurrent 51N Neutral Timed Overcurrent 51_2 Negative Sequence Timed Overcurrent The 345 relay has two identical setpoint groups. the Phase-. Some of the protection elements are common for the transformer protection: Percent and Instantaneous differential elements. Ground-. the Phase-. By default setpoint group 1 will be active. Depending on the relay order code. This includes one Transformer Percent Differential element. Neutral Timed Overcurrent elements. Ground-. and Neutral TOC1(2). 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–5 . Thermal Model. two of each Phase-. with the same set of protection elements. and two Negative Sequence Timed Overcurrent elements.

DESCRIPTION OF THE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION Figure 3: Main menu ACTUAL VALUES ACTUAL VALUES PCNT DIFF FUNCTION A1 STATUS QUICK SETUP XFMR PERCENT DIFF SETPOINTS A2 METERING MAINTENANCE A3 RECORDS ▼ MINIMUM PICKUP SLOPE 1 ▼ A4 TARGET MESSAGES BREAKPOINT 1 BREAKPOINT 2 SLOPE 2 QUICK SETUP RELAY STATUS ▼ PHASE TOC1 PHASE TOC1 FUNCTION NOMINAL FREQUENCY ▼ W1 PH CT PRIMARY PHASE CT INPUT W1 GND CT PRIMARY PH TOC1 PICKUP W2 PH CT PRIMARY PH TOC1 CURVE W2 GND CT PRIMARY PH TOC1 TDM TRANSFORMER TYPE RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR XFMR RATED LOAD RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR W1 NOM VOLTAGE GROUND TOC1 W1 GROUNDING W2 NOM VOLTAGE W2 GROUNDING GND TOC1 PICKUP PH TOC1 FUNCTION GND TOC1 CURVE GND TOC1 FUNCTION GND TOC1 TDM PH IOC1 FUNCTION RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR GND IOC1 FUNCTION RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR PHASE IOC1 S1 RELAY SETUP S2 SYSTEM SETUP S3 PROTECTION PHASE IOC1 FUNCTION ▼ PH CT INPUT PH IOC1 PICKUP ▼ S4 CONTROLS RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR GROUND IOC1 MAINTENANCE M1 RELAY INFO M3 BKR MAINTENANCE GROUND IOC1 FUNCTION ▼ GND CT INPUT ▼ 1–6 GND CT INPUT XFMR PERCENT DIFF SETPOINTS 897756A1.cdr GND TOC1 FUNCTION ▼ M4 BKR MONITOR GND IOC1 PICKUP M5 RELAY MAINT RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR M6 FACTORY SERVICE RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

Figure 4: 345 order codes 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–7 .CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION 345 ORDER CODES 345 order codes The information to specify a 345 relay is provided in the following order code figure.

........................................SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION Specifications Specifications are subject to change without notice................. 97 to 99% of Pickup @ I > 0................................................ 0............... 0......................................................................................01 x CT Dropout Level:.0 in steps of 0...................04 to 20................. ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse Definite Time IEC Curve A/B/C/Short IAC Extreme/Very/Inverse/Short Curve Multiplier: .............. 0........................................... per CT input SENSITIVE GROUND TIMED OVERCURRENT (51SG) Ground Current:........ 3 to 10 alpha-numeric characters for local and remote access Protection PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND/NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TIMED OVERCURRENT (51P/51N/51G/ 51_2) Ground Current:.................1 x CT Curve Shape:.........005 to 3.000 x CT in steps of 0........................................................................... ±3% of expected inverse time or 1 cycle.....1 x CT Pickup ........00 x CT in steps of 0................................................ Fundamental Pickup Level: ...05 to 20...................... Linear Time Delay Accuracy:................... per CT input 1–8 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ...................... Instantaneous...................................01 Reset Time: ..... Fundamental Pickup Level: ................... whichever is greater Level Accuracy:................0............ ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse Definite Time IEC Curve A/B/C/Short IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short Curve Multiplier: .......................... ±3% of expected inverse time or 1 cycle.......................... 3 to 10 alpha-numeric characters for local and remote access Control Password: .............................. 8 to 10 alpha-numeric characters Settings Password:..................... NOTE: NOTE Password security PASSWORD SECURITY Master Reset Password: ....1 Reset Time: ................ Linear Time Delay Accuracy:.........05 to 20............................0......00 in steps of 0......................... whichever is greater Level Accuracy:................................... 0..................... Instantaneous..........................................................02 x CT @ I < 1 x CT Curve Shape:... 97 to 99% of Pickup @ I > 1 x CT Pickup ..................................001 x CT Dropout Level:..................02 x CT @ I < 0.....

..0.....................................000 xCT (with sensitive CTs) Dropout Level: .............................05 to 20........01 0..........00 to 600...................per current inputs Timing Accuracy: ........................0 x PKP.....................................................................................00 x CT in steps of 0................per current inputs 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–9 .001 x CT Dropout Level: ........<30 ms Level Accuracy:.................................15 to 100% in steps of 1% Slope 2 Range:....<30 ms @ 60Hz (I > 2....................................................<30 ms @ 60Hz (I > 2........................................01 Operate Time:.................00 x CT in steps of 0..Fundamental Pickup Accuracy:...per CT input SENSITIVE GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50SG) Pickup Level (Gnd IOC): ...01 Operate Time:...97 to 98% of Pickup Operate Time:......................................00xCT in steps of 0...0 to 1 cycle (Time Delay selected) Level Accuracy:....................................000 x CT in steps of 0..per current inputs TRANSFORMER INSTANTANEOUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION (50/87) Pickup Level:.......................................................................00 to 300................Per-phase................................Fundamental Pickup Level:..002 x CT @ I < 0.............00 to 20.................................1.........................................97 to 99% of Pickup @ I > 1 x CT Pickup ..............0 s in steps of 0....per CT input TRANSFORMER THERMAL PROTECTION (49) Current:................ 2-out-of-three.............0.............................................1% 2nd Harmonic Inhibit Mode: ...002 to 2.........................................................50 to 4..........................................0 to 1 cycle (Time Delay selected) Level Accuracy:........97 to 99% of Pickup @ I > 0.........0 x PKP.............±3% of expected time.............................< 20 ms (no harmonics inhibits selected) < 30 ms (harmonics inhibits selected) Level Accuracy:........01 Slope 1 Range:................5 x PKP TRANSFORMER PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION (87T) Differential/Restraint Characteristic:......97 to 98% of Pickup Slope Range: ........................0 to 40.........................0% insteps of 0...................................01xCT Dropout Level: .............3.............................01 2nd Harmonic Inhibit Level: ........02 to 20........ No time delay) <35 ms @ 50Hz (I > 2......0. No time delay) <35 ms @ 50Hz (I > 2..................0............97 to 98% of Pickup Operate Time:..............................................................................02 x CT @ I <1 x CT Time Delay: ............................ No time delay) Time Delay Accuracy: ..00 xCT in steps of 0............0..01 x CT Dropout Level: ......05 to 1.........00 sec in steps of 0.........0 x PKP.......0 to 40.....................00 x CT in steps of 0.........00 sec in steps of 0...........0...............50 to 100% in steps of 1% Kneepoint 1: . Average 5th Harmonic Inhibit Level: ............................................Dual Slope............................................000 xCT (with sensitive CTs) GND Supervision Level: ..00 x CT in steps of 0................ No time delay) Time Delay Accuracy: ...................00 to 10......0.0.2 Pickup Level:...1..................................................005 to 3.....................................................................................................................................1 x CT Time Delay: ...............1 x CT Pickup .............................1% Dropout Level: .............................................. or 30 ms (whichever is greater) @ I > 1.........0...........................002 to 2...........01 0................. Dual Breakpoint Minimum Pickup Level:...00 xCT in steps of 0...............02 to 20.......................................CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND/NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50P/50N/50G/50_2) Current:.........0 to 100% in steps of 1 Pickup Delay:...........01 Operate Time:...............................0 x PKP..0....00 to 300....01 Kneepoint 2: ....< 30 ms @ 0 ms time delay Level Accuracy:.........per current inputs RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT Number of Elements: ...........................................0% insteps of 0.......................0........1.....................

.......... per-phase differential current. <0......................................SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION Metering PHASE & GROUND CURRENT INPUTS CT Primary: ......... 3x64..... ground current...... thermal capacity Data Storage: ....................................battery backed up................................................... retained for 3 days 1–10 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ....2 to 20 × CT ±20% of reading from 0.. 1 second at 100 × rated current 2 seconds at 40 × rated current continuous at 3 × rated current Data capture TRANSIENT RECORDER Buffer size: ........................... 14 Sampling rate:..... 32 samples per cycle Triggers: ......... ±1% of reading at 0................... ground differential current.................1× CT ±3% of reading from 0......................................1 VA at rated load Accuracy:............... 0..........................................002 to 3 × CT Input type:.... sensitive ground current................ of channels:..02 to 3 × CT ±20% of reading from 0...................................... 50/60 Hz Burden: ................... 3 s No............................................ 6x32 No................................. <0................................................................................................................ neutral current.. 1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order P1G1 or P5G5) Configurable 1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order P0G0) Nominal frequency: ...........battery backed-up.............................. per-phase differential second harmonic current...002 to 0.......................................................................... 1 second at 100 × rated current 2 seconds at 40 × rated current continuous at 3 × rated current SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT INPUT CT Primary: .......................................................... cause of event...... 256 Header:.......................................................1 VA at rated load Accuracy:................. RAM .............................................................................. 1 to 6000 A Range:........... 1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order P1S1 or P5S5) Configurable 1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order P0S0) Nominal frequency: ........ negative sequence current. ±1% of reading at 1× CT ±3% of reading from 0..................................... order code..................................... date of event........................... relay name............................................................... event number.... AC input channels Contact input state Contact output state Virtual input state Logic element state Data storage:.......... 50/60 Hz Burden: .................................... Manual Command Contact Input Virtual Input Logic Element Element Pickup/Trip/Dropout/Alarm Data: .......................................................... firmware revision Content:................................. per-phase current........................ restraint current........ 1 to 600 A Range:... of buffers:.............019 × CT CT withstand:.................... retained for 3 days EVENT RECORDER Number of events:......................... 0............................................................ 1x192..........................................02 to 0................02 to 20 × CT Input type:.....................................19 × CT CT withstand:............... RAM ......

........................................................300 VDC........................1 to 60 min in steps of 1 min Temperature Dropout:............................................0.......... 84...........................................-40°C to 20°C in steps of 1°C Time Delay: .....................................16 Trigger source inputs per element: ..........................17............................................................. 33...97 to 98% of pickup Timer 1 Delay: ............................1 to 64 ms....01 s Time Delay Accuracy: ....................3 Block inputs per element: ..0......00 s in steps of 0....................................................................per CT input AMBIENT TEMPERATURE High Temperature Pickup: ........................0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms Dropout timer: ..............01 s Timer 2 Delay: .....................................10 Selectable thresholds: ..... connected to Class 2 source Type:..............Auto-detect (DC shift or Amplitude Modulated) Amplitude modulated: 1 to 10 V pk-pk DC shift: 1 to 10 V DC Input impedance: 40 kOhm ± 10% RTC Accuracy: ± 1 min / month at 25°C Controls LOGIC ELEMENTS Number of logic elements: ................................wet contact 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–11 ...... OR...±1 second Inputs/Outputs CONTACT INPUTS Inputs:.................Date and time Daylight Saving Time IRIG-B:................................................. in steps of 1 ms Maximum input voltage & continuous current draw:......3 Supported operations: .............. NOT.......opto-isolated inputs External switch: ...................................01 x CT Dropout Level: ......00 s in steps of 0..........................................00 to 1...............0 to 1 cycle (Timer 1............ 166 VDC Recognition time: ..CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS CLOCK Setup:..........................00 x CT in steps of 0........................................................................................05 to 20............0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms BREAKER FAILURE Pickup Level:.................................... selectable.......20°C to 80°C in steps of 1°C Low Temperature Pickup: ..................................................................................................................................................................... Pickup / Dropout timers Pickup timer:............±10°C Timing Accuracy: ................................. 2 mA...03 to 1.........1/2 cycle Debounce time: ....................AND........................Configurable 90 to 98% of pickup Temperature Accuracy: ............ Timer 2) Level Accuracy:....................................................................................0...................

...................................................................99 s in steps of 0....... 5 (five) electromechanical Contact material:................................1 to 2.............................2 A Break (DC resistive): ...............01 Relay 2 trip seal-in: ....... 20 to 250 VDC Trickle current: . 20 to 60 VDC ALL RANGES Voltage withstand:............00 to 9........ L/R=40 ms):............99 s in steps of 0............................................3 A 250 V / 0................ 30 A per ANSI C37............................................................... silver-alloy Operate time:.............. 15 W nominal............ 0...................................3 A 250 V / 0........................3 A Break (AC inductive):...... 720 VA @ 250 VAC Pilot duty A300 Break (AC resistive):. <8 ms Continuous current:.......................................................................5 A 250 V / 0.............2 A Break (DC resistive): . 24 V / 1 A 48 V / 0.......................... 35 ms LOW RANGE POWER SUPPLY Nominal:...................................................................2s:....................... 720 VA @ 250 VAC Pilot duty A300 Break (AC resistive):..................................................................................................................90 Break (DC inductive... 20 W maximum 20 VA nominal. 120 to 240 VAC 125 to 250 VDC Range:.................5 A 125 V / 0.............................2s:.........01 Power supply HIGH RANGE POWER SUPPLY Nominal:......................................................SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION FORM-A RELAYS Configuration: ....... silver-alloy Operate time:............... 24 V / 1 A 48 V / 0..................................................................... 28 VA maximum 1–12 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ... 24 V / 10 A 48 V / 6 A 125 V / 0.....00 to 9........... 277 VAC / 10 A FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR Applicable voltage: ... 24 V / 10 A 48 V / 6 A 125 V / 0....................................... 10 A Make and carry for 0...................3 A Break (AC inductive):.............................. L/R=40 ms):...................................................... 10 A Make and carry for 0....................... 2 (two) electromechanical Contact material:.............. <8 ms Continuous current:..............90 Break (DC inductive.................................... 24 to 48 VDC Range:...................... 0......................... 2 × highest nominal voltage for 10 ms Power consumption: ...............................................................5 A 125 V / 0.............5 mA FORM-C RELAYS Configuration: ..................................................... 30 A per ANSI C37... 277 VAC / 10 A TRIP SEAL-IN Relay 1 trip seal-in: . 60 to 300 VAC (50 and 60 Hz) 84 to 300 VDC Ride-through time:..................5 A 250 V / 0...

........................... iec 60870-5-104......................................................................3KV Impulse voltage withstand EN60255-5 Damped Oscillatory IEC61000-4-18IEC60255-22-1 2.25 miles) Duplex: .. DNP 3....................RJ-45 Protocol: .......................................................................MTRJ Protocol: ..........................0...................... iec 60870-5-104...............................................................Compliant with USB 2...................................2 km (1.. 1KV DM Electrostatic Discharge EN61000-4-2/IEC60255-22-2 Level 4 RF immunity EN61000-4-3/IEC60255-22-3 Level 3 Fast Transient Disturbance EN61000-4-4/IEC60255-22-4 Class A and B Surge Immunity EN61000-4-5/IEC60255-22-5 Level 3 & 4 Conducted RF Immunity EN61000-4-6/IEC60255-22-6 Level 3 Power Frequency Immunity EN61000-4-7/IEC60255-22-7 Class A & B Voltage interruptionand Ripple DC IEC60255-11 15% ripple .....9 dB Maximum input power:........................10/100 MB (auto-detect) Connector:..............................................................................................................................115 kbps Testing and certification TESTING AND CERTIFICATION TEST REFERENCE STANDARD Dielectric voltage withstand TEST LEVEL 2........................................-31 dBm Power budget: ........................................................Modbus TCP......................................... Even Protocol: ..................................-11...8 dBm Typical distance:......................................................0........ IEC 60870-5-103 Maximum distance: .........None.....1300 nm Connector:..........................1200 m (4000 feet) Isolation:.....................2 kV ETHERNET (COPPER) Modes:.......half/full USB Standard specification:.............................................................up to 115 kbps Response time:.........................CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS Communications SERIAL RS485 port: ........ DNP3.. Odd..........................................................0 Data transfer rate:............Modbus RTU.......................... DNP3....................................0............Opto-coupled Baud rates:.......1 ms typical Parity:......100 MB Multi-mode Wavelength: ............... IEC 61850 GOOSE ETHERNET (FIBER) Fiber type:...........................................................................Modbus TCP.......5KV CM.-20 dBm Receiver sensitivity:......... 200ms interupts Radiated & Conducted Emissions CISPR11 /CISPR22/ IEC60255-25 Class A Sinusoidal Vibration IEC60255-21-1 Class 1 Shock & Bump IEC60255-21-2 Class 1 Siesmic IEC60255-21-3 Class 2 Power magnetic Immunity IEC61000-4-8 Level 5 Pulse Magnetic Immunity IEC61000-4-9 Level 4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5KV 1–13 ................................................................................. IEC 61850 GOOSE Transmit power:....................................

2 20V/m 80-1Ghz ESD Safety IEEE/ANSIC37..90..........................90.....1 kg [9.......... 4..2-14 e83849 NKCR7 UL1053 e83849 NKCR APPROVALS CE compliance Applicable Council Directive According to Low voltage directive EN60255-5 / EN60255-27 / EN61010-1 EMC Directive EN60255-26 / EN50263 EN61000-6-2 UL508 North America cULus UL1053 C22......... IP10 back 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ...3 8KV CD/ 15KV AD UL508 e83849 NKCR UL C22.........250/300cycle interrupts Damped Oscillatory IEC61000-4-12 2......90........5Khz Damped Oscillatrory IEEE/ANSI C37.. 6days) Altitude: 2000m (max) Pollution Degree: II Overvoltage Category: III Ingress protection: IP40 Front ........70.....1 4KV....0 lb] ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS Ambient temperatures: 1–14 Storage/Shipping: .. IP10 Back Environmental (Cold) IEC60068-2-1 -40C 16 hrs Environmental (Dry heat) IEC60068-2-2 85C 16hrs Relative Humidity Cyclic IEC60068-2-30 6day variant 2 EFT IEEE/ANSI C37......SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION TESTING AND CERTIFICATION TEST REFERENCE STANDARD TEST LEVEL Damped Magnetic Immunity IEC61000-4-10 Level 4 Voltage Dip & interruption IEC61000-4-11 0..1 2.40C to 85C Operating: -40C to 60C Humidity Operating up to 95% (non condensing) @ 55C (As per IEC60068-2-30 Variant 2..... Refer to Chapter 2 Weight: .....90....80% dips........No 14 ISO Manufactured under a registered ISO9001 quality program DIMENSIONS Size: ....1Mhz RF Immunity IEEE/ANSIC37......5KV.40.... 2. 1KV DM Conducted RF Immunity 0150khz IEC61000-4-16 Level 4 Voltage Ripple IEC61000-4-17 15% ripple Ingress Protection IEC60529 IP40 front .................5KV CM....2..

Dimensions The dimensions of the 345 are shown below. Additional dimensions for mounting and panel cutouts are shown in the following sections. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–1 . including dimensions for mounting and information on module withdrawal and insertion.Digital Energy Multilin 345 Transformer Protection System Chapter 2: Installation Installation Mechanical installation This section describes the mechanical installation of the 345 system.

firmware revision.MECHANICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION Figure 1: 345 dimensions Product identification The product identification label is located on the side panel of the 345. and date of manufacture. serial number. Figure 2: 345 label 2–2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . This label indicates the product model.

CAUTION: CAUTION Figure 3: Panel mounting Figure 4: Mounting tabs (optional) “V” TABS BOTTOM TAB 1. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–3 . To avoid the potential for personal injury due to fire hazards. ensure the unit is mounted in a safe location and/or within an appropriate enclosure. slide the empty case into the cutout until the bottom tab clicks into place (see above). From the front of the panel.CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION MECHANICAL INSTALLATION Mounting STANDARD PANEL MOUNT The standard panel mount and cutout dimensions are illustrated below.

25 mm) Unit withdrawal and insertion Figure 6: Unit withdrawal and insertion diagram 2–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .1 mm ±0.4 mm ±0.010” (152.010” (101.25 mm) L C 6.010” (135. Figure 5: Panel cutout dimensions 5.MECHANICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION 2. From the rear of the panel screw the case into the panel at the 8 screw positions shown above.000” ±0.6 mm ±0. 3.200” (5.000” ±0.010” (104. If added security is required.1 mm) 6.25 mm) L C Φ 0.350” ±0.100” ±0. bend the retaining "V"tabs outward.3 mm ±0.010” (175. These tabs are located on the sides of the case and appear as shown above.9 mm ±0. to about 90°.900” ±0.25 mm) 4. The relay can now be inserted and can be panel wired.25mm) 4.

32X3/8IN P/HD PHIL BLK GE PART # 1408-0306.CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 8 . IF THIS IS NOT THE CASE. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–5 . IN THE MANNER SPECIFIED BY THE MANUFACTURER. OPERATED. (QTY:8) TIGHTENING TORQUE: 15 IN LB THE HANDLE MUST BE ROTATED 90⁰ WHILE SLIDING THE 345 DRAW-OUT UNIT INTO THE CAPTIVE UNIT KEEP THE HANDLE IN ITS ROTATED POSITION UNTIL THE DRAW-OUT UNIT IS INSERTED COMPLETELY PUSH THE HANDLE DOWN AND TIGHTEN THE SCREW UNTIL THE HANDLE IS PARALLEL WITH THE FRONT PANEL SURFACE NOTE: IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE USER TO ENSURE THAT THE EQUIPMENT IS INSTALLED. THEN THE SAFETY PROTECTION PROVIDED BY THE EQUIPMENT MAY BE IMPAIRED. AND USED FOR ITS INTENDED FUNCTION.

CDR 2–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .+ F2 F1 F5 F4 F3 F6 B11 7 CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY A11 B12 A12 GROUND BUS 897744.POWER chassis B2 gnd C1 52a W1 BKR (CI #1) C2 52b W1 BKR (CI #2) C3 52a W2 BKR (CI #3) C4 52b W2 BKR (CI #4) C5 INPUT 5 C6 INPUT 6 C7 INPUT 7 C8 INPUT 8 C9 INPUT 9 C10 INPUT 10 C11 COMMON GROUND BUS GND STUD A2 DIGITAL INPUTS 52a IC + Winding 1 Breaker 52a Aux Contacts 52b POWER SUPPLY 345 Transformer Protection System IC B3 1 TRIP V A3 A4 V 3 AUXILIARY C12 CHASSIS GND B5 A5 TRIP CIRCUIT W1 BKR + TRIP CIRCUIT W2 BKR 52a W1 BKR B4 2 TRIP + TRIP COIL TRIP COIL 52a W2 BKR B6 A6 B7 4 AUXILIARY Front Panel A7 B8 USB TYPE B A8 USB 5 AUXILIARY B9 6 AUXILIARY B10 A10 OUTPUT CONTACTS SHOWN WITH NO CONTROL POWER A9 4 WIRE USB Rear Panel ETHERNET RJ45 mTRJ COMMUNICATIONS IRIG-B 10/100 BASE-T100 BASE-FX 4 WIRE ETHERNET OPTIONAL .ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION Electrical installation Figure 7: Typical wiring diagram TWO WINDING TRANSFORMER WINDING 2 WINDING 1 A B C E9 D9 E10 D10 E11 D11 E12 D12 E5 D5 E6 D6 E7 D7 E8 D8 IA IA IB IB IC IC IG IA IG IA IB IB Winding 2 Breaker Aux Contacts 52b IG IG B1 - A1 + CONTROL .+ RS485 .

This is to ensure the adjacent lower terminal block does not interfere with the lug body. both lugs should be "right side up" as shown in the picture below. Figure 8: CORRECT INSTALLATION METHOD 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–7 .CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Terminal identification NOTE: NOTE When installing two lugs on one terminal.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION Figure 9: INCORRECT INSTALLATION METHOD (lower lug reversed) 2–8 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–9 . Note the solid square markings shown with all instrument transformer connections. the user must follow the instrument transformer polarities. shown in the Typical Wiring Diagram. The phase sequence is user programmable for either ABC or ACB rotation.CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Figure 10: Terminal Identification F 1 POWER SUPPLY 2 3 4 W1 TRIP N/O W1 TRIP OPTV W2 TRIP COM 5 AUX 3 N/C 6 AUX 3 N/O 7 AUX 4 COM 8 AUX 5 N/C 9 AUX 5 N/O 10 AUX 6 COM 11 CRIT FAIL N/C 12 CRIT FAIL N/O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 POWER SUPPLY + 1 INPUT 1 CHASSIS GND 2 INPUT 2 W1 TRIP COM 3 INPUT 3 W2 TRIP N/O 4 INPUT 4 W2 TRIP OPTV 5 INPUT 5 AUX 3 COM W1 PHASE A CT 6 INPUT 6 AUX 4 N/C W1 PHASE B CT 7 INPUT 7 AUX 4 N/O W1 PHASE C CT 8 INPUT 8 W1 GND CT AUX 5 COM 9 INPUT 9 AUX 6 N/C W2 PHASE A CT 10 INPUT 10 AUX 6 N/O W2 PHASE B CT 11 INPUT COM CRIT FAIL COM W2 PHASE C CT 12 CHASSIS GND A B IRIG-B + IRIG-B RS485 + RS485 RS485 COM CHASSIS GND RESERVED RESERVED ■W1 PHASE A CT 5 ■W1 PHASE B CT 6 ■W1 PHASE C CT 7 ■W1 GND CT ■W2 PHASE B CT 10 ■W2 PHASE C CT 11 ■W2 GND CT W2 GND CT C 8 ■W2 PHASE A CT 9 12 D E Phase sequence and transformer polarity For correct operation of the relay features.

each with an isolating transformer. and D12 and E12 for W2) are used in conjunction with a Zero Sequence CT as source. In cases where the relay is equipped with sensitive ground CT (terminals D8 and E8 for W1. shows 3 possible ways for wiring the Winding 1 ground CT (terminals D8. NOTE: NOTE 2–10 The ground CT wiring in the figure below. IMPORTANT: The phase and ground current inputs will correctly measure up to 20 times the current input’s nominal rating. CAUTION: CAUTION CAUTION: CAUTION Verify that the relay’s nominal input current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rating of the connected CTs. The Sensitive Ground input must only be used on systems where the maximum ground current does not exceed 100 times the rated current for 1 second.are referred to throughout this manual as the Ground Current or Sensitive Ground Current inputs. Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate protection. and D12 and E12 for W2) the sensitive ground current input is intended for use with a CT in a source neutral of a high-impedance grounded system. CAUTION: CAUTION Ground and sensitive ground CT inputs Two ground inputs . There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. The Winding 2 ground CT wiring (terminals D12. When using the residual connection set the GROUND CT PRIMARY setpoint to a value equal to the PHASE CT PRIMARY setpoint. The following figures show three possible ground connections (or three possible sensitive ground connections). E12) is similar. Time overcurrent curves become horizontal lines for currents above the 20 × CT rating. Current transformers with 1 to 6000 A primaries may be used. consider that the relay automatically calculates the neutral (residual) current from the sum of the three phase current phasors. The sensitive ground current input can be connected to a Zero Sequence CT for increased sensitivity and accuracy when physically possible in the system. This becomes apparent if the pickup level is set above the nominal CT rating. or in the neutral of wye-connected source CTs.ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION Current inputs The 345 relay has eight (8) channels for AC current inputs. or on ungrounded systems. The ground inputs (Terminals D8 and E8 for W1. Before making ground connections. In this case. E8). 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .one per winding . they MUST be short circuited. the SENSTV GND CT PRIMARY setpoint should be programmed to a value equal to the PHASE CT PRIMARY setpoint. Before working on CTs. On ungrounded systems it is connected residually with the phase current inputs.

CDR For Winding 2 ground CT. are shown in the figure below.CDR 2–11 . Figure 12: Zero sequence core balance (CT) installation UNSHIELDED CABLE A Source B C SHIELDED CABLE Ground connection to neutral must be on the source side N G A Source B C Stress cone shields Ground outside CT LOAD LOAD 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL To ground. for ground fault current detection. Zero sequence CT installation The various CT connections and the exact placement of a Zero Sequence CT. must be on load side 898733. Twisted pair cabling on the Zero Sequence CT is recommended. use relay terminals D12-E12 in the same wiring configuration as shown above for Winding 1.CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Figure 11: Ground/Sensitive Ground wiring Transformer Winding 1 A B C E5 A E7 E6 B D5 SR345 PHASE CURRENT INPUTS C D7 D6 D8 E8 E8 D8 E8 D8 N IG IG N IG N GROUND GROUND CURRENT INPUT GROUND GROUND GROUND CURRENT INPUT WITH ZERO SEQUENCE CT GROUND CURRENT INPUT WITH RESIDUAL CONNECTION 897730.

using the shortest practical path. 166). CAUTION: CAUTION An external switch. The installed power supply’s operating range will be one of the following: LO: 24 to 48 V DC (Range: 20 to 60 V DC) HI: 125 to 250 V DC/120 to 240 V AC (Range: 84 to 250 V DC/66 to 265 V AC) CAUTION: CAUTION The relay should be connected directly to the ground bus. NOTE: NOTE Figure 13: Control power connection CONTROL POWER + - HEAVY COPPER CONDUCTOR OR BRAIDED WIRE B2 A1 B1 CHASSIS GROUND SWITCHGEAR GROUND BUS - + CONTROL POWER RELAY 898735. Isolate power prior to servicing. If the applied voltage does not match.ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION Control power CAUTION: CAUTION Control power supplied to the relay must match the installed power supply range. 84. As a minimum. A tinned copper. CAUTION: CAUTION 2–12 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .CDR Contact inputs External contacts can be connected to the relay’s ten (10) digital inputs. circuit breaker. normal operation regardless of control power supply type. All grounds MUST be connected for safe. These contacts are wet only. The inputs can be programmed to different thresholds depending on the DC voltage (17. The label found on the relay specifies its order code or model number. 96 strands of number 34 AWG should be used. Belden catalog number 8660 is suitable. or other protective device must be connected near to the equipment. braided. 33. shielding and bonding cable should be used. damage to the unit may occur. Ensure correct polarity on contact input connections and do not connect any contact input circuits to ground or else relay hardware may be damaged.

The other side of this contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Note that the default setting for the seal-in time is 40 ms. • If a delay is programmed for the Trip contact seal-in time. The voltage monitor is connected across each of the two Form A contacts. Breaker monitoring (Trip coil monitoring) is performed by a built-in voltage monitor on Form A output relays: #1 Trip. When a relay feature sends a command to one of these special relays. • The Trip relays reset after the breaker is detected in a state corresponding to the command. then this delay is added to the reset time. 52a Contact Configured 52b Contact Configured Relay Operation Yes Yes Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an open breaker. 52a nor 52b. Yes No Trip Relay remains operational until 52a indicates an open breaker. The special purpose relays have fixed operating characteristics and the general purpose relays can be configured by the user. four general purpose relays (Auxiliary Relays 3 to 6). In addition. and #2 Trip. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–13 . the negative side of the external source must be connected to the relay’s DC negative rail at Terminal C11. • If neither of the breaker auxiliary contacts. No Yes Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an open breaker. it will remain operational until the requested change of breaker state is confirmed by a breaker auxiliary contact and the initiating condition has reset. In order to do this.CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. an external jumper must be connected between terminals A2 and A3 for #1 Trip coil monitoring. is programmed to a contact input. Operation of the two Trip output relays is designed to be controlled by the state of the circuit breaker as monitored by a 52a or 52b contact. and B5 for #2 Trip coil monitoring. Figure 14: Wet contact connections Wet Contact Connection 345 RELAY Contact Input 1 C1 V DC Power Supply Contact Input Common C11 LOGICIN. or 100 ms after the feature causing the trip resets. or a default interval of 100 ms after the initiating input resets. The maximum external source voltage for this arrangement is 300 V DC. the output relay will be reset after a default interval of 2 seconds.CDR Trip1 and Trip2 output relays The 345 relay is equipped with seven electromechanical relays: two special relays designed for Winding 1 Breaker trip and Winding 2 Breaker trip. and a Critical Failure relay. but the breaker does not change state. and the relay effectively detects healthy current through the circuit. the Trip Relay is de-energized after either the delay programmed in the Breaker Failure feature. or/and B4. • If the initiating feature resets. No No Trip Relay operates until either the Breaker Failure delay expires (if the Breaker Failure element is enabled).

To monitor the Trip coil circuit integrity. and provide a jumper between terminals B4 (optional voltage) and B5. or if in general a high resistance is detected in the circuitry. use the relay terminals B4 and A4 to connect the Trip coil. a Trip alarm will be set and the “ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs will be on. NOTE: NOTE Figure 15: Relay #1 Trip and Relay #2 Trip circuits with no voltage monitoring DC + Output Relay 1 (TRIP) DC + Output Relay 2 (TRIP) A2 B4 B3 A4 V V A3 B5 52a contact 52a contact Trip Coil Trip Coil 897785. NOTE: NOTE To monitor the Trip coil circuit integrity. NOTE: NOTE Figure 16: Relay #1 Trip and Relay #2 Trip circuits with voltage monitoring DC + DC + Output Relay 1 (TRIP) Output Relay 2 (TRIP) External jumper A2 External jumper B4 B3 A4 V V A3 B5 52a contact 52a contact Trip Coil Trip Coil 897786.ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above the threshold of the trickle currents (see Technical Specification for Form A output relays). the circuit integrity for the Trip coil is effectively normal. If the Trip coil circuit gets disconnected. and provide a jumper between terminals A2 (optional voltage) and A3.cdr DC - DC - All AUX contacts are shown when the breaker is open. use the relay terminals A2 and B3 to connect the Trip coil. Example 1: The figures below show the two different connections of the breaker Trip coil to the relay’s trip output #1 terminals (output #2 Trip coil monitoring) for both no voltage monitoring and voltage monitoring of the trip circuit integrity.cdr DC - 2–14 DC - 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTH OF 1200 m (4000 ft. Avoid star or stub connected configurations.CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Serial communications Figure 17: RS485 wiring diagram ZT (*) SHIELD 345 IED TWISTED PAIR E2 RS485 + D2 RS485 - OPTOCOUPLER OPTOCOUPLER DATA DATA COM SCADA. For larger systems.). The 345 IEDs must be wired with all the positive (+) terminals connected together and all the negative (–) terminals connected together. an isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface is used to prevent noise coupling. Belden #9841) and total wire length should not exceed 1200 meters (4000 ft. Up to 32 345 IEDs can be daisy-chained together on a communication channel without exceeding the driver capability. Internally. surge protection devices are internally installed across all RS485 terminals. at the master or at the 345. either internally or externally. CAUTION: CAUTION To ensure that all devices in a daisy-chain are at the same potential. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–15 . it is imperative that the common terminals of each RS485 port are tied together and grounded only once. additional serial channels must be added. as shown in the figure above. The source computer/PLC/SCADA system should have similar transient protection devices installed. Commercially available repeaters will allow for transmission distances greater than 1200 meters. Failure to do so may result in intermittent or failed communications. The last device at each end of the daisy-chain should be terminated with a 120 ohm ¼ watt resistor in series with a 1 nF capacitor across the positive and negative terminals. Commercially available repeaters can also be used to add more than 32 relays on a single channel.) IED ZT (*) RS485 + RS485 - COMMON LAST DEVICE 897738.CDR One two-wire RS485 port is provided. Suitable cable should have a characteristic impedance of 120 ohms (for example. PLC. Observing these guidelines will ensure a reliable communication system immune to system transients. Voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link are not uncommon. For this reason. Ground the shield at one point only. to avoid ground loops. Each relay must be daisy-chained to the next one. OR PERSONAL COMPUTER E3 COMMON GROUND THE SHIELD AT THE SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER ONLY OR THE 350C ONLY IED RS485 + (*) TERMINATING IMPEDANCE AT EACH END (typically 120 ohms and 1 nF) RS485 - COMMON UP TO 32 350C OR OTHER IEDs. Correct polarity is also essential.

width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shift or amplitude modulated (AM) form. The type of form is auto-detected by the 345 relay. Third party equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal. this equipment may use a GPS satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can also be synchronized. Figure 18: IRIG-B connection GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM GPS CONNECTION OPTIONAL IRIG-B TIME CODE GENERATOR (DC SHIFT OR AMPLITUDE MODULATED SIGNAL CAN BE USED) RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE GE MULTILIN 345 RELAY + E1 – D1 IRIG-B(-) IRIG-B(+) RECEIVER 897741.CDR TO OTHER DEVICES 2–16 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . The IRIG time code formats are serial.ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION IRIG-B IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows time stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices within 1 millisecond.

Digital Energy Multilin 345 Transformer Protection System Chapter 3: Interfaces Interfaces There are two methods of interfacing with the 345 Transformer Protection System. This section provides an overview of the interfacing methods available with the 345 using the relay control panels and EnerVista SR3 Setup software. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–1 . refer to the individual chapters. • Interfacing via the EnerVista SR3 Setup software. settings. etc. actual values. For additional details on interface parameters (for example. • Interfacing via the relay keypad and display.).

FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES Front control panel interface Figure 1: Transformer Protection System Front Panel GE Multilin SR345 Transformer Protection System IN SERVICE TRIP W1 BREAKER OPEN TROUBLE ALARM W1 BREAKER CLOSED PICKUP W2 BREAKER OPEN MAINTENANCE W2 BREAKER CLOSED SETPOINT GROUP 1 SETPOINT GROUP 2 △ ◁ ▷ ▽ ▲ MENU ENTER ▼ ESCAPE RESET USB 897351A1.cdr 3–2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

and sub-pages. The USB program port is also provided for connection with a computer running the EnerVista SR3 Setup software. When the keypad and display are not being used. The control keys are used to select the appropriate message for entering setpoints or displaying measured values. Any trip. Pressing the Menu key during the display of default message returns the display to the last message shown before the default message appeared. Display The 80-character liquid crystal display (LCD) allows visibility under varied lighting conditions. and a USB program port. system information is displayed after a user-defined period of inactivity. Setpoints. control keys. Working with the Keypad The 345 display messages are organized into a Main Menu. automatically overriding the default message. pages. Quick Setup. There are four main menus labeled Actual Values. or pickup is displayed immediately. and Maintenance. which appear in sequence as follows: Figure 2: The four Main Menu headers █ ACTUAL VALUES QUICK SETUP SETPOINTS MAINTENANCE Pressing the MESSAGE ► key or the ENTER key from these Main Menu pages will display the corresponding menu Page. alarm. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–3 . Pressing the MENU key followed by the MESSAGE key scrolls through the four Main Menu headers. Use the MESSAGE ▲ and MESSAGE ▼ keys to scroll through the Page headers. The display and status indicators show the relay information automatically.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE Description The relay front panel provides an interface with a liquid crystal display. LED status indicators.

pressing the MESSAGE ► key or the ENTER key will display the page headers of programmable parameters (referred to as setpoints in the manual). Each page is broken down further into logical sub-pages of messages. latched Trip LEDs. The MESSAGE ◄ key can also be used to exit sub-pages and to cancel setpoint changes. breaker operation failure. The Autoreclose Scheme is also reset with the shot counter being returned to zero and the lockout condition being cleared. 3–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . █ LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY When the display shows SETPOINTS. It is used to exit the sub-pages and to cancel a setpoint change.. When the display shows ACTUAL VALUES.FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES Figure 3: Typical paging operation from Main Menu selection △ Back ▶ ACTUAL VALUES █ A1 STATUS A2 METERING A3 RECORDS ▶ ▽ 1 click A1 STATUS █ CLOCK CONTACT INPUTS OUTPUT RELAYS Back ▼ ◁ ▷ ▼ 2 clicks A1 STATUS CLOCK CONTACT INPUTS █ OUTPUT RELAYS Back ▼ ◁ ▷ ▼ Click to end A1 STATUS . The ESCAPE key is also dual purpose. They also decrement and increment numerical setpoints. and trip / close coil failures. The MESSAGE ► key can also be used to enter sub-pages but not to store altered setpoints. The RESET key resets any latched conditions that are not currently active. A summary of the setpoints and actual values pages can be found in the Chapters : Setpoints and Actual Values. The ENTER key is dual purpose. . The MESSAGE ▲ and MESSAGE ▼ keys are used to navigate through the sub-pages. This includes resetting latched output relays. pressing the MESSAGE ► key or the ENTER key displays the page headers of measured parameters (referred to as actual values in the manual). respectively. The VALUE keys are used to scroll through the possible choices of an enumerated setpoint. It is used to enter the sub-pages and to store altered setpoint values into memory to complete the change.

The protection elements from group 2 will be inactive. closed breaker status is determined by closed 52a contact and opened 52b contact. • SETPOINT GROUP 1. • BREAKER CLOSED: Red/Green/Orange – programmable When the breaker is closed. • BREAKER OPEN: Red/Green/Orange – programmable When the breaker is open. NOTE: NOTE The 345 provides also detecting the breaker status by using only one contact: either 52a or 52b. The settings for each protection element can be edited and displayed regardless of the active group. it would be impossible to distinguish between a breaker open state and breaker racked out state. if the function of the operated protection was selected as "latched alarm". It is strongly recommended to detect the breaker status by using both 52a and 52b contacts. this indicator will be on continuously. operating. or communications. • TRIP: Red This indicator turns on when the relay detects a fault and sends a trip command to the trip output relay. with element functions selected as “alarm”. The relay will turn back to “IN-SERVICE” if no major self-test error is present. The LED will automatically turn off if the alarm condition clears. in all cases after the fault condition has cleared. If setpoint group 1 is lit green. unless another contact from the breaker is wired to the relay. or latched. If both 52a and 52b contacts are open. 2: Green These LEDs indicate the group of active protection elements. one should be aware that in such cases. when the relay is set to “Ready” under S1 RELAY SETUP/INSTALLATION/RELAY STATUS. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–5 . Diagnostic messages are displayed indicating the state of protection and monitoring elements that are picked up. due to a breaker being racked out from the switchgear. With both contacts wired to the relay. The LED will remain steady “ON”. LED status indicators • IN SERVICE: Green This LED will be continuously “ON”.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE The MESSAGE ▲ and MESSAGE ▼ keys scroll through any active conditions in the relay. • ALARM: Amber This LED will flash upon detection of an alarm condition. and no major self-test errors have been detected. when the relay is not programmed (Not Ready) state under S1 RELAY SETUP/INSTALLATION/RELAY STATUS. The indicator will turn off if no pickup condition is detected. • TROUBLE: Amber This LED will turn “ON”. or upon detection of a major self-test error. both the Breaker Open and Breaker Closed LED Indicators will be off. • PICKUP: Amber This indicator will light ON upon pickup condition generated by any of the relay features. Breaker status indication is based on the breaker’s 52a and 52b contacts. The LED will reset by initiating a reset command from either the RESET pushbutton Breaker Control. this indicator will be on continuously. only the protection elements under group 1 will be active. However. Visa-versa the open breaker status is determined by opened 52a contact and closed 52b contact.

Phase A Function: Trip A4 TARGET MESSAGES Ph IOC1 Trip State: Operate ▼ Phase:A Cause <Function> The first line contains information of the cause of operation (the name of the operated element). they will reappear on the screen after the time specified under the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > S1 FRONT PANEL > MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting. When this additional input is closed. In this case. that will start timing out from the last pressed pushbutton. State: Operate This line from the display shows the state of the element: Pickup. and after 5 seconds will start rolling up the other target messages until the conditions clear and/or the RESET command is initiated. both breaker status indicators will be off. • MAINTENANCE: Amber This LED may indicate both breaker or relay maintenance depending on the programmed maintenance elements. The following shows the format of a typical Target Message: Figure 4: Typical target message A4 TARGET MESSAGES Cause <function> State: Operate ▼ Phase: Figure 5: Example of a Phase IOC1 Operation . Phase: A The last line from the display shows the phase that picked up or operated. the BKR CONNECTED function under SETPOINTS/S2 SYSTEM SETUP/S2 BREAKER should be programmed to an additional contact input. The relay displays the most recent event first. this additional breaker connected input should be open. Alarm. Relay messages Target messages Target messages are automatically displayed for any active condition on the relay such as pickups. where they can be reviewed. The Target Messages can be reviewed by pressing either the MESSAGE UP or MESSAGE DOWN key. a single 52a or 52b contact will show both breaker states. the display will not show the target messages unless the user navigates to ACTUAL VALUES > A4 TARGET MESSAGES. The LED will turn on upon operation of a maintenance element.FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES To clarify this ambiguity. If a RESET command is not performed but any of the other faceplate pushbuttons is pressed. 3–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . and the element function. When the breaker is racked out. trips. If the target messages have not been cleared before the user presses a pushbutton different from “RESET”. or alarms. Operated.

Detected Instantaneously Check Ethernet cable and Ethernet connection. check cable functionality (i. • Turn off the "IN SERVICE" LED. Check status of external routers and switches. • Record the minor self-test error in the Event Recorder.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES Self-test errors FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE The relay performs self diagnostics at initialization (after power up). turn on the "TROUBLE" LED. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–7 . • Display the cause of major self-test failure. the relay will: • De-energize critical failure relay (Output Relay 7). Self-Test Warnings may indicate a serious problem with the relay hardware! CAUTION: CAUTION Upon detection of a minor problem. Check health of the network. If none of these apply. Otherwise monitor reccurences as errors are detected and self-reset. then contact factory. MAINTENANCE No ALERT: Ethernet Link Fail Communication error between 345 and Network. • Flash the "ALARM" LED. Major errors indicate a problem with the relay which takes it out of service. • Inhibit operation of all other output relays (1 to 6). Every 5 seconds* Set the date and time in PRODUCT SETUP. Minor problems indicate a problem with the relay that does not compromise protection of the power system. or 3 Communication error between CPU and Comms board. • Display the error on the relay display. • Record the major self-test failure in the Event Recorder. There are two types of self-test warnings indicating either a minor or major problem. and check input signal level (it may be less than specification). Every 5 seconds* Ensure IRIG-B cable is connected. Figure 6: Typical Self-test warning A4 TARGET MESSAGES UNIT FAILURE: Contact Factory: Error code:1 Table 1: Minor Self-test Errors Self-test Error Latched Description of Message Target Problem Message? How Often the Test is Performed What to do MAINTENANCE No ALERT: IRIG-B Failure A bad IRIG-B input signal has been detected. ensure IRIG-B receiver is functioning. and continuously as a background task to ensure that the hardware and software are functioning correctly. contact the factory. MAINTENANCE No ALERT: Comm Alert 1. Upon detection of a major problem. 2. MAINTENANCE No ALERT: Clock Not Set Clock time is the same as the default time.e. Every 5 seconds* If alert doesn’t self-reset. physical damage or perform continuity test). the relay will: • Turn on the "TROUBLE" LED at the same time as the "IN SERVICE" LED is on.

3–8 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . error.that is. COMMAND EXECUTED This flash message is displayed in response to executing a command: ON. Contact the factory and provide the failure code. or general information messages displayed in response to pressing certain keys. NO. YES. On power up and whenever the PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION setting is altered.FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES Table 2: Major Self-test Errors Self-test Error Latched Description of Message Target Problem Message? How Often the Test is Performed What to do UNIT FAILURE: Contact Factory (XXXX) Yes This warning is Every 5 seconds1 caused by a unit hardware failure. Failure code (XXXX) is shown. RELAY NOT READY: Check Settings No PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION setting indicates that relay is not in a programmed state. OFF. after 25 seconds. Flash messages Flash messages are warning. Program all required settings then set the PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION setting to "Programmed". etc. The edited value was stored as entered. as part of password security.Failure is logged after the detection of 5 consecutive failures . Figure 7: Typical Flash message S3 PHASE IOC BLOCK 1 Logic Element 8 <SETPOINT STORED> SETPOINT STORED This flash message is displayed in response to the ENTER key while on any setpoint message (see example above). The factory default flash message time is 4 seconds. 1. INVALID PASSWORD This flash message appears upon an attempt to enter an incorrect password.

CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP Software setup Quick setup . it is possible to: • Program and modify settings • Load and save setting files to and from a disk • Read actual values • Monitor status • Read pre-trip data and event records • Get help on any topic 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–9 . EnerVista SR3 Setup Software Although settings can be entered manually using the control panel keys. With EnerVista SR3 Setup running. • Quick Setup window options are available for a single device or a file.Software interface • The Quick Setup window allows you to configure important settings from different screens in the relay by adding them to a common window. • The Quick Setup Window option is accessed from the "Tree" which launches on clicking. The EnerVista SR3 Setup software is available from GE Multilin to make this as convenient as possible. a PC can be used to download setpoints through the communications port.

3. In addition. The EnerVista SR3 Setup software can run without a 345 connected to the computer. 2. Click the IED Setup section of the LaunchPad toolbar. Insert the GE EnerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive. click the Add Product button and select the 345 Feeder Protection System as shown below. Hardware and software requirements The following requirements must be met for the EnerVista SR3 Setup software. • Microsoft Windows™ 7 / XP is installed and running properly. and write and edit setting files. status and trip messages can be displayed with the actual value screens. upgrade the relay firmware. the 345 can be programmed from the setting screens. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . • At least 100 MB of hard disk space is available.SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES • Upgrade the 345 firmware The EnerVista SR3 Setup software allows immediate access to all 345 features with easy to use pull down menus in the familiar Windows environment. In this case. 4. When installation is complete. 5. settings may be saved to a file for future use.com. Select the Web option to ensure the most recent software release. This section provides the necessary information to install EnerVista SR3 Setup. Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the nocharge EnerVista software on the local PC. The EnerVista SR3 Setup software can be installed from either the GE EnerVista CD or the GE Multilin website at http://www. Installing the EnerVista SR3 Setup software 3–10 After ensuring the minimum requirements indicated earlier. In the EnerVista Launchpad window. use the following procedure to install the EnerVista SR3 Setup software from the enclosed GE EnerVista CD.GEmultilin. or select CD if you do not have a web connection. • At least 256 MB of RAM is installed. If a 345 is connected to a PC and communications are enabled. measured values. 1. then click the Add Now button to list software items for the 345. start the EnerVista Launchpad application.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–11 . the USB driver will be loaded into the computer. Select the complete path.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP 6. The files will be installed in the directory indicated. where the EnerVista SR3 Setup software will be installed. including the new directory name. 9. as shown below. and the installation program will automatically create icons and add EnerVista SR3 Setup software to the Windows start menu. 8. 7. The 345 device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista Launchpad window. EnerVista Launchpad will obtain the latest installation software from the Web or CD and automatically start the installation process. Click on Next to begin the installation. A status window with a progress bar will be shown during the downloading process.

SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES If you are going to communicate from your computer to the 345 Relay using the USB port: 10. Select USB as the Interface type. Launch EnerVista SR3 Setup from LaunchPad. 14. Plug the USB cable into the USB port on the 345 Relay then into the USB port on your computer. In EnerVista > Device Setup: 13. 11. 3–12 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . 12. Select 345 Relay as the USB device.

Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site. 4. For RS485 communications. Refer to the F485 manual for additional details. see Configuring Ethernet Communications below. 5. 2. If desired. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 345 device and upload the order code. 6. 7. Enter the desired name in the "Device Name" field and a description (optional) of the device. Proceed to Connecting to the Relay below. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. 1. To configure the relay for Ethernet communications. 8. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista SR3 Setup software (available from the GE Multilin web site). In this example. the GE Multilin F485 converter will be required. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista SR3 Setup window. a short description of the site can also be entered. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–13 .CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP Connecting EnerVista SR3 Setup to the relay Configuring serial communications Before starting. 3. Click the Add Device button to define the new device. Select “Serial” from the Interface drop-down list. The 345 Site Device has now been configured for USB communications. 9. See the previous section for the installation procedure. to begin communications. This example demonstrates an USB connection. verify that the cable is properly connected to either the USB port on the front panel of the device (for USB communications) or to the RS485 terminals on the back of the device (for RS485 communications). The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista SR3 Setup window. Enter the desired site name in the "Site Name" field. we will use “New Site 1” as the site name.

Ethernet can also be used as the interface for Quick Connect as shown above. 3–14 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . the "Quick Connect" feature can quickly connect the EnerVista SR3 Setup software to a 345 front port if the USB is selected in the interface drop-down list. When connected.SOFTWARE SETUP Using the Quick Connect feature CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES The Quick Connect button can be used to establish a fast connection through the front panel USB port of a 345 relay. or through the Ethernet port. Select "345 Relay" and press the Connect button. a new Site called “Quick Connect” will appear in the Site List window. The following window will appear when the QuickConnect button is pressed: As indicated by the window.

In this example. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet functionality. 3. Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site. 4. to begin communications.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP The 345 Site Device has now been configured via the Quick Connect feature for either USB or Ethernet communications. we will use “Substation 1” as the site name. See the previous section for the installation procedure. The new site will appear in the upper-left list. Click the Add Device button to define the new device. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–15 . Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista SR3 Setup Setup software (available from the GE EnerVista CD). verify that the Ethernet cable is properly connected to the RJ-45 Ethernet port. NOTE: NOTE 1. 6. 7. a short description of the site can also be entered. If desired. Configuring Ethernet communications Before starting. 2. and a description (optional). 345 supports a maximum of 3 TCP/IP sessions. Enter the desired name in the "Device Name" field. Select “Ethernet” from the Interface drop-down list. Enter the desired site name in the "Site Name" field. Proceed to Connecting to the Relay below. 5.

SOFTWARE SETUP

CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

8.

Enter the IP address, slave address, and Modbus port values assigned to the 345 relay
(from the S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > ETHERNET menu).

9.

Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 345 and upload the order code. If
a communications error occurs, ensure that the Ethernet communication values
correspond to the relay setting values.

10. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added
to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main
EnerVista SR3 Setup window.
The 345 Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to
the following section to begin communications.

Connecting to the
relay

3–16

Now that the communications parameters have been properly configured, the user can
easily communicate with the relay.
1.

Expand the Site list by double clicking on the site name or clicking on the «+» box to
list the available devices for the given site.

2.

Desired device trees can be expanded by clicking the «+» box. The following list of
headers is shown for each device:
Device Definition
Actual Values
Quick Setup
Setpoints
Maintenance.

3.

Expand the SETTINGS > RELAY SETUP list item and double click on Front Panel to open
the "Front Panel" settings window as shown below:

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

SOFTWARE SETUP

4.

The "Front Panel" settings window will open with a corresponding status indicator on
the lower left of the EnerVista SR3 Setup window.

5.

If the status indicator is red, verify that the serial, USB, or Ethernet cable is properly
connected to the relay, and that the relay has been properly configured for
communications (steps described earlier).
The "Front Panel" settings can now be edited, printed, or changed. Other setpoint and
command windows can be displayed and edited in a similar manner. "Actual Values"
windows are also available for display. These windows can be arranged, and resized at will.

Working with setpoints and setpoint files
Engaging a device

The EnerVista SR3 Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to
directly communicate with a relay. Communicating relays are organized and grouped by
communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any number of relays selected
from the product series.

Entering setpoints

The System Setup page will be used as an example to illustrate the entering of setpoints.
Inthis example, we will be changing the power system setpoints.
1.

Establish communications with the relay.

2.

Select the Setpoint > System Setup > Transformer menu item.

3.

Select the Transformer Rating setpoint by clicking anywhere in the parameter box.
This will display three arrows: two to increment/decrement the value, and another to
launch the numerical keypad.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

3–17

SOFTWARE SETUP

File support

Using setpoints files

3–18

CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

4.

Clicking the arrow at the end of the box displays a numerical keypad interface that
allows the user to enter a value within the setpoint range displayed near the top of the
keypad: Click = to exit from the keypad and keep the new value. Click on X to exit from
the keypad and retain the old value.

5.

For setpoints requiring non-numerical pre-set values (e.g. Transformer type below),
clicking anywhere within the setpoint value box displays a dropdown selection menu
arrow. Select the desired value from this list.

6.

For setpoints requiring an alphanumeric text string (e.g. "relay name"), the value may
be entered directly within the setpoint value box.

7.

In the Setpoint > System Setup > Transformer dialog box, click on Save to save the
values into the 345. Click YES to accept any changes and exit the window. Click
Restore to retain previous values. Click Default to restore Default values.

Opening any EnerVista SR3 Setup file will automatically launch the application or provide
focus to the already opened application. If the file is a settings file (has a ‘SR3’ extension)
which had been removed from the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back to the
Settings List tree.
New files will be automatically added to the tree.
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to
relay settings:

In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later
download to communicating relays.

Directly modifying relay settings while connected to a communicating relay, then
saving the settings when complete.

Creating/editing settings files while connected to a communicating relay, then saving
them to the relay when complete.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

SOFTWARE SETUP

Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file
contains data pertaining to the following types of relay settings:

Device Definition

Relay Setup

System Setup

Protection

Control

Inputs/Outputs

Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
The EnerVista SR3 Setup displays relay setpoints with the same hierarchy as the front
panel display.

Downloading and
saving setpoints files

Setpoints must be saved to a file on the local PC before performing any firmware
upgrades. Saving setpoints is also highly recommended before making any setpoint
changes or creating new setpoint files.
The setpoint files in the EnerVista SR3 Setup window are accessed in the Files Window. Use
the following procedure to download and save setpoint files to a local PC.
1.

Ensure that the site and corresponding device(s) have been properly defined and
configured as shown in Connecting EnerVista SR3 Setup to the Relay, above.

2.

Select the desired device from the site list.

3.

Select the Online > Read Device Settings from Device menu item, or right-click on the
device and select Read Device Settings to obtain settings information from the
device.

4.

After a few seconds of data retrieval, the software will request the name and
destination path of the setpoint file. The corresponding file extension will be
automatically assigned. Press Receive to complete the process. A new entry will be
added to the tree, in the File pane, showing path and file name for the setpoint file.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

3–19

SOFTWARE SETUP

Adding setpoints files
to the environment

Creating a new
setpoint file

CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

The EnerVista SR3 Setup software provides the capability to review and manage a large
group of setpoint files. Use the following procedure to add an existing file to the list.
1.

In the files pane, right-click on Files and select the Add Existing Setting File item as
shown:

2.

The Open dialog box will appear, prompting the user to select a previously saved
setpoint file. As for any other MS Windows® application, browse for the file to be
added then click Open. The new file and complete path will be added to the file list.

The EnerVista SR3 Setup software allows the user to create new setpoint files independent
of a connected device. These can be uploaded to a relay at a later date. The following
procedure illustrates how to create new setpoint files.
1.

3–20

In the File pane, right click on File and select the New Settings File item. The following
box will appear, allowing for the configuration of the setpoint file for the correct
firmware version. It is important to define the correct firmware version to ensure that
setpoints not available in a particular version are not downloaded into the relay.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Once this step is completed. If this version is different from the Firmware Revision noted in step 2. Establish communications with the 345 relay. 3. select the saved setpoint file. To select a file name and path for the new file. All 345 setpoint files should have the extension ‘SR3’ (for example. or select any displayed file name to replace an existing file. 3. Select the Maintenance > M1 Relay Info menu item and record the Firmware Revision. Adding Setpoints Files to the Environment. select the Offline > Edit Settings File Properties menu item and note the File Version of the setpoint file.SR3’). It is often necessary to upgrade the revision for a previously saved setpoint file after the 345 firmware has been upgraded.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES Upgrading setpoint files to a new revision SOFTWARE SETUP 2. will be added to the EnerVista SR3 Setup software environment. In the File pane. 5. enter some useful information in the Description box to facilitate the identification of the device and the purpose of the file. Select the Firmware Version. Load the setpoint file to be upgraded into the EnerVista SR3 Setup environment as described in the section. This is illustrated in the following procedure: 1. click the button beside the File Name box. select a New File Version that matches the Firmware Revision from the pull-down menu. For future reference. Click OK to complete the process. 5. and Order Code options for the new setpoint file. the new file. 4. with a complete path. 4. From the main window menu bar. 2. ‘transformer1. 6. Select the file name and path to store the file. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–21 .

Enter any special comments about the setpoint file in the "Description" field. click OK to convert the setpoint file to the desired revision. When complete. From the main window.SOFTWARE SETUP Printing setpoints and actual values 3–22 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES 6.20) and the current setpoint file revision is 1. select the Offline > Export Settings File menu item. For example. Select Settings in the upper section and select either Include All Features (for a complete list) or Include Only Enabled Features (for a list of only those features which are currently used) in the filtering section and click OK. The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. 3.10. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . The EnerVista SR3 Setup software allows the user to print partial or complete lists of setpoints and actual values. 7. Select the desired firmware version from the "New File Version" field. Select a previously saved setpoints file in the File pane or establish communications with a 345 device. 2.000 (Firmware Revision 1. See Loading Setpoints from a File below. for instructions on loading this setpoint file into the 345. Use the following procedure to print a list of setpoints: 1.2x”. if the firmware revision is L0L01MA120. 8. change the setpoint file revision to “1. 9.

Actual values lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired device (in the device list) and selecting the Print Device Information option 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–23 .CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES Printing actual values from a connected device SOFTWARE SETUP 4. A complete list of actual values can also be printed from a connected device with the following procedure: 1. 5. The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. Setpoint lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired file (in the file list) or device (in the device list) and selecting the Print Device Information or Print Settings File options. The process for Offline > Print Preview Settings File is identical to the steps above. select the Online > Print Device Information menu item 3. 2. Select Actual Values in the upper section and select either Include All Features (for a complete list) or Include Only Enabled Features (for a list of only those features which are currently used) in the filtering section and click OK. Establish communications with the desired 345 device. From the main window.

EnerVista SR3 Setup software prevents incompatible firmware from being loaded into a 345 relay.GEmultilin. The following procedure illustrates how to load setpoints from a file. An indication of the percentage completed will be shown in the bottom of the main window. If the firmware has been upgraded since saving the setpoint file. Refer to Downloading and Saving Setpoints Files for details on saving relay setpoints to a file.SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES Loading setpoints from a file CAUTION: CAUTION An error message will occur when attempting to download a setpoint file with a revision number that does not match the relay firmware. Upgrading relay firmware To upgrade the 345 firmware. above. Select the Maintenance > Update Firmware menu item. Select the target relay from the list of devices shown and click Send.com.The latest firmware files are available from the GE Multilin website at http:// www. Before loading a setpoints file. for details on changing the setpoints file version. Connect the relay to the local PC and save the setpoints to a file as shown in Downloading and Saving Setpoints Files. Select the Offline > Edit Settings File Properties menu item and verify that the corresponding file is fully compatible with the hardware and firmware version of the target relay. 2. it will be necessary to load this file back into the 345. NOTE: NOTE NOTE: NOTE Loading new relay firmware 3–24 Before upgrading firmware. above. Select the previously saved setpoints file from the File pane of the EnerVista SR3 Setup software main window. If there is an incompatibility. Upon successful completion of this procedure. After the firmware has been upgraded. it must first be added to the EnerVista SR3 Setup environment as described in the section. the 345 will have new firmware installed with the factory default setpoints. an "Incompatible Device" error will occur: If there are no incompatibilities between the target device and the settings file. 1. 4. Right-click on the selected file and select the Write Settings File to Device item. for instructions on changing the revision number of a setpoint file. follow the procedures listed in this section. see Upgrading Setpoint Files to a New Revision. the data will be transferred to the relay. see Upgrading Setpoint Files to a New Revision. 3. Loading new firmware into the 345 flash memory is accomplished as follows: 1. Adding Setpoints Files to the Environment. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . 2. it is very important to save the current 345 settings to a file on your PC. If the versions are not identical.

The entire transfer process takes approximately 10 minutes. the communication settings may have to be manually reprogrammed. Cycling power to the relay is recommended after a firmware upgrade. To communicate with the relay. the relay will not be in service and will require setpoint programming. The EnerVista SR3 Setup software will request the new firmware file.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP 3.” indicating that it is in upload mode. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–25 . EnerVista SR3 Setup software now prepares the 345 to receive the new firmware file. 6. The firmware filename has the following format: L3 L01 M A 130 . The 345 front panel will momentarily display "SR BOOT PROGRAM Waiting for Message. While the file is being loaded into the 345. 5. 000 Modification Number (000 = none) Firmware Rev # Board Assembly Rev # Code Type in Memory Device PCB Code Number Product Reference Code (L3 = 345) 4. Locate the folder that contains the firmware files to load into the 345. After successfully updating the 345 firmware. The EnerVista SR3 Setup software will notify the user when the 345 has finished loading the file. Carefully read any displayed messages and click OK to return the main screen. a status box appears showing how much of the new firmware file has been transferred and the upgrade status.

settings. • To view the captured waveforms. so that the maximum trigger number will always be one less than the total number of triggers available. Advanced EnerVista SR3 Setup features Transient recorder (Waveform capture) 3–26 The EnerVista SR3 Setup software can be used to capture waveforms (or view trace memory) from the relay at the instance of a pickup. with the extension "CFG. A new window will appear. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . requesting the file name and path. default values. and corresponding data items (i. click on the Launch Viewer button. • To view a previously saved COMTRADE file. data type.SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES When communications is established. See Loading Setpoints from a File for details. select the Actual Values > A3 Records > Transient Records menu item to open the Transient Recorder Viewer window. click the Open button and select the corresponding COMTRADE file. the saved setpoints must be reloaded back into the relay. • Click on Trigger Waveform to trigger a waveform capture. min/max values. and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware.e. • With EnerVista SR3 Setup software running and communications established. • Click on the Save to File button to save the selected waveform to the local PC. A detailed Waveform Capture window will appear as shown below. One file is saved as a COMTRADE file. trip. Waveform file numbering starts with the number zero in the 345. Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules. or other condition. required by the COMTRADE file for proper display of waveforms. The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified. alarm." The other file is a "DAT" file. features.

To match the captured waveform with the event that triggered it. press the Preference button to open the COMTRADE Setup page. • From the window main menu bar.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP TRIGGER TIME & DATE Displays the time and date of the Trigger. FILE NAME Indicates the file name and complete path (if saved). 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–27 . CURSOR LINE POSITION Indicates the cursor line position in time with respect to the beginning of the buffer. in order to change the graph attributes. TRIGGER LINE Indicates the point in time for the trigger. then find the event that matches the same time in the event recorder. Cursor lines are identified by their colors. then click and drag the cursor to the new position. DELTA Indicates time difference between the two cursor lines. Display graph values at the corresponding cursor line. The event record will provide additional information on the cause and system conditions at the time of the event. • The red vertical line indicates the trigger point. locate the mouse pointer over the cursor line. CURSOR LINES To move lines. VECTOR DISPLAY SELECT Click here to open a new graph to display vectors. make note of the time and date shown in the graph. • The date and time of the trigger are displayed at the top left corner of the window.

press the Vector Display button to display the following window: 3–28 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Click OK to store these graph attributes.SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES Preference Button The following window will appear: Change the color of each graph as desired. To view a vector graph of the quantities contained in the waveform capture. and select other options as required. The Waveform Capture window will reappear based on the selected graph attributes. and to close the window. by checking the appropriate boxes.

The Protection Summary screen is as follows: 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–29 . Control Elements and Maintenance screens. Protection Summary Screen allows the User to: • view the output relay assignments for the elements • modify the output relay assignments for the elements • view the enable/disable status of Control Elements • navigate to the respected Protection Element screen on a button click.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES Protection summary SOFTWARE SETUP Protection Summary is a single screen which holds the summarized information of different settings from Grouped Elements.

refer to Password Security in Chapter 6. If the password security feature is to be used. the user must first change the Master Reset Password from the initial Null setting. In cases where operational security is required as well as a central administrative authority then the use of the password system is highly encouraged. not from the front panel keypad. 3–30 345 devices shipped from the factory are initially set with security disabled. This is accomplished through a Master level access password which can be used for resetting lower level access passwords and higher level privileged operations. This section describes how to perform the initial setup. The new Master Reset Password must be 8 to 10 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . this can only be done over communications. For more details on the password security feature.SOFTWARE SETUP Password security CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES Password security is an optional feature of the 345 which can be setup using the SR3 EnerVista Setup software. The feature robustness of this system requires it to be managed exclusively through the EnerVista setup software. The password system has been designed to facilitate a hierarchy for centralized management. 1.

After entering a valid Master Reset Password. the user may disable password security altogether. The Master Access level allows programming of the Remote Setpoint and Remote Control passwords. 3. If the Master Reset Password has been lost. These passwords are initially set to a Null value.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP characters in length. then select Change Password. The letters are case sensitive. enter it again to log in to the Master Access level. and can only be set or changed from a remote user over RS485 or Ethernet communications. record the Encrypted Key and contact the factory to have it decrypted. With Master Level access. Remote Passwords must be 3 to 10 characters in length. 2. enter the new Master Reset Password again to confirm. or change the Master Reset Password. The Master Level permits setup of the Remote and Local Passwords. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–31 . Now that the Master Reset Password has been programmed. 4. and must have minimum 2 letters and 2 numbers.

If the correct password is entered. If Overwrite Local Passwords is set to NO. If Overwrite Local Passwords is set to YES. Local passwords can be changed remotely only (over RS485 or Ethernet). that level will not be attainable except when logged in as the Master Level. the keypad user can only change the Local Passwords if they have been changed from the initial NULL value to a valid one. The access level turns off after a period of 5 minutes of inactivity. Local Passwords must be 3 to 10 characters in length. The same logic applies to the Local passwords. Initial setup of the Local Setpoint and Local Control passwords requires the Master Access level. 6. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . If changing Local Passwords is permitted locally. if control power is cycled. the user will be prompted to enter the appropriate password depending on the interface being used (remote or local).SOFTWARE SETUP 3–32 CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES 5. When passwords have been set. If any Remote password has never been set. the user is now logged into that access level over that interface only. or if the user enters an incorrect password. 7. Local passwords can be changed locally only (over USB or keypad). and the nature of the change being made (setpoint or control).

and fault analysis information are accessed in Actual Values mode.Digital Energy Multilin 345 Transformer Protection System Chapter 4: Actual values Actual values Actual values All measured values. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–1 . Actual value messages are organized into logical groups for easy reference as shown below. the status of digital inputs and outputs.

STATUS A2 WINDING 2 CURRENTS W2 PH A CURRENT ▼ W2 PH B CURRENT A2 METERING W2 PH C CURRENT WINDING 1 CURRENTS W2 NTRL CURRENT WINDING 2 CURRENTS W2 [SNS] GND CURRENT XFMR DIFF CURRENTS W2 NEG SEQ CURRENT ▼ W2 GND DIFF CURRENT A3 EVENT RECORDS XFMR THERM CAP E30. A2 XFMR THERM CAP THERM CAP PH A ▼ THERM CAP PH B THERM CAP PH C A3 CLEAR EVENT REC EVENT RECORDS CLEAR 897760A1. DIFF 2 HARM PH B DIFF 5 HARM PH B A3 TRANSIENT RECORDS FORCE TRIGGER? ▼ PH C DIFF CURRENT TOTAL RECORDS PH C REST CURRENT AVAILABLE RECORDS DIFF 2 HARM PH C LAST CLEARED DIFF 5 HARM PH C .ACTUAL VALUES CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Figure 1: Actual Values main menu ACTUAL VALUES A1 STATUS A1 STATUS A2 METERING CLOCK A3 RECORDS CONTACT INPUTS ▼ A4 TARGET MESSAGES OUTPUT RELAYS ▼ A2 WINDING 1 CURRENTS W1 PH A CURRENT ▼ W1 PH B CURRENT LOGIC ELEMENTS VIRTUAL INPUTS REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS C.cdr A3 CLEAR TRANST REC TRANSIENT RECORDS CLEAR A3 CLEAR THERMAL CAP EVENT RECORDS CLEAR 4–2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . . INPUTS SUMMARY W1 PH C CURRENT W1 NTRL CURRENT W1 [SNS] GND CURRENT W1 NEG SEQ CURRENT W1 GND DIFF CURRENT OUT RELAYS SUMMARY LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY GOOSE STATUS GOOSE HDR. Date DIFF 2 HARM PH A Record CLEAR TRANST REC DIFF 5 HARM PH A Time CLEAR THERM CAP PH B DIFF CURRENT ▼ PH B REST CURRENT A4 TARGET MESSAGES ▲ PH IOC1 TRIP ▼ PH TOC TRIP . Date A3 RECORDS EVENT RECORDS TRANSIENT RECORDS CLEAR EVENT REC A2 XMFR DIFF CURRENTS PH A DIFF CURRENT ▼ PH A REST CURRENT Record Time ▼ E29.

. REMOTE OUTPUT 32 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–3 .. CI5 ...cdr A1 REMOTE OUTPUTS REMOTE OUTPUT 1 ▼ REMOTE OUTPUT 2 ........ ▼ CI9 . LE2 . CI8 .. VIRTUAL INPUT 32 A1 REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1 ▼ REMOTE INPUT 2 . RLY7 .....STATUS A1 LOGIC ELEMENTS LOGIC ELEMENT 1 ▼ A1 GOOSE STATUS LOGIC ELEMENT 2 61850 STATUS GOOSE 1 STATUS . REMOTE INPUT 32 52a CI1 .. 52a CI3 . LE1 .CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A1 STATUS A1 Status Figure 2: Status menu A1 STATUS CLOCK A1 CLOCK CONTACT INPUTS CURRENT DATE: ▼ OUTPUT RELAYS ▼ CURRENT TIME: LOGIC ELEMENTS VIRTUAL INPUTS A1 CONTACT INPUTS REMOTE INPUTS 52a W1 BRK (CI#1) REMOTE OUTPUTS ▼ C.......STATUS OUTPUT RELAY 7 ... CI6 .. INPUTS SUMMARY 52b W1 BRK (CI#2) OUT RELAYS SUMMARY 52a W2 BRK (CI#3) LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY 52b W2 BRK (CI#4) GOOSE STATUS CONTACT INPUT 5 GOOSE HDR STATUS .STATUS ▼ R2 TRIP: OUTPUT RELAY 3 ▼ .STATUS GOOSE 3 H.. GOOSE 8 STATUS A1 VIRTUAL INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ▼ VIRTUAL INPUT 2 ... CONTACT INPUT 10 A1 OUTPUT RELAYS R1 TRIP: A1 GOOSE HDR STATUS GOOSE 1 H. RLY3 . RLY6 . 897763A1.. LE4 ..... GOOSE 8 H. LE5 ... LOGIC ELEMENT 16 ▼ GOOSE 2 STATUS GOOSE 3 STATUS . R2 TRIP ..... RLY5 .. R1 TRIP .... Le16[8] .... GOOSE 2 H.. CI7 ... 52b CI2 . 52b CI4 ...... RLY4 ..... ...... LE6 . LE3 .. CI10 ..

when wired to a 52a breaker auxiliary contact. Contact inputs PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > CONTACT INPUTS 52a W1 BRK (CI#1) (Contact Input 1) OFF Range: Off. 52b W2 BRK (CI#4) (Contact Input 4) OFF Range: Off. On The status of this contact shows the W2 breaker close/open state. On The status of this contact shows the W1 breaker close/open state. On The status of this contact shows the W1 breaker close/open state. The message “ON” indicates that the contact input is energized. 52b W1 BRK (CI#2) (Contact Input 2) OFF Range: Off. and message “OFF” indicates a de-energized contact. when wired to a 52b breaker auxiliary contact.A1 STATUS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Clock PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > CLOCK CURRENT DATE Feb 12 2009 Range: Date in format shown Indicates today’s date. On The status of this contact shows the W2 breaker close/open state. CURRENT TIME 09:17:12 Range: Time in format shown Indicates the current time of day. 52a W2 BRK (CI#3) (Contact Input 3) OFF Range: Off. 4–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . when wired to a 52a breaker auxiliary contact. On Message displays the state of the contact input. CONTACT INPUT 5 to 10 OFF Range: Off. when wired to a 52b breaker auxiliary contact.

On The state “ON” or “OFF” for each logic element depends on its programmed logic: triggering inputs. PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > VIRTUAL INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUTS 1 to 32 OFF Range: Off. OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 (Auxiliary Output Relays) OFF Range: Off. On The "ON" state indicates that the relay is in-service. On Remote inputs The state of all active remote inputs is displayed here. plus any pickup. blocking inputs. Logic elements PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > LOGIC ELEMENTS LOGIC ELEMENT 1 to 16 OFF Range: Off. and/or reset time delay. On OUTPUT RELAY 7 (Critical Failure Relay) Range: Off. On The “ON” state of Output Relay #1 (W1 TRIP) shows that a TRIP command has been sent to the W1 breaker.CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A1 STATUS Output relays PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > OUTPUT RELAYS RELAY 1 TRIP (Output Relay #1) OFF Range: Off. PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUTS 1 to 32 OFF Range: Off. RELAY 2 TRIP (Output Relay #2) OFF Range: Off. On The “ON” state of Output Relay #2 (W2 TRIP) shows that a TRIP command has been sent to the W2 breaker. On 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–5 . Virtual inputs The state of all active virtual inputs is displayed here.

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > REMOTE OUTPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS 1 to 32 OFF Range: Off. Output relays summary PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > OUT RELAYS SUMMARY OUTPUT RELAYS SUMMARY R1 TRIP OFF RLY#5 OFF R2 TRIP OFF RLY#6 OFF RLY#3 OFF RLY#7 ON RLY#4 OFF This display shows a summary of the states of all output relays.A1 STATUS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Remote outputs The state of all active remote outputs is displayed here. under SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > S1 INSTALLATION > RELAY STATUS. NOTE: NOTE Output relay #7 is the Critical Failure relay. INPUTS SUMMARY C. On Contact inputs summary PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > C. INPUTS SUMMARY 52a OFF CI#5 OFF 52b OFF CI#6 OFF 52a OFF CI#7 OFF 52b OFF CI#8 OFF CI#9 OFF CI#10 OFF The display shows a summary of the states of all contact inputs. used to indicate the correct functioning of the 345 relay. 4–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . This output relay shows the status "ON" when the 345 relay is powered up and set to "Ready" and no self-test alarms are active.

Status Range: OFF. ON Default: OFF GOOSE HDR status PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > GOOSE HDR STATUS GOOSE 1 TO 8 H. ON Default: OFF 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–7 .CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A1 STATUS Logic elements summary PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY LE#1 OFF LE#9 OFF LE#2 OFF LE#10 OFF LE#3 OFF LE#11 OFF LE#4 OFF LE#12 OFF LE#5 OFF LE#13 OFF LE#6 OFF LE#14 OFF LE#7 OFF LE#15 OFF LE#8 OFF LE#16 OFF This display shows a summary of the states of all logic elements. GOOSE status PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > GOOSE STATUS GOOSE 1 TO 8 Status Range: OFF.

0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A. 0 to 359o lag W1 NEG SEQ CURRENT 0. 0 to 359o lag W1 GND CURRENT 0. and all auxiliary analog inputs.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 600 A.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A. 0 to 359o lag W1 PH B CURRENT 0. All phasors and symmetrical components are referenced to the phase A current phasor. 0 to 359o lag W1 PH C CURRENT 0. symmetrical components. differential and restraint currents are derived. Other values like neutral current. 0 to 359o lag W1 SENS GND CURRENT 0. All quantities are recalculated every power system cycle and perform protection and monitoring functions.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A. all metered values as follows: WINDING 1 CURRENT W1 PH A CURRENT 0. 0 to 359o lag W1 GND DIFF CURRENT 0.A2 METERING CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A2 Metering The relay measures fundamental frequency phase and ground currents. 0 to 359o lag W1 NTRL CURRENT 0. Displayed metered quantities are updated approximately three (3) times a second for readability.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A. By scrolling the Up/Down keys the relay shows one-by-one.00 x CT 0o lag 4–8 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A.

0 to 359o lag W2 GND CURRENT 0. 0 to 359o lag W2 GND DIFF CURRENT 0.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A.00 x CT 0o lag 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–9 . 0 to 359o lag W2 NTRL CURRENT 0. 0 to 359o lag W2 SENS GND CURRENT 0. 0 to 359o lag W2 PH B CURRENT 0.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A.CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A2 METERING WINDING 2 CURRENT W2 PH A CURRENT 0.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 600 A.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A. 0 to 359o lag W2 NEG SEQ CURRENT 0. 0 to 359o lag W2 PH C CURRENT 0.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A.

0 % f0 PH C DIFF CURRENT 0.00 x CT 0o lag PH A RESTR CURRENT 0.00 x CT 0o lag DIFF 2 HARM PH A 0.0 % f0 4–10 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .0 % f0 DIFF 5 HARM PH A 0.0 % f0 PH B DIFF CURRENT 0.00 x CT 0o lag DIFF 2 HARM PH C 0.00 x CT 0o lag PH B RESTR CURRENT 0.0 % f0 DIFF 5 HARM PH B 0.00 x CT 0o lag DIFF 2 HARM PH B 0.00 x CT 0o lag PH C RESTR CURRENT 0.A2 METERING CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINT CURRENTS PH A DIFF CURRENT 0.0 % f0 DIFF 5 HARM PH C 0.

0% Range: 1 to 150% THERM CAP PH C 0.CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A2 METERING TRANSFORMER THERMAL CAPACITY CURRENTS THERM CAP PH A 0.0% Range: 1 to 150% THERM CAP PH B 0.0% Range: 1 to 150% 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–11 .

00 x CT 0° Lag ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Ic x CT(W2)0. and the recorded information at the time of this record.03 x CT ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Ia x CT(W2)0.08 x CT ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Igr x CT(W1)0. capturing and storing the last 256 events.00 x CT 0° Lag ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 In x CT(W1)0.00 x CT 0° Lag ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Ib x CT(W2)0.A3 RECORDS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A3 Records The 345 has an event recorder which runs continuously. and is assigned an event number equal to the number of events that have occured since the recorder was cleared.08 x CT ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OPW1 I_2 x CT(W1)0.08 x CT 0° Lag ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Igd x CT(W1)0. PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > EVENT RECORDS Table 1: Example of Event Record A3 EVENT REC T:5655 E5655 Jan 05. Event records The Event Recorder runs continuously. All event records are stored in memory such that information is maintained for up to 3 days even after losing relay control power. even in the case where control power is lost.376 E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Ia x CT(W1)0.08 x CT 0° Lag ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Ib x CT(W1)0.00 x CT 0° Lag ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Ig x CTg(W1)0. The event number is incremented for each new event. Each event has a header message containing a summary of the event that occurred.00 x CT 0° Lag ▼ 4–12 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Shown below is an example of an event record caused by a Breaker Open operation. The events are displayed from newest to oldest event. All events are stored in non-volatile memory where the information is maintained.00 x CT 0° Lag ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Ic x CT(W1)0. 10 ▶ Ph IOC1 Trip OP 17:32:28.

00 x CT ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Igr x CT(W2)0.08 ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph BDiff. x CT(W1)0.00 ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph C Diff.00 ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP 2nd Harm Ph A Diff6.0% ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Therm Cap Ph C0. ground differential current. ground current or sensitive ground current. x CT(W1)0. date and time. x CT(W1)0.1% fo ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Therm Cap Ph B0.00 ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph A Rest.00 ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph B Rest.0% Each event is saved with event number. x CT(W1)0.CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A3 RECORDS E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Ig x CTg(W2)0.00 x CT 0° Lag ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Igd x CT(W2)0. neutral current. x CT(W1)0.00 x CT 0° Lag ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OPW2 In x CT(W2)0. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–13 .2% fo ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP 2nd Harm Ph B Diff0. per-phase differential and restraint currents.0% fo ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP 2nd Harm Ph C Diff0. negative sequence current.00 x CT ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph A Diff.00 x CT ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 I_2 x CT(W1)0.00 ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph C Rest.0% fo ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Therm Cap Ph A1. x CT(W1)0. and contains information such as per-phase current.

>80C 21 BKR2 Status Unkwn 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . All per Winding 1 and 2.A3 RECORDS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Second and fifth harmonic per-phase differential current. ELEMENT These are events that occur when a logic element changes its state Self-Test Warning Events SELF-TEST WARNING These are events that occur when a selftest warning is detected. Alert 1 15 Comm. INPUT These are events that occur when a virtual input changes its state Remote Input Events R. Alert 3 17 Ethernet Link Fail 18 High ENET Traffic 19 Ambient Temp. shows the list of Event Causes. 4–14 Code Type FC134 unsigned 16 bits Definition Cause of Event 0 No Evnt/Trp ToDate 1 Ctrl. from the 345 Communications Guide. The Event Recorder can be cleared from ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR EVENT REC setpoint. INPUT These are events that occur when a remote input changes its state Logic Element Events L. Pwr Lost 2 Ctrl. Alert 2 16 Comm. Pwr Applied 3 Date or Time Set 4 Reset 6 Factory Reload 7 Clock Not Set 8 IRIG-B Failure 9 Reset Trip Counter 10 BKR Status Unknown 11 Clear Event Rec 12 Clear Transt Rec 13 Clear Therm Cap 14 Comm. The following table. The following table provides a list of the event types: Table 2: Event type Event Type Display Description General Events None Events that occur when specific operation takes place Pickup Events PICKUP: These are events that occur when a protection element picks up Trip Events TRIP: These are events that occur when a breaker trip is initiated Alarm and Latched Alarm Events ALARM: These are events that occur when an alarm is initiated Control Events CONTROL: These are events that occur when a control element is activated Dropout Events DROPOUT: These are events that occur when a protection element drops out after a corresponding pickup event Contact Input Events C. INPUT: These are events that occur when a contact input changes its state Virtual Input Events V.

Trigger 24 Rx Goose 1 ON 25 Rx Goose 1 OFF 26 Rx Goose 2 ON 27 Rx Goose 2 OFF 28 Rx Goose 3 ON 29 Rx Goose 3 OFF 30 Rx Goose 4 ON 31 Rx Goose 4 OFF 32 Rx Goose 5 ON 33 Rx Goose 5 OFF 34 Rx Goose 6 ON 35 Rx Goose 6 OFF 36 Rx Goose 7 ON 37 Rx Goose 7 OFF 38 Rx Goose 8 ON 39 Rx Goose 8 OFF 0x0040 Contact IN 1 On 0x0041 Contact IN 2 On 0x0042 Contact IN 3 On 0x0043 Contact IN 4 On 0x0044 Contact IN 5 On 0x0045 Contact IN 6 On 0x0046 Contact IN 7 On 0x0047 Contact IN 8 On 0x0048 Contact IN 9 On 0x0049 Contact IN 10 On 0x0060 Contact IN 1 Off 0x0061 Contact IN 2 Off 0x0062 Contact IN 3 Off 0x0063 Contact IN 4 Off 0x0064 Contact IN 5 Off 0x0065 Contact IN 6 Off 0x0066 Contact IN 7 Off 0x0067 Contact IN 8 Off 0x0068 Contact IN 9 Off 0x0069 Contact IN 10 Off 0x0080 Virtual IN 1 On 0x0081 Virtual IN 2 On 0x0082 Virtual IN 3 On 0x0083 Virtual IN 4 On 0x0084 Virtual IN 5 On 0x0085 Virtual IN 6 On 0x0086 Virtual IN 7 On 0x0087 Virtual IN 8 On 0x0088 Virtual IN 9 On 0x0089 Virtual IN 10 On 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–15 .CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A3 RECORDS Code Type Definition 23 Trace Mem.

A3 RECORDS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Code 4–16 Type Definition 0x008A Virtual IN 11 On 0x008B Virtual IN 12 On 0x008C Virtual IN 13 On 0x008D Virtual IN 14 On 0x008E Virtual IN 15 On 0x008F Virtual IN 16 On 0x0090 Virtual IN 17 On 0x0091 Virtual IN 18 On 0x0092 Virtual IN 19 On 0x0093 Virtual IN 20 On 0x0094 Virtual IN 21 On 0x0095 Virtual IN 22 On 0x0096 Virtual IN 23 On 0x0097 Virtual IN 24 On 0x0098 Virtual IN 25 On 0x0099 Virtual IN 26 On 0x009A Virtual IN 27 On 0x009B Virtual IN 28 On 0x009C Virtual IN 29 On 0x009D Virtual IN 30 On 0x009E Virtual IN 31 On 0x009F Virtual IN 32 On 0x00A0 Virtual IN 1 Off 0x00A1 Virtual IN 2 Off 0x00A2 Virtual IN 3 Off 0x00A3 Virtual IN 4 Off 0x00A4 Virtual IN 5 Off 0x00A5 Virtual IN 6 Off 0x00A6 Virtual IN 7 Off 0x00A7 Virtual IN 8 Off 0x00A8 Virtual IN 9 Off 0x00A9 Virtual IN 10 Off 0x00AA Virtual IN 11 Off 0x00AB Virtual IN 12 Off 0x00AC Virtual IN 13 Off 0x00AD Virtual IN 14 Off 0x00AE Virtual IN 15 Off 0x00AF Virtual IN 16 Off 0x00B0 Virtual IN 17 Off 0x00B1 Virtual IN 18 Off 0x00B2 Virtual IN 19 Off 0x00B3 Virtual IN 20 Off 0x00B4 Virtual IN 21 Off 0x00B5 Virtual IN 22 Off 0x00B6 Virtual IN 23 Off 0x00B7 Virtual IN 24 Off 0x00B8 Virtual IN 25 Off 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

A3 RECORDS

Code

Type

Definition

0x00B9

Virtual IN 26 Off

0x00BA

Virtual IN 27 Off

0x00BB

Virtual IN 28 Off

0x00BC

Virtual IN 29 Off

0x00BD

Virtual IN 30 Off

0x00BE

Virtual IN 31 Off

0x00BF

Virtual IN 32 Off

0x01C0

Remote IN 1 On

0x01C1

Remote IN 2 On

0x01C2

Remote IN 3 On

0x01C3

Remote IN 4 On

0x01C4

Remote IN 5 On

0x01C5

Remote IN 6 On

0x01C6

Remote IN 7 On

0x01C7

Remote IN 8 On

0x01C8

Remote IN 9 On

0x01C9

Remote IN 10 On

0x01CA

Remote IN 11 On

0x01CB

Remote IN 12 On

0x01CC

Remote IN 13 On

0x01CD

Remote IN 14 On

0x01CE

Remote IN 15 On

0x01CF

Remote IN 16 On

0x01D0

Remote IN 17 On

0x01D1

Remote IN 18 On

0x01D2

Remote IN 19 On

0x01D3

Remote IN 20 On

0x01D4

Remote IN 21 On

0x01D5

Remote IN 22 On

0x01D6

Remote IN 23 On

0x01D7

Remote IN 24 On

0x01D8

Remote IN 25 On

0x01D9

Remote IN 26 On

0x01DA

Remote IN 27 On

0x01DB

Remote IN 28 On

0x01DC

Remote IN 29 On

0x01DD

Remote IN 30 On

0x01DE

Remote IN 31 On

0x01DF

Remote IN 32 On

0x01E0

Remote IN 1 Off

0x01E1

Remote IN 2 Off

0x01E2

Remote IN 3 Off

0x01E3

Remote IN 4 Off

0x01E4

Remote IN 5 Off

0x01E5

Remote IN 6 Off

0x01E6

Remote IN 7 Off

0x01E7

Remote IN 8 Off

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4–17

A3 RECORDS

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

Code

4–18

Type

Definition

0x01E8

Remote IN 9 Off

0x01E9

Remote IN 10 Off

0x01EA

Remote IN 11 Off

0x01EB

Remote IN 12 Off

0x01EC

Remote IN 13 Off

0x01ED

Remote IN 14 Off

0x01EE

Remote IN 15 Off

0x01EF

Remote IN 16 Off

0x01F0

Remote IN 17 Off

0x01F1

Remote IN 18 Off

0x01F2

Remote IN 19 Off

0x01F3

Remote IN 20 Off

0x01F4

Remote IN 21 Off

0x01F5

Remote IN 22 Off

0x01F6

Remote IN 23 Off

0x01F7

Remote IN 24 Off

0x01F8

Remote IN 25 Off

0x01F9

Remote IN 26 Off

0x01FA

Remote IN 27 Off

0x01FB

Remote IN 28 Off

0x01FC

Remote IN 29 Off

0x01FD

Remote IN 30 Off

0x01FE

Remote IN 31 Off

0x01FF

Remote IN 32 Off

0x8041

Therm O/L Trip PKP

0x8042

Therm O/L Trip OP

0x8044

Therm O/L Trip DPO

0x8049

Therm PhA Trip PKP

0x804A

Therm PhA Trip OP

0x804C

Therm PhA Trip DPO

0x8051

Therm PhB Trip PKP

0x8052

Therm PhB Trip OP

0x8054

Therm PhB Trip DPO

0x8061

Therm PhC Trip PKP

0x8062

Therm PhC Trip OP

0x8064

Therm PhC Trip DPO

0x84C1

LE 1 Trip PKP

0x84C2

LE 1 Trip OP

0x84C4

LE 1 Trip DPO

0x8501

LE 2 Trip PKP

0x8502

LE 2 Trip OP

0x8504

LE 2 Trip DPO

0x8541

LE 3 Trip PKP

0x8542

LE 3 Trip OP

0x8544

LE 3 Trip DPO

0x8581

LE 4 Trip PKP

0x8582

LE 4 Trip OP

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

A3 RECORDS

Code

Type

Definition

0x8584

LE 4 Trip DPO

0x85C1

LE 5 Trip PKP

0x85C2

LE 5 Trip OP

0x85C4

LE 5 Trip DPO

0x8601

LE 6 Trip PKP

0x8602

LE 6 Trip OP

0x8604

LE 6 Trip DPO

0x8641

LE 7 Trip PKP

0x8642

LE 7 Trip OP

0x8644

LE 7 Trip DPO

0x8681

LE 8 Trip PKP

0x8682

LE 8 Trip OP

0x8684

LE 8 Trip DPO

0x89C2

Self Test OP

0x9001

Ph IOC1 Trip PKP

0x9002

Ph IOC1 Trip OP

0x9004

Ph IOC1 Trip DPO

0x9009

Ph A IOC1 Trip PKP

0x900A

Ph A IOC1 Trip OP

0x900C

Ph A IOC1 Trip DPO

0x9011

Ph B IOC1 Trip PKP

0x9012

Ph B IOC1 Trip OP

0x9014

Ph B IOC1 Trip DPO

0x9021

Ph C IOC1 Trip PKP

0x9022

Ph C IOC1 Trip OP

0x9024

Ph C IOC1 Trip DPO

0x9041

Ntrl IOC1 Trip PKP

0x9042

Ntrl IOC1 Trip OP

0x9044

Ntrl IOC1 Trip DPO

0x9081

Gnd IOC1 Trip PKP

0x9082

Gnd IOC1 Trip OP

0x9084

Gnd IOC1 Trip DPO

0x90C1

Ph TOC1 Trip PKP

0x90C2

Ph TOC1 Trip OP

0x90C4

Ph TOC1 Trip DPO

0x90C9

Ph A TOC1 Trip PKP

0x90CA

Ph A TOC1 Trip OP

0x90CC

Ph A TOC1 Trip DPO

0x90D1

Ph B TOC1 Trip PKP

0x90D2

Ph B TOC1 Trip OP

0x90D4

Ph B TOC1 Trip DPO

0x90E1

Ph C TOC1 Trip PKP

0x90E2

Ph C TOC1 Trip OP

0x90E4

Ph C TOC1 Trip DPO

0x9101

Ntrl TOC1 Trip PKP

0x9102

Ntrl TOC1 Trip OP

0x9104

Ntrl TOC1 Trip DPO

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4–19

A3 RECORDS

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

Code

4–20

Type

Definition

0x9141

Gnd TOC1 Trip PKP

0x9142

Gnd TOC1 Trip OP

0x9144

Gnd TOC1 Trip DPO

0x9181

Ph IOC2 Trip PKP

0x9182

Ph IOC2 Trip OP

0x9184

Ph IOC2 Trip DPO

0x9189

Ph A IOC2 Trip PKP

0x918A

Ph A IOC2 Trip OP

0x918C

Ph A IOC2 Trip DPO

0x9191

Ph B IOC2 Trip PKP

0x9192

Ph B IOC2 Trip OP

0x9194

Ph B IOC2 Trip DPO

0x91A1

Ph C IOC2 Trip PKP

0x91A2

Ph C IOC2 Trip OP

0x91A4

Ph C IOC2 Trip DPO

0x91C1

Ntrl IOC2 Trip PKP

0x91C2

Ntrl IOC2 Trip OP

0x91C4

Ntrl IOC2 Trip DPO

0x9201

Gnd IOC2 Trip PKP

0x9202

Gnd IOC2 Trip OP

0x9204

Gnd IOC2 Trip DPO

0x9241

Ph TOC2 Trip PKP

0x9242

Ph TOC2 Trip OP

0x9244

Ph TOC2 Trip DPO

0x9249

Ph A TOC2 Trip PKP

0x924A

Ph A TOC2 Trip OP

0x924C

Ph A TOC2 Trip DPO

0x9251

Ph B TOC2 Trip PKP

0x9252

Ph B TOC2 Trip OP

0x9254

Ph B TOC2 Trip DPO

0x9261

Ph C TOC2 Trip PKP

0x9262

Ph C TOC2 Trip OP

0x9264

Ph C TOC2 Trip DPO

0x9281

Ntrl TOC2 Trip PKP

0x9282

Ntrl TOC2 Trip OP

0x9284

Ntrl TOC2 Trip DPO

0x92C1

Gnd TOC2 Trip PKP

0x92C2

Gnd TOC2 Trip OP

0x92C4

Gnd TOC2 Trip DPO

0x9301

SGnd TOC1 Trip PKP

0x9302

SGnd TOC1 Trip OP

0x9304

SGnd TOC1 Trip DPO

0x9641

SGnd IOC1 Trip PKP

0x9642

SGnd IOC1 Trip OP

0x9644

SGnd IOC1 Trip DPO

0x9681

SGnd IOC2 Trip PKP

0x9682

SGnd IOC2 Trip OP

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

A3 RECORDS

Code

Type

Definition

0x9684

SGnd IOC2 Trip DPO

0x9701

Pcnt Diff Trip PKP

0x9702

Pcnt Diff Trip OP

0x9704

Pcnt Diff Trip DPO

0x9709

Ph Diff A Trip PKP

0x970A

Ph Diff A Trip OP

0x970C

Ph Diff A Trip DPO

0x9711

Ph Diff B Trip PKP

0x9712

Ph Diff B Trip OP

0x9714

Ph Diff B Trip DPO

0x9721

Ph Diff C Trip PKP

0x9722

Ph Diff C Trip OP

0x9724

Ph Diff C Trip DPO

0x9741

RGF1 Trip PKP

0x9742

RGF1 Trip OP

0x9744

RGF1 Trip DPO

0x9781

RGF2 Trip PKP

0x9782

RGF2 Trip OP

0x9784

RGF2 Trip DPO

0x97C1

Inst Diff Trip PKP

0x97C2

Inst Diff Trip OP

0x97C4

Inst Diff Trip DPO

0x9801

NSeq TOC1 Trip PKP

0x9802

NSeq TOC1 Trip OP

0x9804

NSeq TOC1 Trip DPO

0x9841

NSeq TOC2 Trip PKP

0x9842

NSeq TOC2 Trip OP

0x9844

NSeq TOC2 Trip DPO

0x99C1

SGnd TOC2 Trip PKP

0x99C2

SGnd TOC2 Trip OP

0x99C4

SGnd TOC2 Trip DPO

0x9C01

LE 9 Trip PKP

0x9C02

LE 9 Trip OP

0x9C04

LE 9 Trip DPO

0x9C41

LE 10 Trip PKP

0x9C42

LE 10 Trip OP

0x9C44

LE 10 Trip DPO

0x9C81

LE 11 Trip PKP

0x9C82

LE 11 Trip OP

0x9C84

LE 11 Trip DPO

0x9CC1

LE 12 Trip PKP

0x9CC2

LE 12 Trip OP

0x9CC4

LE 12 Trip DPO

0x9D01

LE 13 Trip PKP

0x9D02

LE 13 Trip OP

0x9D04

LE 13 Trip DPO

0x9D41

LE 14 Trip PKP

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4–21

A3 RECORDS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Code 4–22 Type Definition 0x9D42 LE 14 Trip OP 0x9D44 LE 14 Trip DPO 0x9D81 LE 15 Trip PKP 0x9D82 LE 15 Trip OP 0x9D84 LE 15 Trip DPO 0x9DC1 LE 16 Trip PKP 0x9DC2 LE 16 Trip OP 0x9DC4 LE 16 Trip DPO 0xA049 Therm PhA Alrm PKP 0xA04A Therm PhA Alrm OP 0xA04C Therm PhA Alrm DPO 0xA051 Therm PhB Alrm PKP 0xA052 Therm PhB Alrm OP 0xA054 Therm PhB Alrm DPO 0xA061 Therm PhC Alrm PKP 0xA062 Therm PhC Alrm OP 0xA064 Therm PhC Alrm DPO 0xA482 Relay Not Ready 0xA4C1 LE 1 Alarm PKP 0xA4C2 LE 1 Alarm OP 0xA4C4 LE 1 Alarm DPO 0xA501 LE 2 Alarm PKP 0xA502 LE 2 Alarm OP 0xA504 LE 2 Alarm DPO 0xA541 LE 3 Alarm PKP 0xA542 LE 3 Alarm OP 0xA544 LE 3 Alarm DPO 0xA581 LE 4 Alarm PKP 0xA582 LE 4 Alarm OP 0xA584 LE 4 Alarm DPO 0xA5C1 LE 5 Alarm PKP 0xA5C2 LE 5 Alarm OP 0xA5C4 LE 5 Alarm DPO 0xA601 LE 6 Alarm PKP 0xA602 LE 6 Alarm OP 0xA604 LE 6 Alarm DPO 0xA641 LE 7 Alarm PKP 0xA642 LE 7 Alarm OP 0xA644 LE 7 Alarm DPO 0xA681 LE 8 Alarm PKP 0xA682 LE 8 Alarm OP 0xA684 LE 8 Alarm DPO 0xABC1 HI Amb Temp PKP 0xABC2 HI Amb Temp OP 0xABC4 HI Amb Temp DPO 0xAC01 LO Amb Temp PKP 0xAC02 LO Amb Temp OP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A3 RECORDS Code Type Definition 0xAC04 LO Amb Temp DPO 0xAC42 Self Test Alarm OP 0xAD02 R1 CoilMonAlrm OP 0xAD42 R2 CoilMonAlrm OP 0xAD81 BKR1 Fail Alrm PKP 0xAD82 BKR1 Fail Alrm OP 0xAD84 BKR1 Fail Alrm DPO 0xADC2 BKR1 Stat Fail OP 0xAEC1 BKR2 Stat Fail PKP 0xAEC2 BKR2 Stat Fail OP 0xAF41 BKR2 Fail Alrm PKP 0xAF42 BKR2 Fail Alrm OP 0xAF44 BKR2 Fail Alrm DPO 0xB001 Ph IOC1 Alarm PKP 0xB002 Ph IOC1 Alarm OP 0xB004 Ph IOC1 Alarm DPO 0xB009 Ph A IOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB00A Ph A IOC1 Alrm OP 0xB00C Ph A IOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB011 Ph B IOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB012 Ph B IOC1 Alrm OP 0xB014 Ph B IOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB021 Ph C IOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB022 Ph C IOC1 Alrm OP 0xB024 Ph C IOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB041 Ntrl IOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB042 Ntrl IOC1 Alrm OP 0xB044 Ntrl IOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB081 Gnd IOC1 Alarm PKP 0xB082 Gnd IOC1 Alarm OP 0xB084 Gnd IOC1 Alarm DPO 0xB0C1 Ph TOC1 Alarm PKP 0xB0C2 Ph TOC1 Alarm OP 0xB0C4 Ph TOC1 Alarm DPO 0xB0C9 Ph A TOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB0CA Ph A TOC1 Alrm OP 0xB0CC Ph A TOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB0D1 Ph B TOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB0D2 Ph B TOC1 Alrm OP 0xB0D4 Ph B TOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB0E1 Ph C TOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB0E2 Ph C TOC1 Alrm OP 0xB0E4 Ph C TOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB101 Ntrl TOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB102 Ntrl TOC1 Alrm OP 0xB104 Ntrl TOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB141 Gnd TOC1 Alarm PKP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–23 .

A3 RECORDS

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

Code

4–24

Type

Definition

0xB142

Gnd TOC1 Alarm OP

0xB144

Gnd TOC1 Alarm DPO

0xB181

Ph IOC2 Alarm PKP

0xB182

Ph IOC2 Alarm OP

0xB184

Ph IOC2 Alarm DPO

0xB189

Ph A IOC2 Alrm PKP

0xB18A

Ph A IOC2 Alrm OP

0xB18C

Ph A IOC2 Alrm DPO

0xB191

Ph B IOC2 Alrm PKP

0xB192

Ph B IOC2 Alrm OP

0xB194

Ph B IOC2 Alrm DPO

0xB1A1

Ph C IOC2 Alrm PKP

0xB1A2

Ph C IOC2 Alrm OP

0xB1A4

Ph C IOC2 Alrm DPO

0xB1C1

Ntrl IOC2 Alrm PKP

0xB1C2

Ntrl IOC2 Alrm OP

0xB1C4

Ntrl IOC2 Alrm DPO

0xB201

Gnd IOC2 Alarm PKP

0xB202

Gnd IOC2 Alarm OP

0xB204

Gnd IOC2 Alarm DPO

0xB241

Ph TOC2 Alarm PKP

0xB242

Ph TOC2 Alarm OP

0xB244

Ph TOC2 Alarm DPO

0xB249

Ph A TOC2 Alrm PKP

0xB24A

Ph A TOC2 Alrm OP

0xB24C

Ph A TOC2 Alrm DPO

0xB251

Ph B TOC2 Alrm PKP

0xB252

Ph B TOC2 Alrm OP

0xB254

Ph B TOC2 Alrm DPO

0xB261

Ph C TOC2 Alrm PKP

0xB262

Ph C TOC2 Alrm OP

0xB264

Ph C TOC2 Alrm DPO

0xB281

Ntrl TOC2 Alrm PKP

0xB282

Ntrl TOC2 Alrm OP

0xB284

Ntrl TOC2 Alrm DPO

0xB2C1

Gnd TOC2 Alarm PKP

0xB2C2

Gnd TOC2 Alarm OP

0xB2C4

Gnd TOC2 Alarm DPO

0xB301

SGnd TOC1 Alrm PKP

0xB302

SGnd TOC1 Alrm OP

0xB304

SGnd TOC1 Alrm DPO

0xB641

SGnd IOC1 Alrm PKP

0xB642

SGnd IOC1 Alrm OP

0xB644

SGnd IOC1 Alrm DPO

0xB681

SGnd IOC2 Alrm PKP

0xB682

SGnd IOC2 Alrm OP

0xB684

SGnd IOC2 Alrm DPO

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

A3 RECORDS

Code

Type

Definition

0xB701

Pcnt Diff Alrm PKP

0xB702

Pcnt Diff Alrm OP

0xB704

Pcnt Diff Alrm DPO

0xB709

Ph Dif A Alarm PKP

0xB70A

Ph Dif A Alarm OP

0xB70C

Ph Dif A Alarm DPO

0xB711

Ph Dif B Alarm PKP

0xB712

Ph Dif B Alarm OP

0xB714

Ph Dif B Alarm DPO

0xB721

Ph Dif C Alarm PKP

0xB722

Ph Dif C Alarm OP

0xB724

Ph Dif C Alarm DPO

0xB741

RGF1 Alarm PKP

0xB742

RGF1 Alarm OP

0xB744

RGF1 Alarm DPO

0xB781

RGF2 Alarm PKP

0xB782

RGF2 Alarm OP

0xB784

RGF2 Alarm DPO

0xB7C1

Inst Diff Alrm PKP

0xB7C2

Inst Diff Alrm OP

0xB7C4

Inst Diff Alrm DPO

0xB801

NSeq TOC1 Alrm PKP

0xB802

NSeq TOC1 Alrm OP

0xB804

NSeq TOC1 Alrm DPO

0xB841

NSeq TOC2 Alrm PKP

0xB842

NSeq TOC2 Alrm OP

0xB844

NSeq TOC2 Alrm DPO

0xB9C1

SGnd TOC2 Alrm PKP

0xB9C2

SGnd TOC2 Alrm OP

0xB9C4

SGnd TOC2 Alrm DPO

0xBC01

LE 9 Alarm PKP

0xBC02

LE 9 Alarm OP

0xBC04

LE 9 Alarm DPO

0xBC41

LE 10 Alarm PKP

0xBC42

LE 10 Alarm OP

0xBC44

LE 10 Alarm DPO

0xBC81

LE 11 Alarm PKP

0xBC82

LE 11 Alarm OP

0xBC84

LE 11 Alarm DPO

0xBCC1

LE 12 Alarm PKP

0xBCC2

LE 12 Alarm OP

0xBCC4

LE 12 Alarm DPO

0xBD01

LE 13 Alarm PKP

0xBD02

LE 13 Alarm OP

0xBD04

LE 13 Alarm DPO

0xBD41

LE 14 Alarm PKP

0xBD42

LE 14 Alarm OP

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4–25

A3 RECORDS

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

Code

4–26

Type

Definition

0xBD44

LE 14 Alarm DPO

0xBD81

LE 15 Alarm PKP

0xBD82

LE 15 Alarm OP

0xBD84

LE 15 Alarm DPO

0xBDC1

LE 16 Alarm PKP

0xBDC2

LE 16 Alarm OP

0xBDC4

LE 16 Alarm DPO

0xC042

Output Relay 3 On

0xC082

Output Relay 4 On

0xC0C2

Output Relay 5 On

0xC102

Output Relay 6 On

0xC142

Self-Test Rly 7 On

0xC182

Output Relay 1 On

0xC184

Output Relay 1 Off

0xC1C2

Output Relay 2 On

0xC1C4

Output Relay 2 Off

0xC202

BKR Connected

0xC2C2

BKR2 Connected

0xC4C1

LE 1 PKP

0xC4C2

LE 1 OP

0xC4C4

LE 1 DPO

0xC501

LE 2 PKP

0xC502

LE 2 OP

0xC504

LE 2 DPO

0xC541

LE 3 PKP

0xC542

LE 3 OP

0xC544

LE 3 DPO

0xC581

LE 4 PKP

0xC582

LE 4 OP

0xC584

LE 4 DPO

0xC5C1

LE 5 PKP

0xC5C2

LE 5 OP

0xC5C4

LE 5 DPO

0xC601

LE 6 PKP

0xC602

LE 6 OP

0xC604

LE 6 DPO

0xC641

LE 7 PKP

0xC642

LE 7 OP

0xC644

LE 7 DPO

0xC681

LE 8 PKP

0xC682

LE 8 OP

0xC684

LE 8 DPO

0xC882

Setpoint Group2 On

0xCA02

52a Contact OP

0xCA42

52b Contact OP

0xCA44

52b Contact DPO

0xCA82

Reset OK

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

A3 RECORDS

Code

Type

Definition

0xCCC2

BKR Stat Open

0xCD02

BKR Stat Clsd

0xCD42

Setpoint Group1 On

0xCEC4

Rstrt Inhibit Off

0xD001

Ph IOC1 PKP

0xD002

Ph IOC1 OP

0xD004

Ph IOC1 DPO

0xD041

Ntrl IOC1 PKP

0xD042

Ntrl IOC1 OP

0xD044

Ntrl IOC1 DPO

0xD081

Gnd IOC1 PKP

0xD082

Gnd IOC1 OP

0xD084

Gnd IOC1 DPO

0xD0C1

Ph TOC1 PKP

0xD0C2

Ph TOC1 OP

0xD0C4

Ph TOC1 DPO

0xD101

Ntrl TOC1 PKP

0xD102

Ntrl TOC1 OP

0xD104

Ntrl TOC1 DPO

0xD141

Gnd TOC1 PKP

0xD142

Gnd TOC1 OP

0xD144

Gnd TOC1 DPO

0xD181

Ph IOC2 PKP

0xD182

Ph IOC2 OP

0xD184

Ph IOC2 DPO

0xD1C1

Ntrl IOC2 PKP

0xD1C2

Ntrl IOC2 OP

0xD1C4

Ntrl IOC2 DPO

0xD201

Gnd IOC2 PKP

0xD202

Gnd IOC2 OP

0xD204

Gnd IOC2 DPO

0xD241

Ph TOC2 PKP

0xD242

Ph TOC2 OP

0xD244

Ph TOC2 DPO

0xD281

Ntrl TOC2 PKP

0xD282

Ntrl TOC2 OP

0xD284

Ntrl TOC2 DPO

0xD2C1

Gnd TOC2 PKP

0xD2C2

Gnd TOC2 OP

0xD2C4

Gnd TOC2 DPO

0xD301

SGnd TOC1 PKP

0xD302

SGnd TOC1 OP

0xD304

SGnd TOC1 DPO

0xD641

SGnd IOC1 PKP

0xD642

SGnd IOC1 OP

0xD644

SGnd IOC1 DPO

0xD681

SGnd IOC2 PKP

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4–27

A3 RECORDS

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

Code

4–28

Type

Definition

0xD682

SGnd IOC2 OP

0xD684

SGnd IOC2 DPO

0xD701

Pcnt DIFF PKP

0xD702

Pcnt DIFF OP

0xD704

Pcnt DIFF DPO

0xD741

RGF1 PKP

0xD742

RGF1 OP

0xD744

RGF1 DPO

0xD781

RGF2 PKP

0xD782

RGF2 OP

0xD784

RGF2 DPO

0xD7C1

Inst Diff PKP

0xD7C2

Inst Diff OP

0xD7C4

Inst Diff DPO

0xD801

NSeq TOC1 PKP

0xD802

NSeq TOC1 OP

0xD804

NSeq TOC1 DPO

0xD841

NSeq TOC2 PKP

0xD842

NSeq TOC2 OP

0xD844

NSeq TOC2 DPO

0xD9C1

SGnd TOC2 PKP

0xD9C2

SGnd TOC2 OP

0xD9C4

SGnd TOC2 DPO

0xDA02

BKR2 52a Cont OP

0xDA04

BKR2 52a Cont DPO

0xDA42

BKR2 52b Cont OP

0xDA44

BKR2 52b Cont DPO

0xDA82

BKR2 Stat Open OP

0xDA84

BKR2 Stat Open DPO

0xDAC1

BKR2 Stat Clsd PKP

0xDAC2

BKR2 Stat Clsd OP

0xDAC4

BKR2 Stat Clsd DPO

0xDB01

Trip BKR 1 PKP

0xDB02

Trip BKR 1 OP

0xDB04

Trip BKR 1 DPO

0xDB41

Trip BKR 2 PKP

0xDB42

Trip BKR 2 OP

0xDB44

Trip BKR 2 DPO

0xDB8A

2ND HMNC DIFF PH A

0xDB92

2ND HMNC DIFF PH B

0xDBA2

2ND HMNC DIFF PH C

0xDBCA

5TH HMNC DIFF PH A

0xDBD2

5TH HMNC DIFF PH B

0xDBE2

5TH HMNC DIFF PH C

0xDC01

LE 9 PKP

0xDC02

LE 9 OP

0xDC04

LE 9 DPO

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A3 RECORDS Code Type Definition 0xDC41 LE 10 PKP 0xDC42 LE 10 OP 0xDC44 LE 10 DPO 0xDC81 LE 11 PKP 0xDC82 LE 11 OP 0xDC84 LE 11 DPO 0xDCC1 LE 12 PKP 0xDCC2 LE 12 OP 0xDCC4 LE 12 DPO 0xDD01 LE 13 PKP 0xDD02 LE 13 OP 0xDD04 LE 13 DPO 0xDD41 LE 14 PKP 0xDD42 LE 14 OP 0xDD44 LE 14 DPO 0xDD81 LE 15 PKP 0xDD82 LE 15 OP 0xDD84 LE 15 DPO 0xDDC1 LE 16 PKP 0xDDC2 LE 16 OP 0xDDC4 LE 16 DPO 0xE042 Therm O/L Blck OP 0xE044 Therm O/L Blck Off 0xE182 Output Relay 1 BLK 0xE184 Relay 1 BLK Off 0xE1C2 Output Relay 2 BLK 0xE1C4 Relay 2 BLK Off 0xE882 Group Change Blk 0xE884 Grp Change Blk DPO 0xF002 Ph IOC1 Block 0xF004 Ph IOC1 Block DPO 0xF042 Ntrl IOC1 Block 0xF044 Ntrl IOC1 Blk DPO 0xF082 Gnd IOC1 Block 0xF084 Gnd IOC1 Block DPO 0xF0C2 Ph TOC1 Block 0xF0C4 Ph TOC1 Block DPO 0xF102 Ntrl TOC1 Block 0xF104 Ntrl TOC1 BlockDPO 0xF142 Gnd TOC1 Block 0xF144 Gnd TOC1 Block DPO 0xF182 Ph IOC2 Block 0xF184 Ph IOC2 Block DPO 0xF1C2 Ntrl IOC2 Block 0xF1C4 Ntrl IOC2 Blk DPO 0xF202 Gnd IOC2 Block 0xF204 Gnd IOC2 Block DPO 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–29 .

A3 RECORDS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Code 4–30 Type Definition 0xF242 Ph TOC2 Block 0xF244 Ph TOC2 Block DPO 0xF282 Ntrl TOC2 Block 0xF284 Ntrl TOC2 Blk DPO 0xF2C2 Gnd TOC2 Block 0xF2C4 Gnd TOC2 Blk DPO 0xF302 SGnd TOC1 Block 0xF304 SGnd TOC1 BlockDPO 0xF642 SGnd IOC1 Block 0xF644 SGnd IOC1 Blk DPO 0xF682 SGnd IOC2 Block 0xF684 SGnd IOC2 Blk DPO 0xF702 Pcnt Diff Block 0xF704 Ph Diff Block DPO 0xF742 RGF1 Block 0xF744 RGF1 Block DPO 0xF782 RGF2 Block 0xF784 RGF2 Block DPO 0xF7C2 Inst Diff Block 0xF7C4 Inst Diff BlockDPO 0xF802 NSeq TOC1 Blk 0xF804 NSeq TOC1 Blk DPO 0xF842 NSeq TOC2 Blk 0xF844 NSeq TOC2 Blk DPO 0xF9C2 SGnd TOC2 Block 0xF9C4 SGnd TOC2 Blk DPO 0xFB02 Trip BKR1 Blk 0xFB04 Trip BKR1 Blk DPO 0xFB42 Trip BKR2 Blk 0xFB44 Trip BKR2 Blk DPO 0xFB82 2nd Hmnc Diff Blk 0xFB84 2nd Hmnc Diff BlkDPO 0xFBC2 5th Hmnc Diff Blk 0xFBC4 5th Hmnc Diff BlkDPO 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–31 . Clear thermal capacity record PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR THERM CAP CLEAR No Range: No. Yes When set to "Yes. Yes When set to "Yes." pressing the ENTER key will clear all transient records." pressing the ENTER key will clear all thermal capacity records. Yes TOTAL RECORDS 1 Range: N/A AVAILABLE RECORDS 1 Range: N/A LAST CLEARED Feb 08 2009 Range: N/A Clear event record PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR EVENT REC CLEAR No Range: No." pressing the ENTER key will clear all event records. Yes When set to "Yes.CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A3 RECORDS Transient records PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > TRANSIENT RECORDS FORCE TRIGGER? No Range: No. Clear transient record PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR TRANST REC CLEAR No Range: No.

The target messages shown in the table below are displayed as necessary. The following table from the 345 Communication Guide shows the list of Target Messages 4–32 Code Type FC134A unsigned 16 bits Definition Active Targets 0 No Active Targets 7 Clock Not Set 8 IRIG-B Failure 14 Comm. If the Reset command is not performed.A4 TARGET MESSAGES CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A4 Target messages Target messages are automatically displayed for any active condition on the relay such as pickups. The relay displays the most recent event first. until the Reset command is initiated. trips. Alert 2 16 Comm. the display will not show the target messages. but any of the other faceplate pushbuttons is pressed. alarms. and after 5 seconds starts rolling up the other target messages. unless the user navigates to ACTUAL VALUES > A4 TARGET MESSAGES. Alert 3 17 Ethernet Link Fail 18 High ENET Traffic 19 Ambient Temp. >80C 21 BKR2 Status Unkwn 0x8040 Therm O/L Trip 0x8480 Relay Not Config 0x84C0 LE 1 Trip 0x8500 LE 2 Trip 0x8540 LE 3 Trip 0x8580 LE 4 Trip 0x85C0 LE 5 Trip 0x8600 LE 6 Trip 0x8640 LE 7 Trip 0x8680 LE 8 Trip 0x89C0 Self Test Trip 0x8D00 Rly #1 Trip OP 0x8D40 Rly #2 Trip OP 0x8D80 BKR Failure 0x8F40 Breaker 2 Failure 0x9000 Ph IOC1 Trip 0x9040 Ntrl IOC1 Trip 0x9080 Gnd IOC1 Trip 0x90C0 Ph TOC1 Trip 0x9100 Ntrl TOC1 Trip 0x9140 Gnd TOC1 Trip 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . or asserted input. where they can be reviewed. The target messages can be reviewed by pressing Up and Down message pushbuttons from the relay keypad. Alert 1 15 Comm.

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A4 TARGET MESSAGES Code Type Definition 0x9180 Ph IOC2 Trip 0x91C0 Ntrl IOC2 Trip 0x9200 Gnd IOC2 Trip 0x9240 Ph TOC2 Trip 0x9280 Ntrl TOC2 Trip 0x92C0 Gnd TOC2 Trip 0x9300 SGnd TOC1 Trip 0x9640 SGnd IOC1 Trip 0x9680 SGnd IOC2 Trip 0x9700 Pcnt DIFF Trip 0x9740 RGF1 Trip 0x9780 RGF2 Trip 0x97C0 Inst DIFF Trip 0x9800 NSeq TOC1 Trip 0x9840 NSeq TOC2 Trip 0x99C0 SGnd TOC2 Trip 0x9C00 LE 9 Trip 0x9C40 LE 10 Trip 0x9C80 LE 11 Trip 0x9CC0 LE 12 Trip 0x9D00 LE 13 Trip 0x9D40 LE 14 Trip 0x9D80 LE 15 Trip 0x9DC0 LE 16 Trip 0xA040 Therm Lvl Alrm 0xA480 Not Configured 0xA4C0 LE 1 Alarm 0xA500 LE 2 Alarm 0xA540 LE 3 Alarm 0xA580 LE 4 Alarm 0xA5C0 LE 5 Alarm 0xA600 LE 6 Alarm 0xA640 LE 7 Alarm 0xA680 LE 8 Alarm 0xABC0 HI Ambient Temp 0xAC00 LO Ambient Temp 0xAC40 Self Test Alarm 0xAD00 Rly1 Coil Mn Alrm 0xAD40 Rly2 Coil Mn Alrm 0xAD80 BKR Fail Alrm 0xADC0 BKRStatus Fail 0xAEC0 BKR2 Status Fail 0xAF40 BKR2 Fail Alrm 0xB000 Ph IOC1 Alarm 0xB040 Ntrl IOC1 Alarm 0xB080 Gnd IOC1 Alarm 0xB0C0 Ph TOC1 Alarm 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–33 .

A4 TARGET MESSAGES CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Code 4–34 Type Definition 0xB100 Ntrl TOC1 Alrm 0xB140 Gnd TOC1 Alarm 0xB180 Ph IOC2 Alarm 0xB1C0 Ntrl IOC2 Alarm 0xB200 Gnd IOC2 Alarm 0xB240 Ph TOC2 Alarm 0xB280 Ntrl TOC2 Alrm 0xB2C0 Gnd TOC2 Alarm 0xB300 SGnd TOC1 Alarm 0xB640 SGnd IOC1 Alarm 0xB680 SGnd IOC2 Alarm 0xB700 Pcnt DIFF Alarm 0xB740 RGF1 Alarm 0xB780 RGF2 Alarm 0xB7C0 Inst DIFF Alarm 0xB800 NSeq TOC1 Alarm 0xB840 NSeq TOC2 Alarm 0xB9C0 SGnd TOC2 Alarm 0xBC00 LE 9 Alarm 0xBC40 LE 10 Alarm 0xBC80 LE 11 Alarm 0xBCC0 LE 12 Alarm 0xBD00 LE 13 Alarm 0xBD40 LE 14 Alarm 0xBD80 LE 15 Alarm 0xBDC0 LE 16 Alarm 0xC040 Output Relay 3 0xC080 Output Relay 4 0xC0C0 Output Relay 5 0xC100 Output Relay 6 0xC140 Output Relay 7 0xC180 Output Relay 1 0xC1C0 Output Relay 2 0xC200 BKR Connected 0xC2C0 BKR2 Connected 0xC4C0 LE 1 0xC500 LE 2 0xC540 LE 3 0xC580 LE 4 0xC5C0 LE 5 0xC600 LE 6 0xC640 LE 7 0xC680 LE 8 0xC880 Setpoint Group2 0xC980 Maint Required 0xCA00 52a Contact 0xCA40 52b Contact 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A4 TARGET MESSAGES Code Type Definition 0xCA80 Reset OK 0xCD00 BKR Stat Clsd 0xCD40 Setpoint Group1 0xD000 Ph IOC1 0xD040 Ntrl IOC1 0xD080 Gnd IOC1 0xD0C0 Ph TOC1 0xD100 Ntrl TOC1 0xD140 Gnd TOC1 0xD180 Ph IOC2 0xD1C0 Ntrl IOC2 0xD200 Gnd IOC2 0xD240 Ph TOC2 0xD280 Ntrl TOC2 0xD2C0 Gnd TOC2 0xD300 SGnd TOC1 0xD640 SGnd IOC1 0xD680 SGnd IOC2 0xD6C0 NegSeq IOC 0xD700 Pcnt DIFF 0xD740 RGF1 0xD780 RGF2 0xD7C0 Inst DIFF 0xD800 NSeq TOC1 0xD840 NSeq TOC2 0xD9C0 SGnd TOC2 0xDA00 BKR 2 52a Contact 0xDA40 BKR 2 52b Contact 0xDA80 BKR 2 Status Open 0xDAC0 BKR2 Status Closed 0xDB00 Trip Breaker 1 0xDB40 Trip Breaker 2 0xDB80 2nd Hmnc Diff 0xDBC0 5th Hmnc Diff 0xDC00 LE 9 0xDC40 LE 10 0xDC80 LE 11 0xDCC0 LE 12 0xDD00 LE 13 0xDD40 LE 14 0xDD80 LE 15 0xDDC0 LE 16 0xE040 Therm O/L Blck 0xE180 Output Relay 1 BLK 0xE1C0 Output Relay 2 BLK 0xE880 Group Change Blk 0xF000 Ph IOC1 Block 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–35 .

The messages will disappear from the display. the message “Breaker Open OK” will appear on the display and will stay for 5 seconds. such as when the condition clears before reaching operation. unless the reset command is initiated. or when the protection element operates. If the breaker status changes to "Close" within 5 seconds after the breaker has been detected open. unless the breaker status changes to “Close”. when either the protection element drops out before operation. or “LATCHED ALARM”. or the element changes its state. when the respective element operates. and will disappear upon Reset command. Virtual Input ON/OFF. • The Contact Input ON/OFF. or “CONTROL”. the message will disappear from the display. • The OP and BKR Status messages will appear on the relay display. will be logged in the Event recorder. and Remote Input ON/OFF messages will not appear as target messages upon change of state. with the element function set to “TRIP”. The state change. If the element function is selected to “ALARM”. • The Breaker Open and Breaker Close messages will appear on the display and stay for 5 seconds only.A4 TARGET MESSAGES CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Code 4–36 Type Definition 0xF040 Ntrl IOC1 Block 0xF080 Gnd IOC1 Block 0xF0C0 Ph TOC1 Block 0xF100 Ntrl TOC1 Block 0xF140 Gnd TOC1 Block 0xF180 Ph IOC2 Block 0xF1C0 Ntrl IOC2 Block 0xF200 Gnd IOC2 Block 0xF240 Ph TOC2 Block 0xF280 Ntrl TOC2 Block 0xF2C0 Gnd TOC2 Block 0xF300 SGnd TOC1 Block 0xF640 SGnd IOC1 Block 0xF680 SGnd IOC2 Block 0xF6C0 NegSeq IOC Block 0xF700 Pcnt DIFF Block 0xF740 RGF1 Block 0xF780 RGF2 Block 0xF7C0 Inst DIFF Block 0xF800 NSeq TOC1 Block 0xF840 NSeq TOC2 Block 0xF9C0 SGnd TOC2 Block 0xFB00 Trip BKR1 Block 0xFB40 Trip BKR2 Block 0xFB80 2nd Hmnc Diff Blk 0xFBC0 5th Hmnc Diff Blk • The PKP messages will appear on the relay display as long as their respective flags are active. For example. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . when the condition causing operation clears. The message will stay on the display after the condition clears. if the breaker is detected “Open”. the message “Breaker Open OK” will disappear. however. and the message “Breaker Close OK” will appear and stay for 5 seconds.

20 s When current greater than the IOC1 pickup level is applied. the 345 display shows the following target message: A4 TARGET MESSAGES Ph IOC1 Trip STATE: PKP After the 200 ms time delay expires. the display shows the following message only: A4 TARGET MESSAGES Ph IOC1 Alarm STATE: OP Once the condition clears. the 345 display shows the following target message: A4 TARGET MESSAGES Ph IOC1 Alarm STATE: PKP After the 200 ms time delay expires. the 345 display shows the following target message: A4 TARGET MESSAGES Ph IOC1 Alarm STATE: PKP After the 200 ms time delay expires.00 x CT • PH IOC1 DELAY = 0. the target message will disappear. the display shows the following message only: A4 TARGET MESSAGES Ph IOC1 Alarm STATE: OP Example 3: Phase IOC1 Settings: • PH IOC1 FUNCTION = Alarm • PH IOC1 PICKUP = 1.00 x CT • PH IOC1 DELAY = 0.20 s When current greater than the IOC1 pickup level is applied.20 s When current greater than the IOC1 pickup level is applied.00 x CT • PH IOC1 DELAY = 0. the display shows the following message only: A4 TARGET MESSAGES Ph IOC1 Trip STATE: OP Example 2: Phase IOC1 Settings: • PH IOC1 FUNCTION = Latched Alarm • PH IOC1 PICKUP = 1. NOTE: NOTE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–37 .CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A4 TARGET MESSAGES Examples of how the messages appear on the display: Example 1: Phase IOC1 Settings: • PH IOC1 FUNCTION = Trip • PH IOC1 PICKUP = 1.

A4 TARGET MESSAGES 4–38 CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

Digital Energy Multilin 345 Transformer Protection System Chapter 5: Quick setup . and can be used for quick and easy programming. Power transformer parameters.Front control panel The “Quick Setup” utility is part of the 345 relay main menu. NOTE: NOTE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–1 . Use the “Quick Setup” utility to program the following: • Relay Status • Nominal Frequency • W1 Phase CT Primary • W1 Ground CT Primary • W2 Phase CT Primary • W2 Ground CT Primary • Transformer Type • Transformer Rated Load • W1 Nominal Voltage • W1 Grounding • W2 Nominal Voltage • W2 Grounding • Transformer Percent Differential • Phase TOC1 Function • Ground TOC1 Function • Phase IOC1 Function • Ground IOC1 Function Ensure the relay is in "Relay Ready" state before using Quick Setup.Front control panel Quick setup . and settings for the commonly used transformer elements can be easily set.

CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP .FRONT CONTROL PANEL Figure 1: Quick Setup menu ACTUAL VALUES QUICK SETUP SETPOINTS MAINTENANCE QUICK SETUP RELAY STATUS ▼ XFMR PERCENT DIFF PCNT DIFF FUNCTION ▼ NOMINAL FREQUENCY MINIMUM PICKUP W1 PH CT PRIMARY SLOPE 1 W1 GND CT PRIMARY BREAKPOINT 1 W2 PH CT PRIMARY BREAKPOINT 2 W2 GND CT PRIMARY SLOPE 2 TRANSFORMER TYPE XFMR RATED LOAD W1 NOM VOLTAGE PHASE TOC1 PH TOC1 FUNCTION ▼ W1 GROUNDING PHASE CT INPUT W2 NOM VOLTAGE PH TOC1 PICKUP W2 GROUNDING PH TOC1 CURVE XFMR PERCENT DIFF PH TOC1 TDM PH TOC1 FUNCTION RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR GND TOC1 FUNCTION RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR PH IOC1 FUNCTION GROUND TOC1 GND IOC1 FUNCTION GND TOC1 FUNCTION ▼ GND CT INPUT GND TOC1 PICKUP GND TOC1 CURVE GND TOC1 TDM RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR PHASE IOC1 PH IOC1 FUNCTION ▼ PH CT INPUT PH IOC1 PICKUP RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR GROUND IOC1 GND IOC1 FUNCTION ▼ GND CT INPUT GND IOC1 PICKUP 897759A1.cdr RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR 5–2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

0 kV in steps of 0.1 to 65. 50 Hz Default: 60 Hz W1 PH CT PRIMARY Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1 Default: 5 A W1 GND/SGND CT PRIMARY Range: 1 A to 6000/600 A in steps of 1 Default: 5 A W2 PH CT PRIMARY Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1 Default: 5 A W2 GND/SGND CT PRIMARY Range: 1 A to 6000/600 A in steps of 1 Default: 5 A TRANSFORMER TYPE Range: Refer to above "Transformer Types" table Default: Y/d30 XFMR RATED LOAD Range: 0. should be programmed under SETPOINTS > SYSTEM SETUP > BREAKER.FRONT CONTROL PANEL QUICK SETUP MENU Quick Setup menu The setpoints below can be programmed under the "Quick Setup" menu. 52b. Within Zone Default: Not Within Zone W2 NOM VOLTAGE Range: 0. Note that monitoring of Breaker Status via 52a. Within Zone Default: Not Within Zone 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–3 .1 kV Default: 13.CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP .0 kV in steps of 0.01 MVA Default: 5..00 MVA in steps of 0. PATH: QUICK SETUP > RELAY STATUS Range: Not Ready.1 kV Default: 4. or both of these contacts.8 kV W1 GROUNDING Range: Not Within Zone. Ready Default: Not Ready NOMINAL FREQUENCY Range: 60 Hz.16 kV W2 GROUNDING Range: Not Within Zone.0 MVA W1 NOM VOLTAGE Range: 0.01 to 50.1 to 65.

Operate Default: Do not operate RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do Not Operate. Definite Time.QUICK SETUP MENU CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP .04 to 20. Alarm Default: Disabled MINIMUM PICKUP Range: 0.00 x CT in steps of 0.00 RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR Range: Do Not Operate.01 x CT Default: 1.01 Default: 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.00 in steps of 0. IEC Curve A/B/C and Short Inverse.00 x CT in steps of 0. Alarm Default: Disabled ↘ PCNT DIFF FUNCTION Range: Disabled. Trip. CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) PH TOC1 PICKUP Range: 0. IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/ Short Default: Ext. Latched Alarm.01 x CT Default: 1.05 to 20. Trip. Operate Default: Do not operate 5–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .00 x CT PH TOC1 CURVE Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse. Latched Alarm. Alarm Default: Disabled ↘ PHASE CT INPUT Range: CT(W1).50 to 4. Inverse PH TOC1 TDM Range: 0.50 to 10. Trip.50 x CT BREAKPOINT 2 Range: 0.FRONT CONTROL PANEL XFMR PERCENT DIFF Range: Disabled.10 x CT SLOPE 1 Range: 15 to 100% in steps of 1% Default: 25% BREAKPOINT 1 Range: 0.01 x CT Default: 1.01 x CT Default: 0.00 x CT in steps of 0.05 to 1.50 x CT SLOPE 2 Range: 50 to 100% in steps of 1% Default: 95% PH TOC1 FUNCTION Range: Disabled. Latched Alarm.

Definite Time. Operate Default: Do not operate RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do not operate. Latched Alarm. Latched Alarm.05 to 20. Inverse GND TOC1 TDM Range: 0. Operate Default: Do not operate 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–5 .00 x CT in steps of 0. Alarm Default: Disabled ↘ GND CT INPUT Range: CT(W1).01 x CT Default: 1. IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/ Short Default: Ext. Trip.FRONT CONTROL PANEL QUICK SETUP MENU GND TOC1 FUNCTION Range: Disabled.CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP .04 to 20.00 in steps of 0. CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) GND TOC1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 x CT RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR Range: Do not operate.00 x CT GND TOC1 CURVE Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse. Operate Default: Do not operate PH IOC1 FUNCTION Range: Disabled. IEC Curve A/B/C and Short Inverse.01 x CT Default: 1. Trip. Operate Default: Do not operate RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do not operate. CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) PH IOC1 PICKUP Range: 0. Alarm Default: Disabled ↘ PH CT INPUT Range: CT(W1).05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.00 RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR Range: Do not operate.01 Default: 1.

05 to 20.00 x CT RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR Range: Do not operate.00 x CT in steps of 0. Alarm Default: Disabled ↘ GND CT INPUT Range: CT(W1). Operate Default: Do not operate NOTE: NOTE The settings changed using the Quick Setup menu.QUICK SETUP MENU CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP . CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) GND IOC1 PICKUP Range: 0. Operate Default: Do not operate RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do not operate.FRONT CONTROL PANEL GND IOC FUNCTION Range: Disabled.01 x CT Default: 1. are available for review and modification by navigating through S2 SYSTEM SETUP and S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1 in the SETPOINTS main menu. Latched Alarm. Trip. menu are available for rew 5–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

Each setpoints menu has a section that describes in detail the setpoints found on that menu. These setpoints have been grouped into a variety of pages and subpages as shown below. all of which make the relay extremely flexible.cdr 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–1 . Figure 1: Setpoints main menu SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP S1 RELAY SETUP S2 SYSTEM SETUP CLOCK S3 PROTECTION PASSWORD SECURITY ▼ S3 PROTECTION COMMUNICATIONS S4 CONTROLS S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS SETPOINT GROUP 1 ▼ SETPOINT GROUP 2 EVENT RECORDER TRANSIENT RECDR FRONT PANEL INSTALLATION S4 CONTROLS CHANGE SETP GROUP VIRTUAL INPUTS LOGIC ELEMENTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP ▼ CURRENT SENSING W1 BREAKER FAIL POWER SYSTEM W2 BREAKER FAIL TRANSFORMER RESET ▼ WNDG 1 BREAKER WNDG 2 BREAKER S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT INPUTS OUTPUT RELAYS VIRTUAL INPUTS 897757A1.Digital Energy Multilin 345 Transformer Protection System Chapter 6: Setpoints Setpoints Setpoints Main Menu The 345 has a considerable number of programmable setpoints.

Rather than repeat operation descriptions for this class of setpoint throughout the manual. • PICKUP setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> PICKUP setpoint selects the threshold above which the measured parameter causes an output from the measuring element. the feature is operational. 6–2 • RELAYS (3–6) setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> RELAYS (3-6) setpoint selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates an output. If <ELEMENT_NAME > FUNCTION: “Trip”.SETPOINTS MAIN MENU CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Setpoint entry methods Before placing the relay into “IN SERVICE” mode. “Enabled”. When an output is generated. the critical failure relay will be de-energized. and these values are shown throughout the setpoint message illustrations. and a computer running the EnerVista SR3 Setup software supplied with the relay. If <ELEMENT_NAME > FUNCTION: “Disabled”. “Trip”. At a minimum. similar methods of operation and similar types of setpoints are incorporated in various features. any other selected aux. Some of these factory default values can be left unchanged whenever they satisfy the application. If <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION: “Control” the feature is operational. the feature operates any selected output relays. error free entry when a computer is used. the GE EnerVista CD with the EnerVista SR3 Setup software is supplied with the relay. A computer. The range for these setpoints is two or more of: “Disabled”. and protection settings must be entered using one of the following methods: • Front panel. If <ELEMENT_NAME > FUNCTION: “Enabled”. then the feature is operational. When an output is generated. “Latched Alarm”. and operates the Trip relay (output relay 1). If <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION: “Alarm” or “Latched Alarm”. and “Control” function setpoint values are also used to select those operations that will be stored in the Event Recorder. the feature is not operational. Common setpoints To make the application of this device as simple as possible. Files can be stored and downloaded for fast. relay outputs. • Rear serial RS485. and a SCADA system running user-written software. setpoints defining system characteristics. “Alarm”. the feature declares an “Alarm” condition which operates any selected aux. • Front USB port. Once the relay has been programmed for the intended application. To facilitate this process. In addition. inputs. makes entry much easier. or rear RS485. The “Trip”. To safeguard against the installation of a relay into which setpoints have not been entered. Ethernet 100 FX. then the feature is operational. The relay leaves the factory with setpoints programmed to default values. using the keypad and the display. Ethernet 10/100 BaseT (optional) port. and “Control”. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . The form and nature of these setpoints is described below. a general description is presented in this overview. however.output relays and displays the appropriate alarm message. The range is any combination of the Auxiliary relays (Auxiliary Relays 3 to 6). the Relay Not Ready self-test warning is displayed. and displays the appropriate trip message. Details that are specific to a particular feature are included in the discussion of the feature. “Alarm”. Any of these methods can be used to enter the same information. the S2 SYSTEM SETUP setpoints must be entered for the system to function correctly. output relays. • FUNCTION setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION setpoint determines the operational characteristic of each feature. When an output is generated. the feature declares a Trip condition. the S1 RELAY SETUP/ INSTALLATION/ RELAY STATUS setpoint should be changed from “Not Ready” (the default) to “Ready”.

The time from a contact input change of state or an AC parameter input level change to a contact closure of the 1 Trip relay. the element is allowed to operate for current flow in any direction. If set to “Reverse”. is the time selected as time delay in this setpoint plus approximately up to 2 power frequency periods. times in milliseconds or seconds. • LED Indicators: Shown as the following schematic symbol. written descriptions are provided in the setpoints chapter which includes each feature. XOR. The measurement/ comparison can only be performed if a logic ‘1’ is provided at the ‘RUN’ input. The relationship between setpoint and input parameter is indicated by the following symbols: “<” (less than) " >” (greater than). Comms: communications • CT: current transformer • GND: ground • Hz: Hertz • MAX: maximum 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–3 . In addition to these logic diagrams. There is no supervision from the directional element. and internal logic is used in the feature to obtain an output. as determined by the directional element. • Time Delays: Shown as a block with either pickup. as determined by the directional element. the element is allowed to operate for current flow in the forward direction only. The exact wording of the displayed setpoint message identifies the setpoint. Major functional setpoint selections are listed below the name and are incorporated in the logic. If set to “Forward”. □. Setting text abbreviations The following abbreviations are used in the setpoints pages. • Compensator Blocks: Shown as a block with an inset box labeled ‘RUN’ with the associated pickup/dropout setpoint shown directly above. Logic diagrams The logic diagrams provide a complete comprehensive understanding of the operation of each feature. is shown as a circle: ○. and “Reverse”. Element operation of the detector is controlled by the signal entering the ‘RUN’ inset. If the delay is adjustable.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS SETPOINTS MAIN MENU • DELAY setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> DELAY setpoint selects a fixed time interval to delay an input signal from appearing at the output. • DIRECTION setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> DIRECTION setpoint is available for overcurrent features which are subject to control from a directional element. the element is allowed to operate for current flow in the reverse direction only. associated delay setpoint is shown with block SETPOINT on the top of the delay block. input parameter. NAND. NOR). The exact wording of the front panel label identifies the indicator. If set to “Disabled”. • A: amperes • kA: kiloamperes • kV: kilovolts • MVA: mega-volt-amperes • AUX: auxiliary • COM. These sequential logic diagrams illustrate how each setpoint. drop-out. OR. or both. The inverter (logical NOT). etc. “Forward”. The range is “Disabled”. • Logic: Described with basic logic gates (AND. • Setpoints: Shown as a block with a heading labeled ‘SETPOINT’.

s: seconds • Ctrl: control • Hr & hr: hour • O/L: overload 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .SETPOINTS MAIN MENU 6–4 CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS • MIN: minimum • SEC.

cdr RELAY NAME RELAY STATUS 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–5 .CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP S1 Relay setup Figure 2: Relay setup menu S1 RELAY SETUP CLOCK PASSWORD SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS ▼ S1 CLOCK DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) ▼ TIME (HH:MM:SS) EVENT RECORDER DLS ENABLE TRANSIENT RECDR DLS START MONTH FRONT PANEL DLS START WEEK INSTALLATION DLS START WEEKDAY S1 EVENT RECORDER PICKUP EVENTS ▼ DROPOUT EVENTS DLS END MONTH TRIP EVENTS DLS END WEEK ALARM EVENTS DLS END WEEKDAY CONTROL EVENTS IRIG-B CONTACT INPUTS SNTP MODE LOGIC ELEMENTS SNTP PORT VIRTUAL INPUTS SNTP SERVER IP ADR REMOTE INPUTS UTC OFFSET S1 PASSWORD SECURITY LOC SETPOINTS PSWD LOC CONTROLS PSWD SETTING DATE/TIME S1 TRANSIENT RECDR BUFFER SETUP ▼ TRIGGER MODE TRIGGER POSITION TRIGGER ON PKP S1 COMMUNICATIONS RS485 TRIGGER ON DPO ETHERNET TRIGGER ON TRIP MODBUS PROTOCOL TRIGGER ON ALARM TRIGGER ON INPUT 1 ▼ IEC60870-5-103 TRIGGER ON INPUT 2 IEC60870-5-104 TRIGGER ON INPUT 3 DNP PROTOCOL 61850 PROTOCOL S1 FRONT PANEL FLASH MESSAGE TIME ▼ MESSAGE TIMEOUT SCREEN SAVER W1 BKR OPEN COLOR W1 BKR CLSD COLOR W2 BKR OPEN COLOR W2 BKR CLSD COLOR S1 INSTALLATION 897764.

Jul. In addition. IEC60870-5-103. Oct. the main CPU will receive UTC time from comms CPU and it needs to apply this in order to pass it to localtime. so if IRIG-B is not the synchronization source but SNTP is. the main CPU has to maintain the information regarding AV. The following path is available using the keypad. August. if SNTP is enabled. then any other source of synchronization should be rejected. please refer to Chapter 3 . Mar. December Default: Not Set This setting sets the month for the DLS start time. Aug. Any synchronization commands other than Modbus. February. or DNP commands . For instructions on how to use the keypad. DLS correction is applied only at 0200 hours on daylight saving months. Feb. Time stamping on multiple relays can be synchronized to ± 1. so any other source of synchronization should be rejected if IRIG-B is the synchronization source and an IRIG-B signal is available. There is no prioritization amongst synchronization commands. SNTP has the second highest priority. 6–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > CLOCK DATE: (MM/DD/YYYY) Range: Month: Jan. Time stamping is also optionally available using SNTP. November. Apr. IEC608705-103.m_DaylightSavingsActive.S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Clock The 345 relay has an internal real time clock that performs time stamping via IRIG-B for various features such as the event and transient recorders.0 ms with the use of IRIG-B input. Enabled Default: Disabled With DLS Enabled. Jun. June. Nov. This time stamping is available with the IRIG-B signal connected to the relay terminals and set to “Enabled”. or DNP will be accepted only if IRIG-B and SNTP are not the synchronization sources. can be directly followed by another from MODBUS. March. Dec Day: 1 to 31 Year: 2009 to 2099 Default: Jan 15 2009 This setting sets the date in the specified format. and as such are blocked from the MODBUS layer as required.Working with the Keypad. April. TIME: (HH:MM:SS) Range: 0 to 23: 0 to 59: 0 to59 Default: 03:15:50 This setting sets the time in the specified format. September. the relay detects the DC shift or the Amplitude Modulated signal automatically. January. May. Sep. PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > CLOCK > DLS ENABLE [ENABLED] DLS START MONTH: Range: Not Set.via Modbus.as follows: IRIG-B has the highest priority. A synchronization command issued from DNP for example. IEC60870-5-104. July. IEC60870-5-104. Time synchronization priority uses the IRIG-B and SNTP protocols . October. May. DLS ENABLE Range: Disabled. for example. Synchronization commands are all eventually translated into a MODBUS function. because it is necessary in the comms CPU to translate from localtime to UTC in 61850 protocol. When an IRIGB device is connected to the relay terminals. Without any other synchronization.

Since the user has the capability to enable both SNTP and IRIG-B via the HMI. so that time. SUN Default: Not Set This setting sets the weekday for the DLS start time. The relay has programmable passwords for both Local and Remote access. MON. 2. SAT. February. September. one event and alarm is generated. Set the IRIG-B to “Enabled” if the IRIG-B device is connected to the relay IRIG-B terminals. provided SNTP packets are received. and the Weekday defining the end of the Daylight Saving time. 4th. When the IRIG-B setting is enabled. 2nd. 1st. Any other attempted synchronization commands should be ignored in the main CPU. December Default: Not Set This setting sets the month for the end of the DLS time. March. which can be used to allow setpoint changes and command execution from both the front panel and the communications ports. Set the start time of the Daylight Saving (DLS) time. TUE. the Week of the month. PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > CLOCK IRIG-B: Range: Disabled. FRI. 2nd. The clock has a super-capacitor back-up. Last Default: Not Set This setting sets the week of the month for the end of the DLS time. SUN Default: Not Set This setting sets the weekday for the end of the DLS time. DLS START WEEKDAY: Range: Not Set. THU. SAT. June. 3rd. the system will synchronize to SNTP. date. WED. 3. October. May. August. DLS END MONTH: Range: Not Set. January. and events will be kept for up to 3 days in cases of loss of relay control power. April. by selecting the Month. DLS END WEEK: Range: Not Set. or when the signal cannot be decoded. Set the date and time per the specified date and time format. July. THU. 1. 3rd. 4th.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP DLS START WEEK: Range: Not Set. Password security Password security features are designed into the relay to provide protection against unauthorized setpoint changes and control. Enabled Default: Disabled This setting enables the IRIG-B signal for time stamp synchronization. November. These 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–7 . If there is no signal. Set the end of the Daylight Saving time. the Week of the month. 4. DLS END WEEKDAY: Range: Not Set. FRI. TUE. by selecting the Month. MON. the time received is directly stamped as local date and time. 1st. when an IRIG-B signal is unavailable. and the Weekday defining the beginning of the Daylight Saving time. WED. Last Default: Not Set This setting sets the week of the month for the DLS start time. The relay will display the message “IRIG-B failure” in the case of either no IRIG-B signal from the connected IRIG-B device.

The Master Reset Password is encrypted. but not both simultaneously from the same interface. The EnerVista SR3 Setup software incorporates a facility for programming the relay’s passwords as well as enabling/disabling setpoint access. when an attempt is made to modify a setpoint but access is restricted. depending on the interface being accessed CONTROL LEVEL • Reset command • Open and Close Breaker commands • Virtual Input commands • Clearing of event records. and includes all Setpoint and Control Level access rights. three levels of security access are provided: Setpoint Level. Control Level. depending on the interface being accessed MASTER LEVEL • 6–8 Setting and changing of all passwords including the Master Reset Password 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . and front panel keypad) is independent of one another. The Setpoint and Control Levels can be attained either locally using the Local passwords (USB port and keypad). The user can have either Setpoint or Control Level active. Ethernet. or remotely using the Remote passwords (RS485 and Ethernet ports). the password must be explicitly entered via the interface from which access is desired). and Master Level. The Master Reset Password must be 8 to 10 characters in length. the program will prompt the user to enter the password and send it to the relay before the setpoint can actually be written to the relay. The Local and the Remote passwords are initially set after entering in a Master Reset Password (MRP).. which allows the user to read setpoints and actual values only. The Master Level can define whether the local user is permitted to change Local Passwords without having to enter the Master Level. After password entry.S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS passwords consist of 3 to 10 alphanumeric characters. If a SCADA system is used for relay programming. For example.e. If the Master Reset Password is lost. and must contain at least 2 letters and 2 numbers. and other data • Uploading new firmware • Changing the Local or Remote Control Password. except the features requiring control access listed below • Changing the Local or Remote Setpoint Password. The Master Level cannot be attained from the keypad. and is not viewable from the keypad. USB. When the MRP is programmed to “NULL” all password security is disabled. meaning that enabling setpoint access on one interface does not enable access for any of the other interfaces (i. The remote user may choose to allow the local user to change the local passwords. Aside from being logged out of security. The Master Reset Password (MRP) is set to “NULL” when the relay is shipped from the factory. A power-loss or entering in the wrong password will log the user out of security. after which the password must be re-entered. The Master Level is used for setting and resetting of passwords.. the access level is maintained until a period of 5 minutes of inactivity has elapsed. it is up to the programmer to incorporate appropriate security for the application. the user should contact the factory to decrypt the Master Reset Password. Each interface (RS485. Further definition of the access levels is described as follows: SETPOINT LEVEL • Changing settings under QUICK SETUP menu • Changing settings under the SETPOINTS menu except the features requiring control access listed below • Changing any setting under MAINTENANCE such as trip and close coil monitoring and breaker maintenance settings. transient records.

Figure 3: Menu for handling password security using 345 keypad S1 PASSWORD SECURITY LOC SETPOINTS PSWD LOC CONTROLS PSWD S1 LOC SETPOINTS PSWD ENTER OLD PASSWORD ▼ ENTER NEW PASSWORD CONFIRM NEW PASSWORD S1 LOC CONTROLS PSWD ENTER OLD PASSWORD ▼ ENTER NEW PASSWORD 897772. the user will be prompted to re-enter the new password. the user is now logged in to the Setpoints Level from the keypad. An INVALID PASSWORD message will appear if the new password does not meet the password requirements.cdr CONFIRM NEW PASSWORD The following steps describe how to change the Local Setpoints Password from the keypad. and use the message left/right keys to move the cursor. User the value up/ down keys to select characters. An INVALID PASSWORD message will appear if a wrong password is entered. refer to Chapter 3. a PASSWORD CHANGED message will appear indicating the Local Setpoints Password has successfully been updated. If the passwords match. Similar steps are followed to change the Local Control Password. If the passwords do not match. the password has not been originally set. If a valid password was entered. the password will remain unchanged. ENTER OLD PASSWORD The user is prompted to enter the current Local Setpoints Password. Press the Enter key when done. If the correct password was entered. an ENTRY MISMATCH message will appear. and the user will be returned to the Enter New Password page. For more details on the Password Security feature. and will be prompted to enter a new password. A valid password is alphanumeric. The local user may change a local password from the keypad if all of the following are true: • Security is enabled • A valid local setpoint (or local control) password has initially been set • The remote user has the Overwrite Local Passwords setpoint set to NO • The local user knows the current local password. ENTER NEW PASSWORD The user is prompted to enter a new Local Setpoints Password. security is disabled. and is 3 to 10 characters in length. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–9 . or the local user does not have the rights to change the password. refer to Chapter 3. In addition.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP • Disabling password security • All Setpoint and Control Level access rights For details on Password Security setup and handling using the EnerVista Setup software. CONFIRM PASSWORD The user is prompted to re-enter the new Local Setpoints Password. Passwords This section allows the user to change the Local Setpoint and Local Control Passwords. the user will be automatically logged out of security from the keypad.

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Communications Figure 4: Communications main menu S1 COMMUNICATIONS RS485 S1 RS485 ETHERNET MODBUS PROTOCOL ▼ RS485 BAUD RATE ▼ RS485 COMM PARITY IEC 60870-5-103 REAR 485 PROTOCOL IEC 60870-5-104* DNP PROTOCOL 61850 PROTOCOL** * Available with comms Order Code 1 ** Available with comms Order Code 2 S1 ETHERNET IP ADDRESS ▼ SUBNET IP MASK GATEWAY IP ADDRESS CONNECTION TYPE S1 MODBUS PROTOCOL MODBUS SLAVE ADR S1 60870-5-103 GENERAL BINARY INPUTS MEASURANDS ▼ COMMANDS S1 60870-5-104 GENERAL CLIENT ADDRESS POINT LIST S1 DNP PROTOCOL DNP GENERAL DNP UNSOL RESPONSE DEFAULT VARIATION ▼ DNP CLIENT ADDRESS DNP POINTS LIST 897766.cdr S1 61850 GOOSE ENABLE GOOSE ENABLE GOOSE Tx 6–10 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

Select the Settings > Communications > Serial Ports menu item in the EnerVista SR3 Setup program. 19200. BAUD RATE Range: 9600. IP Address Range: Standard IP Address format Default: 000.000. The RS485 port has settings for baud rate and parity.000. This port may be connected to a computer running the EnerVista SR3 Setup software.255.000 This setting specifies the IP Address for the Ethernet port. It is important that these parameters agree with the settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports.255. or the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > RS485 path on the display.000 This setting specifies the Subnet IP Mask setting for the Ethernet port.0 Default: Modbus This setting specifies the protocol to be used for the rear RS485 port.000 This setting specifies the Gateway IP Address for the Ethernet port. Even Default: None This setting specifies the parity for the RS485 port. Odd. Subnet IP Mask Range: Standard IP Address format Default: 255. or PC using the RS485 port. REAR RS485 PROTOCOL Range: Modbus. IEC60870-5-103. This software can download and upload setting files. Ethernet Select the Setpoints > S1 Relay Setup > Communications > Ethernet menu item in the EnerVista SR3 Setup program.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS RS485 interface S1 RELAY SETUP The 345 is equipped with one serial RS485 communication port. Figure 5: Serial port configuration settings The following settings are available to configure the RS485 port. The following settings are available to configure the Ethernet port. 38400. 115200 Default: 115200 This setting specifies the baud rate (bits per second) for the RS485 port. to configure the Ethernet port. or the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > ETHERNET path on the display. PARITY Range: None. A maximum of 32 345-series devices can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS. Gateway IP Address Range: Standard IP Address format Default: 000.000. to configure the serial port. and upgrade the device firmware. DNP 3. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–11 . 57600. view measured parameters.000. PLC.

each device added to the link should use the next higher address starting at 1. Figure 6: Modbus protocol configuration settings The following Modbus settings are available: MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1 Default: 254 This setting specifies the Modbus slave address . Address 0 is the broadcast address to which all Modbus slave devices listen. A subset of the Modbus protocol format is supported that allows extensive monitoring. Generally. and control functions using read and write register commands. or the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > MODBUS PROTOCOL path to set up the modbus protocol as shown below. meaning that it never initiates communications. When changing Ethernet settings. The 345 always acts as a slave device. fiber Default: Copper This setting specifies the connection type (Copper or Fiber) used for Ethernet communication.S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Connection Type Range: Copper.Refer to the 345 Feeder Protection System Communications Guide for additional details on the Modbus protocol and the Modbus memory map. programming. Each device must have a unique address from 1 to 254. 6–12 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . it only listens and responds to requests issued by a master device. Please refer to the 345 Communications Guide for details on how to set up the Modbus communications protocol. The 345 operates as a Modbus slave device only Select the Settings > Communications > Modbus > Protocol menu item in EnerVista SR3 Setup software. power to the relay must be cycled in order for the new settings to become active. Modbus is available via the RS485 serial link (Modbus RTU). The server is capable of reporting any indication or measurement and operating any output present in the device. The Modbus server can simultaneously support two clients over serial RS485. but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. A user-configurable input and output map is also implemented. Addresses do not have to be sequential. NOTE: NOTE Modbus The Modicon Modbus protocol is supported by the 345.

SECOND ASDU THIRD ASDU ▼ FOURTH ASDU S1 103 FOURTH ASDU ID TYPE ▼ FUNCTION TYPE S1 103 COMMANDS INFORMATION NO CMD 0 FUNC TYPE ▼ SCAN TIMEOUT CMD 0 INFO NO: FIRST ANLG ENTRY CMD 0 ON OPER: FIRST ANLG FACTOR CMD 0 OFF OPER: FIRST ANLG OFFSET .... CMD 15 FUNC TYPE: NINTH ANLG ENTRY CMD 15 INFO NO: NINTH ANLG FACTOR CMD 15 ON OPER: NINTH ANLG OFFSET CMD 15 OFF OPER: 897770. shows the list of Binary Inputs. . . from the 345 Communications Guide.. .. .. Code Type FC134B unsigned 16 bits Definition DNP Binary Inputs 0 Off 0x0040 Contact IN 1 On 0x0041 Contact IN 2 On 0x0042 Contact IN 3 On 0x0043 Contact IN 4 On 0x0044 Contact IN 5 On 0x0045 Contact IN 6 On 0x0046 Contact IN 7 On 0x0047 Contact IN 8 On 0x0048 Contact IN 9 On 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–13 .. NINTH ANLG ENTRY NINTH ANLG FACTOR S1 103 MEASURANDS NINTH ANLG OFFSET FIRST ASDU . FIRST ANLG ENTRY POINT 63 FIRST ANLG FACTOR POINT 63FUNC TYPE FIRST ANLG OFFSET POINT 63 INFO NO: .CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication S1 RELAY SETUP PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > IEC61870-5-103 Figure 7: IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication menu S1 60870-5-103 GENERAL S1 103 GENERAL BINARY INPUTS SLAVE ADDRESS ▼ MEASURANDS ▼ SYNCH TIMEOUT COMMANDS S1 103 FIRST ASDU S1 103 B INPUTS ID TYPE ▼ POINT 0 ▼ FUNCTION TYPE POINT 0 FUNC TYPE INFORMATION NO POINT 0 INFO NO: SCAN TIMEOUT ..cdr The following table.

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 6–14 Type Definition 0x0049 Contact IN 10 On 0x0060 Contact IN 1 Off 0x0061 Contact IN 2 Off 0x0062 Contact IN 3 Off 0x0063 Contact IN 4 Off 0x0064 Contact IN 5 Off 0x0065 Contact IN 6 Off 0x0066 Contact IN 7 Off 0x0067 Contact IN 8 Off 0x0068 Contact IN 9 Off 0x0069 Contact IN 10 Off 0x0080 Virtual IN 1 On 0x0081 Virtual IN 2 On 0x0082 Virtual IN 3 On 0x0083 Virtual IN 4 On 0x0084 Virtual IN 5 On 0x0085 Virtual IN 6 On 0x0086 Virtual IN 7 On 0x0087 Virtual IN 8 On 0x0088 Virtual IN 9 On 0x0089 Virtual IN 10 On 0x008A Virtual IN 11 On 0x008B Virtual IN 12 On 0x008C Virtual IN 13 On 0x008D Virtual IN 14 On 0x008E Virtual IN 15 On 0x008F Virtual IN 16 On 0x0090 Virtual IN 17 On 0x0091 Virtual IN 18 On 0x0092 Virtual IN 19 On 0x0093 Virtual IN 20 On 0x0094 Virtual IN 21 On 0x0095 Virtual IN 22 On 0x0096 Virtual IN 23 On 0x0097 Virtual IN 24 On 0x0098 Virtual IN 25 On 0x0099 Virtual IN 26 On 0x009A Virtual IN 27 On 0x009B Virtual IN 28 On 0x009C Virtual IN 29 On 0x009D Virtual IN 30 On 0x009E Virtual IN 31 On 0x009F Virtual IN 32 On 0x00A0 Virtual IN 1 Off 0x00A1 Virtual IN 2 Off 0x00A2 Virtual IN 3 Off 0x00A3 Virtual IN 4 Off 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code Type Definition 0x00A4 Virtual IN 5 Off 0x00A5 Virtual IN 6 Off 0x00A6 Virtual IN 7 Off 0x00A7 Virtual IN 8 Off 0x00A8 Virtual IN 9 Off 0x00A9 Virtual IN 10 Off 0x00AA Virtual IN 11 Off 0x00AB Virtual IN 12 Off 0x00AC Virtual IN 13 Off 0x00AD Virtual IN 14 Off 0x00AE Virtual IN 15 Off 0x00AF Virtual IN 16 Off 0x00B0 Virtual IN 17 Off 0x00B1 Virtual IN 18 Off 0x00B2 Virtual IN 19 Off 0x00B3 Virtual IN 20 Off 0x00B4 Virtual IN 21 Off 0x00B5 Virtual IN 22 Off 0x00B6 Virtual IN 23 Off 0x00B7 Virtual IN 24 Off 0x00B8 Virtual IN 25 Off 0x00B9 Virtual IN 26 Off 0x00BA Virtual IN 27 Off 0x00BB Virtual IN 28 Off 0x00BC Virtual IN 29 Off 0x00BD Virtual IN 30 Off 0x00BE Virtual IN 31 Off 0x00BF Virtual IN 32 Off 0x01C0 Remote IN 1 On 0x01C1 Remote IN 2 On 0x01C2 Remote IN 3 On 0x01C3 Remote IN 4 On 0x01C4 Remote IN 5 On 0x01C5 Remote IN 6 On 0x01C6 Remote IN 7 On 0x01C7 Remote IN 8 On 0x01C8 Remote IN 9 On 0x01C9 Remote IN 10 On 0x01CA Remote IN 11 On 0x01CB Remote IN 12 On 0x01CC Remote IN 13 On 0x01CD Remote IN 14 On 0x01CE Remote IN 15 On 0x01CF Remote IN 16 On 0x01D0 Remote IN 17 On 0x01D1 Remote IN 18 On 0x01D2 Remote IN 19 On 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–15 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 6–16 Type Definition 0x01D3 Remote IN 20 On 0x01D4 Remote IN 21 On 0x01D5 Remote IN 22 On 0x01D6 Remote IN 23 On 0x01D7 Remote IN 24 On 0x01D8 Remote IN 25 On 0x01D9 Remote IN 26 On 0x01DA Remote IN 27 On 0x01DB Remote IN 28 On 0x01DC Remote IN 29 On 0x01DD Remote IN 30 On 0x01DE Remote IN 31 On 0x01DF Remote IN 32 On 0x01E0 Remote IN 1 Off 0x01E1 Remote IN 2 Off 0x01E2 Remote IN 3 Off 0x01E3 Remote IN 4 Off 0x01E4 Remote IN 5 Off 0x01E5 Remote IN 6 Off 0x01E6 Remote IN 7 Off 0x01E7 Remote IN 8 Off 0x01E8 Remote IN 9 Off 0x01E9 Remote IN 10 Off 0x01EA Remote IN 11 Off 0x01EB Remote IN 12 Off 0x01EC Remote IN 13 Off 0x01ED Remote IN 14 Off 0x01EE Remote IN 15 Off 0x01EF Remote IN 16 Off 0x01F0 Remote IN 17 Off 0x01F1 Remote IN 18 Off 0x01F2 Remote IN 19 Off 0x01F3 Remote IN 20 Off 0x01F4 Remote IN 21 Off 0x01F5 Remote IN 22 Off 0x01F6 Remote IN 23 Off 0x01F7 Remote IN 24 Off 0x01F8 Remote IN 25 Off 0x01F9 Remote IN 26 Off 0x01FA Remote IN 27 Off 0x01FB Remote IN 28 Off 0x01FC Remote IN 29 Off 0x01FD Remote IN 30 Off 0x01FE Remote IN 31 Off 0x01FF Remote IN 32 Off 0x8002 Any Trip 0x8042 Therm O/L Trip OP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code Type Definition 0x8044 Therm O/L Trip DPO 0x804A Therm PhA Trip OP 0x804C Therm PhA Trip DPO 0x8052 Therm PhB Trip OP 0x8054 Therm PhB Trip DPO 0x8062 Therm PhC Trip OP 0x8064 Therm PhC Trip DPO 0x84C1 LE 1 Trip PKP 0x84C2 LE 1 Trip OP 0x84C4 LE 1 Trip DPO 0x8501 LE 2 Trip PKP 0x8502 LE 2 Trip OP 0x8504 LE 2 Trip DPO 0x8541 LE 3 Trip PKP 0x8542 LE 3 Trip OP 0x8544 LE 3 Trip DPO 0x8581 LE 4 Trip PKP 0x8582 LE 4 Trip OP 0x8584 LE 4 Trip DPO 0x85C1 LE 5 Trip PKP 0x85C2 LE 5 Trip OP 0x85C4 LE 5 Trip DPO 0x8601 LE 6 Trip PKP 0x8602 LE 6 Trip OP 0x8604 LE 6 Trip DPO 0x8641 LE 7 Trip PKP 0x8642 LE 7 Trip OP 0x8644 LE 7 Trip DPO 0x8681 LE 8 Trip PKP 0x8682 LE 8 Trip OP 0x8684 LE 8 Trip DPO 0x9001 Ph IOC1 Trip PKP 0x9002 Ph IOC1 Trip OP 0x9004 Ph IOC1 Trip DPO 0x9009 Ph A IOC1 Trip PKP 0x900A Ph A IOC1 Trip OP 0x900C Ph A IOC1 Trip DPO 0x9011 Ph B IOC1 Trip PKP 0x9012 Ph B IOC1 Trip OP 0x9014 Ph B IOC1 Trip DPO 0x9021 Ph C IOC1 Trip PKP 0x9022 Ph C IOC1 Trip OP 0x9024 Ph C IOC1 Trip DPO 0x9041 Ntrl IOC1 Trip PKP 0x9042 Ntrl IOC1 Trip OP 0x9044 Ntrl IOC1 Trip DPO 0x9081 Gnd IOC1 Trip PKP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–17 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 6–18 Type Definition 0x9082 Gnd IOC1 Trip OP 0x9084 Gnd IOC1 Trip DPO 0x90C1 Ph TOC1 Trip PKP 0x90C2 Ph TOC1 Trip OP 0x90C4 Ph TOC1 Trip DPO 0x90C9 Ph A TOC1 Trip PKP 0x90CA Ph A TOC1 Trip OP 0x90CC Ph A TOC1 Trip DPO 0x90D1 Ph B TOC1 Trip PKP 0x90D2 Ph B TOC1 Trip OP 0x90D4 Ph B TOC1 Trip DPO 0x90E1 Ph C TOC1 Trip PKP 0x90E2 Ph C TOC1 Trip OP 0x90E4 Ph C TOC1 Trip DPO 0x9101 Ntrl TOC1 Trip PKP 0x9102 Ntrl TOC1 Trip OP 0x9104 Ntrl TOC1 Trip DPO 0x9141 Gnd TOC1 Trip PKP 0x9142 Gnd TOC1 Trip OP 0x9144 Gnd TOC1 Trip DPO 0x9181 Ph IOC2 Trip PKP 0x9182 Ph IOC2 Trip OP 0x9184 Ph IOC2 Trip DPO 0x9189 Ph A IOC2 Trip PKP 0x918A Ph A IOC2 Trip OP 0x918C Ph A IOC2 Trip DPO 0x9191 Ph B IOC2 Trip PKP 0x9192 Ph B IOC2 Trip OP 0x9194 Ph B IOC2 Trip DPO 0x91A1 Ph C IOC2 Trip PKP 0x91A2 Ph C IOC2 Trip OP 0x91A4 Ph C IOC2 Trip DPO 0x91C1 Ntrl IOC2 Trip PKP 0x91C2 Ntrl IOC2 Trip OP 0x91C4 Ntrl IOC2 Trip DPO 0x9201 Gnd IOC2 Trip PKP 0x9202 Gnd IOC2 Trip OP 0x9204 Gnd IOC2 Trip DPO 0x9241 Ph TOC2 Trip PKP 0x9242 Ph TOC2 Trip OP 0x9244 Ph TOC2 Trip DPO 0x9249 Ph A TOC2 Trip PKP 0x924A Ph A TOC2 Trip OP 0x924C Ph A TOC2 Trip DPO 0x9251 Ph B TOC2 Trip PKP 0x9252 Ph B TOC2 Trip OP 0x9254 Ph B TOC2 Trip DPO 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code Type Definition 0x9261 Ph C TOC2 Trip PKP 0x9262 Ph C TOC2 Trip OP 0x9264 Ph C TOC2 Trip DPO 0x9281 Ntrl TOC2 Trip PKP 0x9282 Ntrl TOC2 Trip OP 0x9284 Ntrl TOC2 Trip DPO 0x92C1 Gnd TOC2 Trip PKP 0x92C2 Gnd TOC2 Trip OP 0x92C4 Gnd TOC2 Trip DPO 0x9301 SGnd TOC1 Trip PKP 0x9302 SGnd TOC1 Trip OP 0x9304 SGnd TOC1 Trip DPO 0x9641 SGnd IOC1 Trip PKP 0x9642 SGnd IOC1 Trip OP 0x9644 SGnd IOC1 Trip DPO 0x9681 SGnd IOC2 Trip PKP 0x9682 SGnd IOC2 Trip OP 0x9684 SGnd IOC2 Trip DPO 0x9701 Pcnt Diff Trip PKP 0x9702 Pcnt Diff Trip OP 0x9704 Pcnt Diff Trip DPO 0x970A Ph Diff A Trip OP 0x970C Ph Diff A Trip DPO 0x9712 Ph Diff B Trip OP 0x9714 Ph Diff B Trip DPO 0x9722 Ph Diff C Trip OP 0x9724 Ph Diff C Trip DPO 0x9741 RGF1 Trip PKP 0x9742 RGF1 Trip OP 0x9744 RGF1 Trip DPO 0x9781 RGF2 Trip PKP 0x9782 RGF2 Trip OP 0x9784 RGF2 Trip DPO 0x97C1 Inst Diff Trip PKP 0x97C2 Inst Diff Trip OP 0x97C4 Inst Diff Trip DPO 0x9801 NSeq TOC1 Trip PKP 0x9802 NSeq TOC1 Trip OP 0x9804 NSeq TOC1 Trip DPO 0x9841 NSeq TOC2 Trip PKP 0x9842 NSeq TOC2 Trip OP 0x9844 NSeq TOC2 Trip DPO 0x99C1 SGnd TOC2 Trip PKP 0x99C2 SGnd TOC2 Trip OP 0x99C4 SGnd TOC2 Trip DPO 0x9C01 LE 9 Trip PKP 0x9C02 LE 9 Trip OP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–19 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 6–20 Type Definition 0x9C04 LE 9 Trip DPO 0x9C41 LE 10 Trip PKP 0x9C42 LE 10 Trip OP 0x9C44 LE 10 Trip DPO 0x9C81 LE 11 Trip PKP 0x9C82 LE 11 Trip OP 0x9C84 LE 11 Trip DPO 0x9CC1 LE 12 Trip PKP 0x9CC2 LE 12 Trip OP 0x9CC4 LE 12 Trip DPO 0x9D01 LE 13 Trip PKP 0x9D02 LE 13 Trip OP 0x9D04 LE 13 Trip DPO 0x9D41 LE 14 Trip PKP 0x9D42 LE 14 Trip OP 0x9D44 LE 14 Trip DPO 0x9D81 LE 15 Trip PKP 0x9D82 LE 15 Trip OP 0x9D84 LE 15 Trip DPO 0x9DC1 LE 16 Trip PKP 0x9DC2 LE 16 Trip OP 0x9DC4 LE 16 Trip DPO 0xA002 Any Alarm 0xA042 Therm Lvl Alrm OP 0xA044 Therm Lvl Alrm DPO 0xA04A Therm PhA Alrm OP 0xA04C Therm PhA Alrm DPO 0xA052 Therm PhB Alrm OP 0xA054 Therm PhB Alrm DPO 0xA062 Therm PhC Alrm OP 0xA064 Therm PhC Alrm DPO 0xA482 Relay Not Ready 0xA4C1 LE 1 Alarm PKP 0xA4C2 LE 1 Alarm OP 0xA4C4 LE 1 Alarm DPO 0xA501 LE 2 Alarm PKP 0xA502 LE 2 Alarm OP 0xA504 LE 2 Alarm DPO 0xA541 LE 3 Alarm PKP 0xA542 LE 3 Alarm OP 0xA544 LE 3 Alarm DPO 0xA581 LE 4 Alarm PKP 0xA582 LE 4 Alarm OP 0xA584 LE 4 Alarm DPO 0xA5C1 LE 5 Alarm PKP 0xA5C2 LE 5 Alarm OP 0xA5C4 LE 5 Alarm DPO 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code Type Definition 0xA601 LE 6 Alarm PKP 0xA602 LE 6 Alarm OP 0xA604 LE 6 Alarm DPO 0xA641 LE 7 Alarm PKP 0xA642 LE 7 Alarm OP 0xA644 LE 7 Alarm DPO 0xA681 LE 8 Alarm PKP 0xA682 LE 8 Alarm OP 0xA684 LE 8 Alarm DPO 0xABC1 HI Amb Temp PKP 0xABC2 HI Amb Temp OP 0xABC4 HI Amb Temp DPO 0xAC01 LO Amb Temp PKP 0xAC02 LO Amb Temp OP 0xAC04 LO Amb Temp DPO 0xAC42 Self Test Alarm OP 0xAD01 R1 CoilMonAlrm PKP 0xAD02 R1 CoilMonAlrm OP 0xAD04 R1 CoilMonAlrm DPO 0xAD41 R2 CoilMonAlrm PKP 0xAD42 R2 CoilMonAlrm OP 0xAD44 R2 CoilMonAlrm DPO 0xAD81 BKR1 Fail Alrm PKP 0xAD82 BKR1 Fail Alrm OP 0xAD84 BKR1 Fail Alrm DPO 0xADC2 BKR1 Stat Fail OP 0xAEC2 BKR2 Stat Fail OP 0xAF41 BKR2 Fail Alrm PKP 0xAF42 BKR2 Fail Alrm OP 0xAF44 BKR2 Fail Alrm DPO 0xB001 Ph IOC1 Alarm PKP 0xB002 Ph IOC1 Alarm OP 0xB004 Ph IOC1 Alarm DPO 0xB009 Ph A IOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB00A Ph A IOC1 Alrm OP 0xB00C Ph A IOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB011 Ph B IOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB012 Ph B IOC1 Alrm OP 0xB014 Ph B IOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB021 Ph C IOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB022 Ph C IOC1 Alrm OP 0xB024 Ph C IOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB041 Ntrl IOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB042 Ntrl IOC1 Alrm OP 0xB044 Ntrl IOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB081 Gnd IOC1 Alarm PKP 0xB082 Gnd IOC1 Alarm OP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–21 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 6–22 Type Definition 0xB084 Gnd IOC1 Alarm DPO 0xB0C1 Ph TOC1 Alarm PKP 0xB0C2 Ph TOC1 Alarm OP 0xB0C4 Ph TOC1 Alarm DPO 0xB0C9 Ph A TOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB0CA Ph A TOC1 Alrm OP 0xB0CC Ph A TOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB0D1 Ph B TOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB0D2 Ph B TOC1 Alrm OP 0xB0D4 Ph B TOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB0E1 Ph C TOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB0E2 Ph C TOC1 Alrm OP 0xB0E4 Ph C TOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB101 Ntrl TOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB102 Ntrl TOC1 Alrm OP 0xB104 Ntrl TOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB141 Gnd TOC1 Alarm PKP 0xB142 Gnd TOC1 Alarm OP 0xB144 Gnd TOC1 Alarm DPO 0xB181 Ph IOC2 Alarm PKP 0xB182 Ph IOC2 Alarm OP 0xB184 Ph IOC2 Alarm DPO 0xB189 Ph A IOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB18A Ph A IOC2 Alrm OP 0xB18C Ph A IOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB191 Ph B IOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB192 Ph B IOC2 Alrm OP 0xB194 Ph B IOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB1A1 Ph C IOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB1A2 Ph C IOC2 Alrm OP 0xB1A4 Ph C IOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB1C1 Ntrl IOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB1C2 Ntrl IOC2 Alrm OP 0xB1C4 Ntrl IOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB201 Gnd IOC2 Alarm PKP 0xB202 Gnd IOC2 Alarm OP 0xB204 Gnd IOC2 Alarm DPO 0xB241 Ph TOC2 Alarm PKP 0xB242 Ph TOC2 Alarm OP 0xB244 Ph TOC2 Alarm DPO 0xB249 Ph A TOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB24A Ph A TOC2 Alrm OP 0xB24C Ph A TOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB251 Ph B TOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB252 Ph B TOC2 Alrm OP 0xB254 Ph B TOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB261 Ph C TOC2 Alrm PKP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code Type Definition 0xB262 Ph C TOC2 Alrm OP 0xB264 Ph C TOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB281 Ntrl TOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB282 Ntrl TOC2 Alrm OP 0xB284 Ntrl TOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB2C1 Gnd TOC2 Alarm PKP 0xB2C2 Gnd TOC2 Alarm OP 0xB2C4 Gnd TOC2 Alarm DPO 0xB301 SGnd TOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB302 SGnd TOC1 Alrm OP 0xB304 SGnd TOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB641 SGnd IOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB642 SGnd IOC1 Alrm OP 0xB644 SGnd IOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB681 SGnd IOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB682 SGnd IOC2 Alrm OP 0xB684 SGnd IOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB701 Pcnt Diff Alrm PKP 0xB702 Pcnt Diff Alrm OP 0xB704 Pcnt Diff Alrm DPO 0xB709 Ph Dif A Alarm PKP 0xB70A Ph Dif A Alarm OP 0xB70C Ph Dif A Alarm DPO 0xB711 Ph Dif B Alarm PKP 0xB712 Ph Dif B Alarm OP 0xB714 Ph Dif B Alarm DPO 0xB721 Ph Dif C Alarm PKP 0xB722 Ph Dif C Alarm OP 0xB724 Ph Dif C Alarm DPO 0xB741 RGF1 Alarm PKP 0xB742 RGF1 Alarm OP 0xB744 RGF1 Alarm DPO 0xB781 RGF2 Alarm PKP 0xB782 RGF2 Alarm OP 0xB784 RGF2 Alarm DPO 0xB7C1 Inst Diff Alrm PKP 0xB7C2 Inst Diff Alrm OP 0xB7C4 Inst Diff Alrm DPO 0xB801 NSeq TOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB802 NSeq TOC1 Alrm OP 0xB804 NSeq TOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB841 NSeq TOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB842 NSeq TOC2 Alrm OP 0xB844 NSeq TOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB9C1 SGnd TOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB9C2 SGnd TOC2 Alrm OP 0xB9C4 SGnd TOC2 Alrm DPO 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–23 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 6–24 Type Definition 0xBC01 LE 9 Alarm PKP 0xBC02 LE 9 Alarm OP 0xBC04 LE 9 Alarm DPO 0xBC41 LE 10 Alarm PKP 0xBC42 LE 10 Alarm OP 0xBC44 LE 10 Alarm DPO 0xBC81 LE 11 Alarm PKP 0xBC82 LE 11 Alarm OP 0xBC84 LE 11 Alarm DPO 0xBCC1 LE 12 Alarm PKP 0xBCC2 LE 12 Alarm OP 0xBCC4 LE 12 Alarm DPO 0xBD01 LE 13 Alarm PKP 0xBD02 LE 13 Alarm OP 0xBD04 LE 13 Alarm DPO 0xBD41 LE 14 Alarm PKP 0xBD42 LE 14 Alarm OP 0xBD44 LE 14 Alarm DPO 0xBD81 LE 15 Alarm PKP 0xBD82 LE 15 Alarm OP 0xBD84 LE 15 Alarm DPO 0xBDC1 LE 16 Alarm PKP 0xBDC2 LE 16 Alarm OP 0xBDC4 LE 16 Alarm DPO 0xC042 Output Relay 3 On 0xC082 Output Relay 4 On 0xC0C2 Output Relay 5 On 0xC102 Output Relay 6 On 0xC142 Self-Test Rly 7 On 0xC182 Output Relay 1 On 0xC1C2 Output Relay 2 On 0xC202 BKR Connected 0xC2C2 BKR2 Connected 0xC4C1 LE 1 PKP 0xC4C2 LE 1 OP 0xC4C4 LE 1 DPO 0xC501 LE 2 PKP 0xC502 LE 2 OP 0xC504 LE 2 DPO 0xC541 LE 3 PKP 0xC542 LE 3 OP 0xC544 LE 3 DPO 0xC581 LE 4 PKP 0xC582 LE 4 OP 0xC584 LE 4 DPO 0xC5C1 LE 5 PKP 0xC5C2 LE 5 OP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code Type Definition 0xC5C4 LE 5 DPO 0xC601 LE 6 PKP 0xC602 LE 6 OP 0xC604 LE 6 DPO 0xC641 LE 7 PKP 0xC642 LE 7 OP 0xC644 LE 7 DPO 0xC681 LE 8 PKP 0xC682 LE 8 OP 0xC684 LE 8 DPO 0xC882 Setpoint Group2 On 0xCA02 52a Contact OP 0xCA42 52b Contact OP 0xCCC2 BKR Stat Open 0xCD02 BKR Stat Clsd 0xCD42 Setpoint Group1 On 0xDA02 BKR2 52a Cont OP 0xDA42 BKR2 52b Cont OP 0xDA82 BKR2 Stat Open 0xDAC2 BKR2 Stat Clsd 0xDB02 Trip BKR 1 OP 0xDB42 Trip BKR 2 OP 0xDC01 LE 9 PKP 0xDC02 LE 9 OP 0xDC04 LE 9 DPO 0xDC41 LE 10 PKP 0xDC42 LE 10 OP 0xDC44 LE 10 DPO 0xDC81 LE 11 PKP 0xDC82 LE 11 OP 0xDC84 LE 11 DPO 0xDCC1 LE 12 PKP 0xDCC2 LE 12 OP 0xDCC4 LE 12 DPO 0xDD01 LE 13 PKP 0xDD02 LE 13 OP 0xDD04 LE 13 DPO 0xDD41 LE 14 PKP 0xDD42 LE 14 OP 0xDD44 LE 14 DPO 0xDD81 LE 15 PKP 0xDD82 LE 15 OP 0xDD84 LE 15 DPO 0xDDC1 LE 16 PKP 0xDDC2 LE 16 OP 0xDDC4 LE 16 DPO 0xE002 Any Block 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–25 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 6–26 Type Definition 0xE042 Therm O/L Blck 0xE182 Output Relay 1 BLK 0xE1C2 Output Relay 2 BLK 0xE882 Group Change Blk 0xF002 Ph IOC1 Block 0xF042 Ntrl IOC1 Block 0xF082 Gnd IOC1 Block 0xF0C2 Ph TOC1 Block 0xF102 Ntrl TOC1 Block 0xF142 Gnd TOC1 Block 0xF182 Ph IOC2 Block 0xF1C2 Ntrl IOC2 Block 0xF202 Gnd IOC2 Block 0xF242 Ph TOC2 Block 0xF282 Ntrl TOC2 Block 0xF2C2 Gnd TOC2 Block 0xF302 SGnd TOC1 Block 0xF642 SGnd IOC1 Block 0xF682 SGnd IOC2 Block 0xF702 Pcnt Diff Block 0xF742 RGF1 Block 0xF782 RGF2 Block 0xF7C2 Inst Diff Block 0xF802 NSeq TOC1 Blk 0xF842 NSeq TOC2 Blk 0xF9C2 SGnd TOC2 Block 0xFB02 Trip BKR1 Blk 0xFB42 Trip BKR2 Blk 0xFB82 2nd Hmnc Diff Blk 0xFBC2 5th Hmnc Diff Blk 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

. POINT 31 SCALE FCTR CLIENT ADDRESS 5 S1 104 POINT LIST POINT 31 DEADBAND BINARY INPUTS ANALOG INPUTS BINARY OUTPUTS 104 BINARY OUTPUTS POINT 0 ON: ▼ POINT 0 OFF: 897794A1. POINT 15 ON: .. POINT 0 DEADBAND ..CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS IEC60870-5-104 protocol S1 RELAY SETUP Figure 8: IEC 60870-5-104 protocol menu S1 60870-5-104 GENERAL S1 104 GENERAL CLIENT ADDRESS FUNCTION POINT LIST ▼ TCP PORT SLAVE ADDRESS CYCLIC DATA PERIOD TCP CONN. 6–27 . POINT 15 OFF: . POINT 31 ENTRY ... . ... .cdr 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .. POINT 63 104 ANALOG INPUTS POINT 0 ENTRY ▼ CLIENT ADDRESS 2 POINT 0 SCALE FCTR . TIMEOUT OBJ INFO ADDR BIN OBJ INFO ADDR ALOG OBJ INFO ADDR CNTR OBJ INFO ADDR CMD S1 104 CLIENT ADDRESS CLIENT ADDRESS 1 ▼ 104 BINARY INPUTS POINT 0 ▼ POINT 1 . . .

PATH: SETPOINTS > RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > DNP PROTOCOL > DNP GENERAL Figure 9: DNP communication menu S1 DNP DNP GENERAL S1 DNP GENERAL DNP UNSOL RESPONSE* DEFAULT VARIATION DNP ADDRESS ▼ DNP CLIENT ADDRESS* DNP TCP/UDP PORT DNP POINTS LIST CHANNEL 1 PORT CHANNEL 2 PORT TME SYNC IIN PER.Working with the Keypad... please refer to the 345 Instruction Manual. DNP OBJECT 2 POINT 63 DNP OBJECT 20 DNP OBJECT 21 POINT 0 ON DNP OBJECT 22 POINT 0 OFF DNP OBJECT 23 ▼ DNP OBJECT 30 POINT 1 ON DNP OBJECT 32 POINT 1 OFF .cdr BINARY OUTPUTS ANALOG INPUTS The following table. shows the list of DNP Binary Inputs. T/O DNP UNSOL RESPONSE* FUNCTION ▼ TIMEOUT MAX RETRIES DEST ADDRESS POINT 0 POINT 1 ▼ DEFAULT VARIATION POINT 2 DNP OBJECT 1 . 6–28 Code Type FC134B unsigned 16 bits Definition DNP Binary Inputs 0 Off 0x0040 Contact IN 1 On 0x0041 Contact IN 2 On 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . For instructions on how to use the keypad. from the 345 Communications Guide. The following path is available using the keypad... * Ethernet only DNP MSG FRAG SIZE DNP TCP CONN.S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS DNP communication The menu structure for the DNP protocol is shown below. Chapter 3 . POINT 31 ENTRY S1 DNP POINTS LIST BINARY INPUTS 897769... DNP CLIENT ADDRESS* POINT 15 ON CLIENT ADDRESS 1 POINT 15 OFF CLIENT ADDRESS 2 CLIENT ADDRESS 3 POINT 0 ENTRY CLIENT ADDRESS 4 ▼ CLIENT ADDRESS 5 POINT 1 ENTRY .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code Type Definition 0x0042 Contact IN 3 On 0x0043 Contact IN 4 On 0x0044 Contact IN 5 On 0x0045 Contact IN 6 On 0x0046 Contact IN 7 On 0x0047 Contact IN 8 On 0x0048 Contact IN 9 On 0x0049 Contact IN 10 On 0x0060 Contact IN 1 Off 0x0061 Contact IN 2 Off 0x0062 Contact IN 3 Off 0x0063 Contact IN 4 Off 0x0064 Contact IN 5 Off 0x0065 Contact IN 6 Off 0x0066 Contact IN 7 Off 0x0067 Contact IN 8 Off 0x0068 Contact IN 9 Off 0x0069 Contact IN 10 Off 0x0080 Virtual IN 1 On 0x0081 Virtual IN 2 On 0x0082 Virtual IN 3 On 0x0083 Virtual IN 4 On 0x0084 Virtual IN 5 On 0x0085 Virtual IN 6 On 0x0086 Virtual IN 7 On 0x0087 Virtual IN 8 On 0x0088 Virtual IN 9 On 0x0089 Virtual IN 10 On 0x008A Virtual IN 11 On 0x008B Virtual IN 12 On 0x008C Virtual IN 13 On 0x008D Virtual IN 14 On 0x008E Virtual IN 15 On 0x008F Virtual IN 16 On 0x0090 Virtual IN 17 On 0x0091 Virtual IN 18 On 0x0092 Virtual IN 19 On 0x0093 Virtual IN 20 On 0x0094 Virtual IN 21 On 0x0095 Virtual IN 22 On 0x0096 Virtual IN 23 On 0x0097 Virtual IN 24 On 0x0098 Virtual IN 25 On 0x0099 Virtual IN 26 On 0x009A Virtual IN 27 On 0x009B Virtual IN 28 On 0x009C Virtual IN 29 On 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–29 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 6–30 Type Definition 0x009D Virtual IN 30 On 0x009E Virtual IN 31 On 0x009F Virtual IN 32 On 0x00A0 Virtual IN 1 Off 0x00A1 Virtual IN 2 Off 0x00A2 Virtual IN 3 Off 0x00A3 Virtual IN 4 Off 0x00A4 Virtual IN 5 Off 0x00A5 Virtual IN 6 Off 0x00A6 Virtual IN 7 Off 0x00A7 Virtual IN 8 Off 0x00A8 Virtual IN 9 Off 0x00A9 Virtual IN 10 Off 0x00AA Virtual IN 11 Off 0x00AB Virtual IN 12 Off 0x00AC Virtual IN 13 Off 0x00AD Virtual IN 14 Off 0x00AE Virtual IN 15 Off 0x00AF Virtual IN 16 Off 0x00B0 Virtual IN 17 Off 0x00B1 Virtual IN 18 Off 0x00B2 Virtual IN 19 Off 0x00B3 Virtual IN 20 Off 0x00B4 Virtual IN 21 Off 0x00B5 Virtual IN 22 Off 0x00B6 Virtual IN 23 Off 0x00B7 Virtual IN 24 Off 0x00B8 Virtual IN 25 Off 0x00B9 Virtual IN 26 Off 0x00BA Virtual IN 27 Off 0x00BB Virtual IN 28 Off 0x00BC Virtual IN 29 Off 0x00BD Virtual IN 30 Off 0x00BE Virtual IN 31 Off 0x00BF Virtual IN 32 Off 0x01C0 Remote IN 1 On 0x01C1 Remote IN 2 On 0x01C2 Remote IN 3 On 0x01C3 Remote IN 4 On 0x01C4 Remote IN 5 On 0x01C5 Remote IN 6 On 0x01C6 Remote IN 7 On 0x01C7 Remote IN 8 On 0x01C8 Remote IN 9 On 0x01C9 Remote IN 10 On 0x01CA Remote IN 11 On 0x01CB Remote IN 12 On 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code Type Definition 0x01CC Remote IN 13 On 0x01CD Remote IN 14 On 0x01CE Remote IN 15 On 0x01CF Remote IN 16 On 0x01D0 Remote IN 17 On 0x01D1 Remote IN 18 On 0x01D2 Remote IN 19 On 0x01D3 Remote IN 20 On 0x01D4 Remote IN 21 On 0x01D5 Remote IN 22 On 0x01D6 Remote IN 23 On 0x01D7 Remote IN 24 On 0x01D8 Remote IN 25 On 0x01D9 Remote IN 26 On 0x01DA Remote IN 27 On 0x01DB Remote IN 28 On 0x01DC Remote IN 29 On 0x01DD Remote IN 30 On 0x01DE Remote IN 31 On 0x01DF Remote IN 32 On 0x01E0 Remote IN 1 Off 0x01E1 Remote IN 2 Off 0x01E2 Remote IN 3 Off 0x01E3 Remote IN 4 Off 0x01E4 Remote IN 5 Off 0x01E5 Remote IN 6 Off 0x01E6 Remote IN 7 Off 0x01E7 Remote IN 8 Off 0x01E8 Remote IN 9 Off 0x01E9 Remote IN 10 Off 0x01EA Remote IN 11 Off 0x01EB Remote IN 12 Off 0x01EC Remote IN 13 Off 0x01ED Remote IN 14 Off 0x01EE Remote IN 15 Off 0x01EF Remote IN 16 Off 0x01F0 Remote IN 17 Off 0x01F1 Remote IN 18 Off 0x01F2 Remote IN 19 Off 0x01F3 Remote IN 20 Off 0x01F4 Remote IN 21 Off 0x01F5 Remote IN 22 Off 0x01F6 Remote IN 23 Off 0x01F7 Remote IN 24 Off 0x01F8 Remote IN 25 Off 0x01F9 Remote IN 26 Off 0x01FA Remote IN 27 Off 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–31 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 6–32 Type Definition 0x01FB Remote IN 28 Off 0x01FC Remote IN 29 Off 0x01FD Remote IN 30 Off 0x01FE Remote IN 31 Off 0x01FF Remote IN 32 Off 0x8002 Any Trip 0x8042 Therm O/L Trip OP 0x8044 Therm O/L Trip DPO 0x804A Therm PhA Trip OP 0x804C Therm PhA Trip DPO 0x8052 Therm PhB Trip OP 0x8054 Therm PhB Trip DPO 0x8062 Therm PhC Trip OP 0x8064 Therm PhC Trip DPO 0x84C1 LE 1 Trip PKP 0x84C2 LE 1 Trip OP 0x84C4 LE 1 Trip DPO 0x8501 LE 2 Trip PKP 0x8502 LE 2 Trip OP 0x8504 LE 2 Trip DPO 0x8541 LE 3 Trip PKP 0x8542 LE 3 Trip OP 0x8544 LE 3 Trip DPO 0x8581 LE 4 Trip PKP 0x8582 LE 4 Trip OP 0x8584 LE 4 Trip DPO 0x85C1 LE 5 Trip PKP 0x85C2 LE 5 Trip OP 0x85C4 LE 5 Trip DPO 0x8601 LE 6 Trip PKP 0x8602 LE 6 Trip OP 0x8604 LE 6 Trip DPO 0x8641 LE 7 Trip PKP 0x8642 LE 7 Trip OP 0x8644 LE 7 Trip DPO 0x8681 LE 8 Trip PKP 0x8682 LE 8 Trip OP 0x8684 LE 8 Trip DPO 0x9001 Ph IOC1 Trip PKP 0x9002 Ph IOC1 Trip OP 0x9004 Ph IOC1 Trip DPO 0x9009 Ph A IOC1 Trip PKP 0x900A Ph A IOC1 Trip OP 0x900C Ph A IOC1 Trip DPO 0x9011 Ph B IOC1 Trip PKP 0x9012 Ph B IOC1 Trip OP 0x9014 Ph B IOC1 Trip DPO 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code Type Definition 0x9021 Ph C IOC1 Trip PKP 0x9022 Ph C IOC1 Trip OP 0x9024 Ph C IOC1 Trip DPO 0x9041 Ntrl IOC1 Trip PKP 0x9042 Ntrl IOC1 Trip OP 0x9044 Ntrl IOC1 Trip DPO 0x9081 Gnd IOC1 Trip PKP 0x9082 Gnd IOC1 Trip OP 0x9084 Gnd IOC1 Trip DPO 0x90C1 Ph TOC1 Trip PKP 0x90C2 Ph TOC1 Trip OP 0x90C4 Ph TOC1 Trip DPO 0x90C9 Ph A TOC1 Trip PKP 0x90CA Ph A TOC1 Trip OP 0x90CC Ph A TOC1 Trip DPO 0x90D1 Ph B TOC1 Trip PKP 0x90D2 Ph B TOC1 Trip OP 0x90D4 Ph B TOC1 Trip DPO 0x90E1 Ph C TOC1 Trip PKP 0x90E2 Ph C TOC1 Trip OP 0x90E4 Ph C TOC1 Trip DPO 0x9101 Ntrl TOC1 Trip PKP 0x9102 Ntrl TOC1 Trip OP 0x9104 Ntrl TOC1 Trip DPO 0x9141 Gnd TOC1 Trip PKP 0x9142 Gnd TOC1 Trip OP 0x9144 Gnd TOC1 Trip DPO 0x9181 Ph IOC2 Trip PKP 0x9182 Ph IOC2 Trip OP 0x9184 Ph IOC2 Trip DPO 0x9189 Ph A IOC2 Trip PKP 0x918A Ph A IOC2 Trip OP 0x918C Ph A IOC2 Trip DPO 0x9191 Ph B IOC2 Trip PKP 0x9192 Ph B IOC2 Trip OP 0x9194 Ph B IOC2 Trip DPO 0x91A1 Ph C IOC2 Trip PKP 0x91A2 Ph C IOC2 Trip OP 0x91A4 Ph C IOC2 Trip DPO 0x91C1 Ntrl IOC2 Trip PKP 0x91C2 Ntrl IOC2 Trip OP 0x91C4 Ntrl IOC2 Trip DPO 0x9201 Gnd IOC2 Trip PKP 0x9202 Gnd IOC2 Trip OP 0x9204 Gnd IOC2 Trip DPO 0x9241 Ph TOC2 Trip PKP 0x9242 Ph TOC2 Trip OP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–33 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 6–34 Type Definition 0x9244 Ph TOC2 Trip DPO 0x9249 Ph A TOC2 Trip PKP 0x924A Ph A TOC2 Trip OP 0x924C Ph A TOC2 Trip DPO 0x9251 Ph B TOC2 Trip PKP 0x9252 Ph B TOC2 Trip OP 0x9254 Ph B TOC2 Trip DPO 0x9261 Ph C TOC2 Trip PKP 0x9262 Ph C TOC2 Trip OP 0x9264 Ph C TOC2 Trip DPO 0x9281 Ntrl TOC2 Trip PKP 0x9282 Ntrl TOC2 Trip OP 0x9284 Ntrl TOC2 Trip DPO 0x92C1 Gnd TOC2 Trip PKP 0x92C2 Gnd TOC2 Trip OP 0x92C4 Gnd TOC2 Trip DPO 0x9301 SGnd TOC1 Trip PKP 0x9302 SGnd TOC1 Trip OP 0x9304 SGnd TOC1 Trip DPO 0x9641 SGnd IOC1 Trip PKP 0x9642 SGnd IOC1 Trip OP 0x9644 SGnd IOC1 Trip DPO 0x9681 SGnd IOC2 Trip PKP 0x9682 SGnd IOC2 Trip OP 0x9684 SGnd IOC2 Trip DPO 0x9701 Pcnt Diff Trip PKP 0x9702 Pcnt Diff Trip OP 0x9704 Pcnt Diff Trip DPO 0x970A Ph Diff A Trip OP 0x970C Ph Diff A Trip DPO 0x9712 Ph Diff B Trip OP 0x9714 Ph Diff B Trip DPO 0x9722 Ph Diff C Trip OP 0x9724 Ph Diff C Trip DPO 0x9741 RGF1 Trip PKP 0x9742 RGF1 Trip OP 0x9744 RGF1 Trip DPO 0x9781 RGF2 Trip PKP 0x9782 RGF2 Trip OP 0x9784 RGF2 Trip DPO 0x97C1 Inst Diff Trip PKP 0x97C2 Inst Diff Trip OP 0x97C4 Inst Diff Trip DPO 0x9801 NSeq TOC1 Trip PKP 0x9802 NSeq TOC1 Trip OP 0x9804 NSeq TOC1 Trip DPO 0x9841 NSeq TOC2 Trip PKP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code Type Definition 0x9842 NSeq TOC2 Trip OP 0x9844 NSeq TOC2 Trip DPO 0x99C1 SGnd TOC2 Trip PKP 0x99C2 SGnd TOC2 Trip OP 0x99C4 SGnd TOC2 Trip DPO 0x9C01 LE 9 Trip PKP 0x9C02 LE 9 Trip OP 0x9C04 LE 9 Trip DPO 0x9C41 LE 10 Trip PKP 0x9C42 LE 10 Trip OP 0x9C44 LE 10 Trip DPO 0x9C81 LE 11 Trip PKP 0x9C82 LE 11 Trip OP 0x9C84 LE 11 Trip DPO 0x9CC1 LE 12 Trip PKP 0x9CC2 LE 12 Trip OP 0x9CC4 LE 12 Trip DPO 0x9D01 LE 13 Trip PKP 0x9D02 LE 13 Trip OP 0x9D04 LE 13 Trip DPO 0x9D41 LE 14 Trip PKP 0x9D42 LE 14 Trip OP 0x9D44 LE 14 Trip DPO 0x9D81 LE 15 Trip PKP 0x9D82 LE 15 Trip OP 0x9D84 LE 15 Trip DPO 0x9DC1 LE 16 Trip PKP 0x9DC2 LE 16 Trip OP 0x9DC4 LE 16 Trip DPO 0xA002 Any Alarm 0xA042 Therm Lvl Alrm OP 0xA044 Therm Lvl Alrm DPO 0xA04A Therm PhA Alrm OP 0xA04C Therm PhA Alrm DPO 0xA052 Therm PhB Alrm OP 0xA054 Therm PhB Alrm DPO 0xA062 Therm PhC Alrm OP 0xA064 Therm PhC Alrm DPO 0xA482 Relay Not Ready 0xA4C1 LE 1 Alarm PKP 0xA4C2 LE 1 Alarm OP 0xA4C4 LE 1 Alarm DPO 0xA501 LE 2 Alarm PKP 0xA502 LE 2 Alarm OP 0xA504 LE 2 Alarm DPO 0xA541 LE 3 Alarm PKP 0xA542 LE 3 Alarm OP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–35 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 6–36 Type Definition 0xA544 LE 3 Alarm DPO 0xA581 LE 4 Alarm PKP 0xA582 LE 4 Alarm OP 0xA584 LE 4 Alarm DPO 0xA5C1 LE 5 Alarm PKP 0xA5C2 LE 5 Alarm OP 0xA5C4 LE 5 Alarm DPO 0xA601 LE 6 Alarm PKP 0xA602 LE 6 Alarm OP 0xA604 LE 6 Alarm DPO 0xA641 LE 7 Alarm PKP 0xA642 LE 7 Alarm OP 0xA644 LE 7 Alarm DPO 0xA681 LE 8 Alarm PKP 0xA682 LE 8 Alarm OP 0xA684 LE 8 Alarm DPO 0xABC1 HI Amb Temp PKP 0xABC2 HI Amb Temp OP 0xABC4 HI Amb Temp DPO 0xAC01 LO Amb Temp PKP 0xAC02 LO Amb Temp OP 0xAC04 LO Amb Temp DPO 0xAC42 Self Test Alarm OP 0xAD01 R1 CoilMonAlrm PKP 0xAD02 R1 CoilMonAlrm OP 0xAD04 R1 CoilMonAlrm DPO 0xAD41 R2 CoilMonAlrm PKP 0xAD42 R2 CoilMonAlrm OP 0xAD44 R2 CoilMonAlrm DPO 0xAD81 BKR1 Fail Alrm PKP 0xAD82 BKR1 Fail Alrm OP 0xAD84 BKR1 Fail Alrm DPO 0xADC2 BKR1 Stat Fail OP 0xAEC2 BKR2 Stat Fail OP 0xAF41 BKR2 Fail Alrm PKP 0xAF42 BKR2 Fail Alrm OP 0xAF44 BKR2 Fail Alrm DPO 0xB001 Ph IOC1 Alarm PKP 0xB002 Ph IOC1 Alarm OP 0xB004 Ph IOC1 Alarm DPO 0xB009 Ph A IOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB00A Ph A IOC1 Alrm OP 0xB00C Ph A IOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB011 Ph B IOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB012 Ph B IOC1 Alrm OP 0xB014 Ph B IOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB021 Ph C IOC1 Alrm PKP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code Type Definition 0xB022 Ph C IOC1 Alrm OP 0xB024 Ph C IOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB041 Ntrl IOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB042 Ntrl IOC1 Alrm OP 0xB044 Ntrl IOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB081 Gnd IOC1 Alarm PKP 0xB082 Gnd IOC1 Alarm OP 0xB084 Gnd IOC1 Alarm DPO 0xB0C1 Ph TOC1 Alarm PKP 0xB0C2 Ph TOC1 Alarm OP 0xB0C4 Ph TOC1 Alarm DPO 0xB0C9 Ph A TOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB0CA Ph A TOC1 Alrm OP 0xB0CC Ph A TOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB0D1 Ph B TOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB0D2 Ph B TOC1 Alrm OP 0xB0D4 Ph B TOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB0E1 Ph C TOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB0E2 Ph C TOC1 Alrm OP 0xB0E4 Ph C TOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB101 Ntrl TOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB102 Ntrl TOC1 Alrm OP 0xB104 Ntrl TOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB141 Gnd TOC1 Alarm PKP 0xB142 Gnd TOC1 Alarm OP 0xB144 Gnd TOC1 Alarm DPO 0xB181 Ph IOC2 Alarm PKP 0xB182 Ph IOC2 Alarm OP 0xB184 Ph IOC2 Alarm DPO 0xB189 Ph A IOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB18A Ph A IOC2 Alrm OP 0xB18C Ph A IOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB191 Ph B IOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB192 Ph B IOC2 Alrm OP 0xB194 Ph B IOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB1A1 Ph C IOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB1A2 Ph C IOC2 Alrm OP 0xB1A4 Ph C IOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB1C1 Ntrl IOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB1C2 Ntrl IOC2 Alrm OP 0xB1C4 Ntrl IOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB201 Gnd IOC2 Alarm PKP 0xB202 Gnd IOC2 Alarm OP 0xB204 Gnd IOC2 Alarm DPO 0xB241 Ph TOC2 Alarm PKP 0xB242 Ph TOC2 Alarm OP 0xB244 Ph TOC2 Alarm DPO 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–37 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 6–38 Type Definition 0xB249 Ph A TOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB24A Ph A TOC2 Alrm OP 0xB24C Ph A TOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB251 Ph B TOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB252 Ph B TOC2 Alrm OP 0xB254 Ph B TOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB261 Ph C TOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB262 Ph C TOC2 Alrm OP 0xB264 Ph C TOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB281 Ntrl TOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB282 Ntrl TOC2 Alrm OP 0xB284 Ntrl TOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB2C1 Gnd TOC2 Alarm PKP 0xB2C2 Gnd TOC2 Alarm OP 0xB2C4 Gnd TOC2 Alarm DPO 0xB301 SGnd TOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB302 SGnd TOC1 Alrm OP 0xB304 SGnd TOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB641 SGnd IOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB642 SGnd IOC1 Alrm OP 0xB644 SGnd IOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB681 SGnd IOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB682 SGnd IOC2 Alrm OP 0xB684 SGnd IOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB701 Pcnt Diff Alrm PKP 0xB702 Pcnt Diff Alrm OP 0xB704 Pcnt Diff Alrm DPO 0xB709 Ph Dif A Alarm PKP 0xB70A Ph Dif A Alarm OP 0xB70C Ph Dif A Alarm DPO 0xB711 Ph Dif B Alarm PKP 0xB712 Ph Dif B Alarm OP 0xB714 Ph Dif B Alarm DPO 0xB721 Ph Dif C Alarm PKP 0xB722 Ph Dif C Alarm OP 0xB724 Ph Dif C Alarm DPO 0xB741 RGF1 Alarm PKP 0xB742 RGF1 Alarm OP 0xB744 RGF1 Alarm DPO 0xB781 RGF2 Alarm PKP 0xB782 RGF2 Alarm OP 0xB784 RGF2 Alarm DPO 0xB7C1 Inst Diff Alrm PKP 0xB7C2 Inst Diff Alrm OP 0xB7C4 Inst Diff Alrm DPO 0xB801 NSeq TOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB802 NSeq TOC1 Alrm OP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code Type Definition 0xB804 NSeq TOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB841 NSeq TOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB842 NSeq TOC2 Alrm OP 0xB844 NSeq TOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB9C1 SGnd TOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB9C2 SGnd TOC2 Alrm OP 0xB9C4 SGnd TOC2 Alrm DPO 0xBC01 LE 9 Alarm PKP 0xBC02 LE 9 Alarm OP 0xBC04 LE 9 Alarm DPO 0xBC41 LE 10 Alarm PKP 0xBC42 LE 10 Alarm OP 0xBC44 LE 10 Alarm DPO 0xBC81 LE 11 Alarm PKP 0xBC82 LE 11 Alarm OP 0xBC84 LE 11 Alarm DPO 0xBCC1 LE 12 Alarm PKP 0xBCC2 LE 12 Alarm OP 0xBCC4 LE 12 Alarm DPO 0xBD01 LE 13 Alarm PKP 0xBD02 LE 13 Alarm OP 0xBD04 LE 13 Alarm DPO 0xBD41 LE 14 Alarm PKP 0xBD42 LE 14 Alarm OP 0xBD44 LE 14 Alarm DPO 0xBD81 LE 15 Alarm PKP 0xBD82 LE 15 Alarm OP 0xBD84 LE 15 Alarm DPO 0xBDC1 LE 16 Alarm PKP 0xBDC2 LE 16 Alarm OP 0xBDC4 LE 16 Alarm DPO 0xC042 Output Relay 3 On 0xC082 Output Relay 4 On 0xC0C2 Output Relay 5 On 0xC102 Output Relay 6 On 0xC142 Self-Test Rly 7 On 0xC182 Output Relay 1 On 0xC1C2 Output Relay 2 On 0xC202 BKR Connected 0xC2C2 BKR2 Connected 0xC4C1 LE 1 PKP 0xC4C2 LE 1 OP 0xC4C4 LE 1 DPO 0xC501 LE 2 PKP 0xC502 LE 2 OP 0xC504 LE 2 DPO 0xC541 LE 3 PKP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–39 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 6–40 Type Definition 0xC542 LE 3 OP 0xC544 LE 3 DPO 0xC581 LE 4 PKP 0xC582 LE 4 OP 0xC584 LE 4 DPO 0xC5C1 LE 5 PKP 0xC5C2 LE 5 OP 0xC5C4 LE 5 DPO 0xC601 LE 6 PKP 0xC602 LE 6 OP 0xC604 LE 6 DPO 0xC641 LE 7 PKP 0xC642 LE 7 OP 0xC644 LE 7 DPO 0xC681 LE 8 PKP 0xC682 LE 8 OP 0xC684 LE 8 DPO 0xC882 Setpoint Group2 On 0xCA02 52a Contact OP 0xCA42 52b Contact OP 0xCCC2 BKR Stat Open 0xCD02 BKR Stat Clsd 0xCD42 Setpoint Group1 On 0xDA02 BKR2 52a Cont OP 0xDA42 BKR2 52b Cont OP 0xDA82 BKR2 Stat Open 0xDAC2 BKR2 Stat Clsd 0xDB02 Trip BKR 1 OP 0xDB42 Trip BKR 2 OP 0xDC01 LE 9 PKP 0xDC02 LE 9 OP 0xDC04 LE 9 DPO 0xDC41 LE 10 PKP 0xDC42 LE 10 OP 0xDC44 LE 10 DPO 0xDC81 LE 11 PKP 0xDC82 LE 11 OP 0xDC84 LE 11 DPO 0xDCC1 LE 12 PKP 0xDCC2 LE 12 OP 0xDCC4 LE 12 DPO 0xDD01 LE 13 PKP 0xDD02 LE 13 OP 0xDD04 LE 13 DPO 0xDD41 LE 14 PKP 0xDD42 LE 14 OP 0xDD44 LE 14 DPO 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code Type Definition 0xDD81 LE 15 PKP 0xDD82 LE 15 OP 0xDD84 LE 15 DPO 0xDDC1 LE 16 PKP 0xDDC2 LE 16 OP 0xDDC4 LE 16 DPO 0xE002 Any Block 0xE042 Therm O/L Blck 0xE182 Output Relay 1 BLK 0xE1C2 Output Relay 2 BLK 0xE882 Group Change Blk 0xF002 Ph IOC1 Block 0xF042 Ntrl IOC1 Block 0xF082 Gnd IOC1 Block 0xF0C2 Ph TOC1 Block 0xF102 Ntrl TOC1 Block 0xF142 Gnd TOC1 Block 0xF182 Ph IOC2 Block 0xF1C2 Ntrl IOC2 Block 0xF202 Gnd IOC2 Block 0xF242 Ph TOC2 Block 0xF282 Ntrl TOC2 Block 0xF2C2 Gnd TOC2 Block 0xF302 SGnd TOC1 Block 0xF642 SGnd IOC1 Block 0xF682 SGnd IOC2 Block 0xF702 Pcnt Diff Block 0xF742 RGF1 Block 0xF782 RGF2 Block 0xF7C2 Inst Diff Block 0xF802 NSeq TOC1 Blk 0xF842 NSeq TOC2 Blk 0xF9C2 SGnd TOC2 Block 0xFB02 Trip BKR1 Blk 0xFB42 Trip BKR2 Blk 0xFB82 2nd Hmnc Diff Blk 0xFBC2 5th Hmnc Diff Blk 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–41 .

for IEC61850 GOOSE. Portions of the IEC61850 standard not pertaining to GOOSE. The 345 relay does not support • an IEC61850 MMS server • the mapping of analogue values to data points in data sets in either the transmit or receive direction • a file system to maintain SCL. It is possible to change this setting from the Front Panel of the relay. are not implemented in the 345 relay. Figure 10: EnerVista SR3 GOOSE General Settings 6–42 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . The interoperability with other manufacturers will be guaranteed in almost all cases. Configuration of transmission and reception settings for the GOOSE feature are performed using EnerVista SR3 Setup Software. As such the implementation stores GOOSE configuration using MODBUS set points.S1 RELAY SETUP IEC 61850 GOOSE communications CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS The 345 firmware supports IEC61850 GOOSE communications on the optional communications daughter board. One setting is available to Enable/Disable both Transmission and Reception. The 345 firmware accepts GOOSE messages from UR. F650 and UR Plus. by implementing the reception side with nested structures (one level of nesting) and all the standard data types. ICD or CID files. GOOSE settings changes will take effect only after the 345 relay is re-booted.

PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > EVENT RECORDER PICKUP EVENTS Range: Disabled. the event recorder records events caused by the performance of the programmed control elements. the event recorder will record the event. the event recorder records the events that occur when a protection element picks up. the event recorder records the events. which occur upon state changes of any logic element. Enabled Default: Enabled These events include the elements programmed as an “ALARM” or “LATCHED ALARM” function. when a contact input changes its state. VIRTUAL INPUTS Range: Disabled. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–43 . TRIP EVENTS Range: Disabled. capturing and storing the last 256 events. which detect power system conditions considered as an alarm. Enabled Default: Enabled When set to “Enabled”. CONTACT INPUTS Range: Disabled. Enabled Default: Enabled When set to “Enabled”. Enabled Default: Enabled If set to “Enabled”. which occur upon state change of any programmed remote input. Enabled Default: Disabled When set to “Enabled” the event recorder records the dropout state of a protection element. LOGIC ELEMENT Range: Disabled. The text “TRIP” followed by the name of the operated element is recorded.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Event recorder The Event Recorder runs continuously. Enabled Default: Enabled The trip events include all programmed relay elements set to trip the breaker. CONTROL EVENTS Range: Disabled. All events are stored in a non-volatile memory where the information is maintained for up to 3 days in case of lost relay control power. DROPOUT EVENTS Range: Disabled. Enabled Default: Enabled When set to “Enabled”. ALARM EVENTS Range: Disabled. the event recorder records the events. Enabled Default: Enabled When set to “Enabled”.

3 x 64. For example at 20% selected trigger position. TRIGGER ON PKP Range: Off. only without overwriting.S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS REMOTE INPUTS Range: Disabled.Working with the Keypad. Enabled Default: Enabled When set to “Enabled”. the event recorder records the event of the changing of the date and time. and 80% post-trigger data. when an event is detected. and Winding 2 threephase currents and ground. On Default: Off Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon Pickup condition detected from any protection or control element. the relay will keep the number of records corresponding to the selected number. Transient recorder The Transient Recorder contains waveforms captured at the same sampling rate as the other relay data at the point of trigger. the new records overwrite the old ones. SETTING DATE/TIME Range: Disabled. the first identifies the number of records. The following path is available using the keypad. the event recorder records the events. the length of each record will be split on 20% pre-trigger data. TRIGGER POSITION Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1% Default: 0% This setting indicates the location of the trigger with respect to the selected length of record. TRIGGER MODE Range: Overwrite. Enabled Default: Enabled When set to “Enabled”. For instructions on how to use the keypad. 6 x 32 Default: 3 x 64 Each selection from the range is expressed by two numbers. the Transient Recorder captures data for all analog currents: Winding 1 three-phase currents and ground. whereas the second stands for the number of cycles per record. dropout. any one of which has been "Enabled" to activate the trigger. causing a pickup. Triggering of the transient recorder occurs. meaning the relay will always keep the newest records. In “Protected” mode. or alarm. 6–44 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . The transient recorder trigger may also be activated when any of the selected trigger inputs 1 to 3 is detected as having “On” status. which occur upon state change of any programmed remote input. trip. Protected Default: Overwrite When the “Overwrite” setting is selected. PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > TRANSIENT RECDR BUFFER SETUP Range: 1 x 192. please refer to Chapter 3 . By default.

A record will be triggered if the status of the selected input changes to “On”. error. Front panel The user can send a message to the display. 1 min to 10000 min Default: Off The life of the LCD backlight can be prolonged by enabling the Screen Saver mode. Virtual Input 1 to 32. warning. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough during programming or reading of actual values. the relay automatically reverts to a default message. On Default: Off Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon a Dropout condition detected from any protection or control element. or target message) will restore screen messages. trip. or information messages displayed for several seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. If the keypad is inactive for the selected period of time. alarm. that will override any normal message by sending text through Modbus. The duration of a flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–45 . Contact Input 1 to 10. These messages override any normal messages. the relay automatically shuts off the LCD screen. Remote Input 1 to 32. SCREEN SAVER Range: Off. PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > FRONT PANEL FLASH MESSAGE TIME Range: 1 s to 65535 s Default: 5 s Flash messages are status. TRIGGER ON TRIP Range: Off. TRIGGER ON INPUT 1 to 3 Range: Off.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP TRIGGER ON DPO Range: Off. Logic Element 1 to 16 Default: Off Selection of input or logic element from the settings range enables triggering input for the recorder. On Default: Off Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon Alarm condition detected from any protection or control element. TRIGGER ON ALARM Range: Off. Any activity (keypress. Refer to the 345 Feeder Protection System Communications Guide for register details. On Default: Off Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon Trip condition detected from any protection or control element. MESSAGE TIMEOUT Range: 1 s to 65535 s Default: 30 s If the keypad is inactive for a period of time.

Green. Ready Default: Not Ready Allows the user to activate/deactivate the relay. Green. This name is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the communications channel. Orange Default: Green Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator under Breaker Open conditions.S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS W1 BKR OPEN COLOR Range: Off. This name will appear on generated reports. Red. Installation PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > INSTALLATION RELAY NAME Range: Feeder Name. Red. Alpha-numeric (18 characters) Default: Feeder Name The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. The relay is not operational when set to "Not Ready. Orange Default: Red Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator under Breaker Closed conditions. Green. W1 BKR CLSD COLOR Range: Off. Red. W2 BKR CLSD COLOR Range: Off." 6–46 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . W2 BKR OPEN COLOR Range: Off. Orange Default: Red Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator under Breaker Closed conditions. RELAY STATUS Range: Not Ready. Red. Green. Orange Default: Green Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator under Breaker Open conditions.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–47 .CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP S2 System Setup Figure 11: System Setup menu S2 SYSTEM SETUP CURRENT SENSING POWER SYSTEM TRANSFORMER ▼ WNDG 1 BREAKER S2 CURRENT SENSING WNDG 2 BREAKER W1 PH CT PRIMARY ▼ W1 GND CT PRIMARY W2 PH CT PRIMARY W2 GND CT PRIMARY W1 SENS GND PRIM 5A W2 SENS GND PRIM 5A S2 POWER SYSTEM NOMINAL FREQUENCY ▼ SYSTEM ROTATION S2 TRANSFORMER XFMR RATED LOAD ▼ XFMR TYPE PHASE COMPENSATION W1 NOM VOLTAGE W1 GROUNDING W2 NOM VOLTAGE W2 GROUNDING S2 WNDG 1 BREAKER 52a CONTACT ▼ 52b CONTACT BKR CONNECTED S2 WNDG 2 BREAKER 52a CONTACT ▼ 897765A1.cdr 52b CONTACT BKR CONNECTED Current sensing PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > CURRENT SENSING W1 PH CT PRIMARY Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1 A Default: 5 A Enter the rated phase CT primary current of the three-phase current transformers associated with Winding 1.

W2 GND CT PRIMARY Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1 A Default: 5 A Enter the rated ground CT primary current of the ground current transformers associated with Winding 2. W2 PH CT PRIMARY Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1 A Default: 5 A Enter the rated phase CT primary current of the three-phase current transformers associated with Winding 2. This value is used as a default to set the optimal digital sampling rate. Enter the rated ground CT secondary current of the ground current transformers associated with Winding 2. 50 Hz Default: 60 Hz Enter the nominal power system frequency. Enter the rated ground CT secondary current of the ground current transformers associated with Winding 1. 6–48 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . W1 GND CT PRIMARY Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1 A Default: 5 A Enter the rated ground CT primary current of the ground current transformers associated with Winding 1. Enter the rated phase CT secondary current of the three-phase current transformers associated with Winding 1. W1 GND CT SECONDARY Range: 1 A to 5 A in steps of 1 A Default: 1 A Configurable 1 A or 5 A secondary (must be specified with order code P0G0).S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS W1 PH CT SECONDARY Range: 1 A to 5 A in steps of 1 A Default: 1 A Configurable 1 A or 5 A secondary (must be specified with order code P0G0). W2 PH CT SECONDARY Range: 1 A to 5 A in steps of 1 A Default: 1 A Configurable 1 A or 5 A secondary (must be specified with order code P0G0). Power system PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > POWER SYSTEM NOMINAL FREQUENCY Range: 60 Hz. W2 GND CT SECONDARY Range: 1 A to 5 A in steps of 1 A Default: 1 A Configurable 1 A or 5 A secondary (must be specified with order code P0G0). Enter the rated phase CT secondary current of the three-phase current transformers associated with Winding 2.

or grounded corner of a delta winding. The relay still performs magnitude compensation when the “External (with CTs)” option is selected. grounding transformer. if there is a grounding path at the Winding 2 side of the transformer. if there is a grounding path at Winding 1 side of the transformer such as grounded neutral. Within Zone Default: Not Within Zone Select the setting “Within Zone”. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–49 . W1 GROUNDING Range: Not Within Zone.01 Default: 5. W2 GROUNDING Range: Not Within Zone.01 to 50.1 Default: 4.1 to 65. Transformer PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER XFMR RATED LOAD Range: 0.00 MVA in steps of 0.00 KV in steps of 0. the transformer magnitude and phase shift compensations are performed internally by the relay algorithm. the transformer phase shift is externally compensated by the CT connections.00 MVA Enter the self-cooled (100%) load rating for the power transformer. If set to “External (with CT’s)”.00 KV in steps of 0. If set to “Internal (software)”. if there is no grounding path for Winding 2 in the zone. if there is no grounding path for Winding 1 in the zone. grounding transformer. Select “Not Within Zone”.16 KV Enter the nominal phase-to phase-voltage rating of Winding 2 of the transformer. PHASE COMPENSATION Range: Internal (software). such as grounded neutral. ACB. Within Zone Default: Not Within Zone Select the setting “Within Zone”. W2 NOM VOLTAGE Range: 0. Select “Not Within Zone”.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM ROTATION Range: ABC. TRANSFORMER TYPE Range: Refer to above "Transformer Types" table Default: y/D30 Select the transformer connection from a list of transformer types shown in table XX “Transformer types” . or grounded corner of a delta winding. Default: ABC Enter the phase sequence of the power system.1 Default: 13. W1 NOM VOLTAGE Range: 0.80 KV Enter the nominal phase-to phase-voltage rating of Winding 1 of the transformer. External (withCTs) Default: Internal (software) Select the type of phase compensation to be performed by the relay.1 to 65.

Transformer windings that are grounded inside zone protection allow zero sequence current flow in that winding. 3. The menu paths in the example are shown graphically in the above figure. or Zig-Zag configuration. the currents from the first Wye winding are used as a reference for the phase shift compensation. Magnitude Compensation Reference: Percent differential protection by the 345 relay uses the user-entered phase-to-phase voltage and the CT primary settings for Winding 1 as a reference for current magnitude compensation. is not required when the 345 relay is installed. it is necessary to adjust the magnitude and phase relationships of the CT secondary currents for each winding. This protection is based on Kirchoff’s Law where the algebraic sum of all currents flowing in and out of the protected equipment is equal to zero. or tapped relay windings. When a Wye/Wye transformer is selected in the setup. The 345 relay simplifies the process by performing the magnitude and phase shift compensations automatically (internally). The transformer voltage ratio results in different winding nominal currents. 2. Traditionally. However. in order to obtain near zero differential currents under normal transformer operating conditions. when applying this law to transformer protection. the phase shift between the currents from the transformer windings has been adjusted by connecting the CTs from the Wye winding in Delta connection. Physically. In such case. the transformer windings are connected in Delta. a ground fault would result in differential (zero sequence) current and false trips. For correct performance of percent differential protection. This. and each introduces a phase shift. transformer voltage ratios. Wye. In order to performing the appropriate current compensation. Phase Shift Compensation Reference: Percent differential protection by the 345 relay uses either the Delta or the Zig-Zag currents (depending on the transformer setup) as a phase shift reference to perform the phase shift compensation. and therefore it is from these windings that zero sequence removal is necessary. EXAMPLE: This section describes the process of automatic current magnitude and phase shift compensation using a specific example that shows how CT ratios. one should keep in mind that direct summation of the measured per-phase transformer currents does not automatically result in a zero differential current. and transformer phase shifts are used to generate the correction factors. Transformer setup phase & magnitude compensations Percent (biased) differential protection is the main type of protection for power transformers with respect to detecting all types of transformer internal faults. the relay automatically calculates and applies the correct magnitude of scaling to the winding currents. as well as the correct phase shift. zero sequence removal is necessary if zero sequence can flow into and out of one transformer winding but not the other winding. it would be necessary to insert a zero sequence current trap with the wye connected CTs on the Delta winding of the transformer. This is because: 1. The magnitude of this adjustment is accomplished using interposing CTs. The winding CTs are not rated to exactly match the winding nominal currents. These correction factors are applied to the current signals to obtain extremely accurate differential currents. all winding CTs must be connected in Wye (polarity markings pointing away from the transformer). and the CTs from the Delta winding in Wye connection. however. Upon receiving entered settings for the protected transformer and winding CT ratings.S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS The Delta connection of CTs inherently has the effect of removing the zero sequence components of the phase currents. 6–50 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . In general. If there were a grounding bank on the Delta winding of the power transformer within the zone of protection. in order to prepare the currents for summation.

500/5 CT ratio • Winding 2: 4. Based on 100% transformer loading (5MVA).8 kV” S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > W1 GROUNDING: “Within Zone” S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > W2 NOM F-F VOLTAGE: “4. The currents from winding 1 are not multiplied by any correction factor.8 kV nominal. 3 .904. 2 The 345 calculates and automatically corrects the CT mismatch to a maximum mismatch factor of 16. the measured winding currents are: Winding 1 CT: measured Eq.1057. The following sections will illustrate auto-configuration principles using in the example.winding 1 nominal current 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–51 . the Winding 2 CT secondary current is higher (per unit) than the Winding 1 CT secondary current. the measured currents from winding 2 will be automatically compensated by the relay applying the correction factor of 0. The perfectly matched winding 2 CT primary at nominal winding 2 voltage is calculated as follows: Eq. for any load.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP Consider a typical Wye/Delta power transformer with the following data: • Connection: Y/d30° (i. 1 where: CT1 = Winding 1 CT primary rating V1 = Winding 1 nominal voltage CT2 = Winding 2 CT primary rating V2 = Winding 2 nominal voltage Thus. delta winding phase currents lag the corresponding wye winding phase currents by 30°) • Transformer rated load: 5/7/9 MVA • Winding 1: 13.6 / 1500 = 1.e. as they are always used by the relay as a magnitude reference.16 kV” S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > W2 GROUNDING: “Not Within Zone” AUTOMATIC CT MISMATCH COMPENSATION The 1500/5 CT on winding 2 does not perfectly match the 500/5 CT on Winding 1. The mismatch factor is 1658. Hence. The current transformer ratings per each winding are entered as: S2 SYSTEM SETUP > CURRENT SENSING > W1 PHASE CT PRIMARY: “500 A” S2 SYSTEM SETUP > CURRENT SENSING > W2 PHASE CT PRIMARY: “1500 A” The transformer type is entered as: S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > TRANSFORMER TYPE: “Y/d30” S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > XFMR RATED LOAD: “5 MVA” S2 SYSTEM SETU > TRANSFORMER > W1 NOM F-F VOLTAGE: “13.16 kV nominal. 1500/5 CT ratio. The 345 relay calculates the magnitude correction factor for Winding 2 as follows: Eq.

” Figure 12: Example transformer A B N IB IC Ia' Ib' Ic' Ia = Ia' – Ic' Ib = Ib' – Ia' Ic = Ic' – Ib' IA a C b c 897716A1. the compensated currents expressed in times CT (w1) as a reference and used by the percent differential protection will be as shown: Eq. respectively. Note that the total current out of the delta winding is described by an equation.winding 2 nominal current Based on 100% transformer loading. with a sequence of ABC. The winding currents are also identified. 6–52 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . The currents that would be present for a balanced load are shown below. The example below shows why this happens.S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Winding 2 CT: measured Eq. 5 Eq. Now assume that a source. 4 . is connected to transformer terminals ABC. using a transformer described in IEC nomenclature as “Yd1” or in GE Multilin nomenclature as “Y/d30.CDR The above figure shows the physical connections within the transformer that produce a phase angle in the delta winding lagging the respective wye winding by 30°. 6 PHASE SHIFT COMPENSATION The source phase sequence must be stated when describing the winding phase relationships since these relationships change when the phase sequence changes.

This will restore the nameplate phase shifts but will cause incorrect identification of phases B and C within the relay. C. which is in agreement with the transformer nameplate. (which is a type Yd11 in IEC nomenclature and a type Y/d330 in GE Multilin nomenclature) which is in disagreement with the transformer nameplate. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–53 . The currents that would be present for a balanced load are shown below: Figure 14: Phasors for ACB sequence 828718A1. It may be suggested that for the ACB sequence the phase relationship can be returned to that shown on the transformer nameplate by connecting source phases A.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP Figure 13: Phasors for ABC sequence 897717A1. The transformer nameplate phase relationship information is only correct for a stated phase sequence.CDR Note that the delta winding currents leads the wye winding currents by 30°. with a sequence of ACB is connected to transformer terminals A. and B respectively. This is because the physical connections and hence the equations used to calculate current for the delta winding have not changed.CDR Note that the delta winding currents lag the wye winding currents by 30°. B and C to transformer terminals A. Now assume that a source. C. B respectively. and is therefore not recommended.

The following diagram shows the internal connections of the Y/d30? transformer from our example: WINDING 1 (WYE) C B A a N b c WINDING 2 (DELTA) The 345 performs this phase angle correction internally based on the following setpoint. or zig-zag) and ground CT assignment angle by which a winding lags winding 1 diagrams showing the phase relationships of voltage phasors. In our example. CTs on the Wye connected transformer winding (winding 1) would be connected in a delta arrangement. If there were a grounding bank on the Delta winding of 6–54 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . The Delta connection of CTs. B and C respectively. the 30° lag of the Delta results into 0° phase shift applied to its currents (Delta –phase reference). and 30° phase angle correction (phase shift) applied to the winding 1 currents (Wye winding). delta. The 345 supports all standard two-winding transformer types. B and C terminals to the power system phases A. The transformer types and phase relationships presented are for a system phase sequence of ABC. in accordance with the standards for power transformers.CDR phase angle correction (or phase shift) that is initially performed to calculate differential currents As shown in the “Y/d30°” entry of the transformer types table. Each transformer type from the Transformer Types table below provides the following information: transformer type notation as it appears on the display winding connection (wye. Connection 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 30° lag 2 DELTA 30° Lag 0° 897721A1. so that line currents from both windings can be compared at the relay. Traditionally. however. These angle corrections are described in the table as Phase shift. Users with a system phase sequence of ACB must determine the transformer type for this sequence. which compensates for the phase angle lag introduced in the Delta connected winding (winding 2). Set S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > TRANSFORMER TYPE to “Y/d30°”.S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS All information presented in this manual is based on connecting the relay phase A. where (the arrow sign) indicates the reference phase Transformer type Y/d30° Voltage phasors Phase shift Wdg. inherently has the effect of removing the zero sequence components of the phase currents. the transformer has the Y-D connection.

All currents are phase and zero sequence compensated internally before the calculation of differential and restraint quantities. it would be necessary to insert a zero sequence current trap with the Wye connected CTs on the Delta winding of the transformer. The phase compensation angle for each winding would then be calculated as follows (assuming Rotation = “ABC”): Eq. the first winding is chosen. based on the settings entered for the transformer. The phase reference winding (wf) is the winding which will have a phase shift of 0° applied to it. wf = 2). a ground fault would result in differential (zero sequence) current and false trips. 7 where Rotation = “ABC” Eq. zero sequence removal is necessary if zero sequence can flow into and out of one transformer winding but not the other winding. the phase reference winding would be winding 2 (i. The phase reference winding is chosen to be the delta or zigzag (non-wye) winding with the lowest winding index. and therefore it is from these windings that zero sequence removal is necessary. The phase compensation angle Φ?comp is the angle by which a winding current is shifted to refer it to the phase reference winding. For a transformer that has no delta or zigzag windings. In general. Transformer windings that are grounded inside the zone of protection allow zero sequence current flow in that winding. and is calculated by the 345 for each winding as follows: Eq. 9 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–55 . if one exists.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP the power transformer within the zone of protection.e. 8 where Rotation = “ACB” In our example. All CTs are connected Wye (polarity markings pointing away from the transformer). The 345 performs this phase angle compensation and zero sequence removal automatically. In such a case.

Table 1: Transformer types Transformer Wdg.S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS TRANSFORMER TYPES A complete table of two-winding transformer types is shown below. Connection Type 2W External Correction Y/y180° Y/d150° Y/d330° D/d60° D/d180° 6–56 Voltage Phase Phasors Shift (Φcomp) 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 0° 2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 0° 0° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 180° lag 2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 180° lag 0° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 150° lag 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 150° lag 0° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 330° lag 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 330° lag 0° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 60° lag 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 60° lag 0° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 180° lag 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 180° lag 0° Transformer Wdg. Connection Type Y/y0° Y/d30° Y/d210° D/d0° D/d120° D/d240° Voltage Phase Phasors Shift (Φcomp) 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 0° 2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 0° 0° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 30° lag 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 30° lag 0° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 210° lag 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 210° lag 0° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 0° 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 0° 0° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 120° lag 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 120° lag 0° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 240° lag 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 240° lag 0° 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP Transformer Wdg. Connection Type D/y30° D/y210° Y/z30° Y/z210° D/z0° D/z120° Voltage Phase Phasors Shift (Φcomp) 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 0° 2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 30° lag 330° lag 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 0° 2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 210° lag 150° lag 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 30° lag 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 30° lag 0° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 210° lag 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 210° lag 0° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 0° 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 0° lag 0° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 120° lag 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 120° lag 0° 6–57 . Connection Type D/d300° D/y150° D/y330° Y/z150° Y/z330° D/z60° Voltage Phase Phasors Shift (Φcomp) 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 300° lag 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 300° lag 0° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 0° 2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 150° lag 210° lag 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 0° 2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 330° lag 30° lag 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 150° lag 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 150° lag 0° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 330° lag 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 330° lag 0° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 60° lag 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 60° lag 0° 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Transformer Wdg.

S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Transformer Wdg. Connection Type D/z240° 3W External Correction Voltage Phase Phasors Shift (Φcomp) 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 240° lag 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 240° lag 0° 1 WYE 0° 23 WYE 0° 0° WYE 0° 0° The following table shows the linear combination of phases of a transformer winding that achieves the phase shift and zero sequence removal for typical values of Φcomp. Connection Type D/z180° D/z300° Voltage Phase Phasors Shift (Φcomp) 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 180° lag 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 180° lag 0° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 300° lag 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 300° lag 0° Transformer Wdg. Table 2: Grounding ΦCOMP[W] GROUNDING[W] = "NOT WITHIN ZONE" GROUNDING[W] = "WITHIN ZONE" 0° 30° lag 60° lag 90° lag 6–58 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . where: IA[w] = uncompensated winding ‘w’ phase A current IAp[w] = phase and zero sequence compensated winding ‘w’ phase A current.

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP ΦCOMP[W] GROUNDING[W] = "NOT WITHIN ZONE" GROUNDING[W] = "WITHIN ZONE" 120° lag 150° lag 180° lag 210° lag 240° lag 270° lag 300° lag 330° lag 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–59 .

AND ZERO SEQUENCE COMPENSATION Transformer magnitude. In our example. PHASE ANGLE. phase angle. and zero-sequence compensation calculations Complete magnitude.magnitude.magnitude compensation factor for winding 2 (see previous sections) . phase angle.S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS MAGNITUDE. phase and zero sequence compensated winding w phase currents .phase and zero sequence compensated winding phase currents (see earlier). the following phase and zero-sequence compensation equations would be used: For Winding 1 (Wye – grounded neutral): For Winding 2 (Delta): The complete compensated winding 1 and winding 2 currents would be as follows: 6–60 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . and zero sequence compensation is as follows: Winding 1 compensated currents: Winding 2 compensated currents: where: .

are the phase differential currents. PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > WNDG 1 BREAKER 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–61 . and are the phase restraint currents.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINT CURRENT CALCULATIONS Differential currents are calculated as follows: Restraint currents are calculated as follows: where. 52a (CI#1) and 52b (CI#2). For instructions on how to use the keypad. the per-phase differential and restraint currents would be as follows: Winding breakers The status of the Winding 1 breaker is monitored by the 345 relay using the status of either one or two contact inputs. wired to the Winding 1 breaker auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b. Per the example. The following path is available using the keypad. please refer to Chapter 3 .Working with the Keypad. and the status of the Winding 2 breaker 52a (CI#3) and 52b (CI#4) wired to Winding 2 breaker aux contacts 52a and 52b respectively (see below).

NOTE: NOTE It is highly recommended to monitor the status of the Winding 1 and Winding 2 breakers using both breaker auxiliary contacts 52a. or disconnect switches switched-off) to the system. is provided by monitoring the contact input setting for “BKR CONNECTED”. Contact Input 4 Default: Disabled Select Contact Input 4 [52b (CI#4)] if connected to Winding 2 breaker auxiliary contact 52b. BKR CONNECTED Range: Contact Input 5 to 10.The logic for Breaker Open. and 52b. Contact Input 2 Default: Disabled Select Contact Input 2 [52b (CI#2)] if connected to breaker auxiliary contact 52b. or disconnect switches switched-off) to the system. Contact Input 1 Default: Disabled Select Contact Input 1 [52a (CI#1)] if connected to breaker auxiliary contact 52a. 52b CONTACT Range: Disabled. The breaker status when disconnected from the main power circuit. and Breaker Close status is shown in the table below: Table 3: Breaker open / Breaker closed status logic 6–62 52a contact configured 52b contact configured Yes Yes Breaker status Open Close 52a contact open 52a contact closed 52b contact closed 52b contact open 52a contact open 52a contact closed 52b contact open Yes No No Yes 52b contact closed No No Status unknown 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Disabled Default: Disabled Select a contact input to show whether the breaker is connected (Racked-in. or isolated by the associated disconnect switches on a fixed circuit breaker. or disconnected (racked-out. Contact Input 3 Default: Disabled Select Contact Input 3 [52a (CI#3)] if connected to Winding 2 breaker auxiliary contact 52a. however using only one of them is also acceptable. such by drawout breaker racking mechanism. or disconnect switches switched-on). 52b CONTACT Range: Disabled. or disconnected (racked-out. Disabled Default: Disabled Select a contact input to show whether the breaker is connected (Racked-in. BKR CONNECTED Range: Contact Input 5 to 10.S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS 52a CONTACT Range: Disabled. or disconnect switches switched-on). PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > WNDG 2 BREAKER 52a CONTACT Range: Disabled.

the breaker state is shown to be neither open.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP If the contact input selected under BKR CONNECTED setting is asserted. Table 4: Breaker status with both contacts configured 52a contact status 52b contact status Breaker status Off On open On Off closed On On BKR status failure Off Off BKR status failure 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–63 . nor closed. When the breaker is determined disconnected. the breaker is considered connected to the primary system.

GND IOC1(2)) • 51N Neutral Timed Overcurrent (NEUTRAL TOC1(2)) • 50N Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent (NEUTRAL IOC1(2)) • 51_2 Negative Sequence Timed Overcurrent (NEG SEQ TOC1(2)) • 50BF Breaker Failure (W1(2) BREAKER FAIL) 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 Protection The 345 protection elements are organized in two identical setpoint groups: Setpoint Group 1 and Setpoint Group 2. depending on the relay order code. GND TOC1(2)) • 50G Ground/Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (GROUND/SENS. These protection functions include: 6–64 • 87T Percent Differential (XFMR PCNT DIFF) • 87T/50 Instantaneous Differential (XFMR INST DIFF) • 87G Restricted Ground Fault (RESTD GND FAULT1(2)) • 49 Thermal Model (THERMAL MODEL) • 51P Phase Timed Overcurrent (PHASE TOC1(2)) • 50P Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (PHASE IOC1(2) • 51G Ground/Sensitive Ground Timed Overcurrent (GROUND/SENS. Each Setpoint Group has the same protection functions.

cdr BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–65 .CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION Setpoint group 1(2) Figure 15: Protection setpoint group 1(2) menu .1 of 2 S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1 XFMR PCNT DIFF S3 XFMR PERCENT DIFF XFMR INST DIFF PCNT DIFF FUNCTION RESTD GND FAULT1 ▼ ▼ MINIMUM PICKUP RESTD GND FAULT2 SLOPE 1 THERMAL MODEL S3 RESTD GND FAULT PHASE TOC1 RGF FUNCTION PHASE TOC2 ▼ PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC2 GROUND TOC1 GROUND TOC2 GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC2 NEUTRAL TOC1 NEUTRAL TOC2 NEUTRAL IOC1 NEUTRAL IOC2 NEG SEQ TOC1 NEG SEQ TOC2 S3 THERMAL MODEL CT INPUTS THERMAL MDL FUNC RGF PICKUP ▼ RGF SLOPE THERMAL MDL PKP RGF DELAY THERMAL MDL ALARM GND CURRENT SPVSN HEAT TIME CONSTANT GND SUPV LEVEL COOL TIME CONSTANT OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 3 ...... OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 S3 XFMR INST DIFF INST DIFF FUNCTION ▼ INST DIFF PICKUP OUTPUT RELAY 3 .... . OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 897798. OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 BLOCK 3 BREAK 1 BREAK 2 SLOPE 2 INRUSH INHBT FUNCT INRUSH INHBT LEVEL INRUSH INHBT MODE OVEREXCIT INHIBIT OVEREX INHT LEVEL OUTPUT RELAY 3 .

.. cdr OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ........ GROUND IOC1 S3 GROUND TOC1 GROUND IOC2 NEUTRAL TOC1 NEUTRAL TOC2 NEUTRAL IOC1 GND TOC1 FUNCTION BLOCK 1 ▼ BLOCK 2 GND CT INPUTS S3 NEUTRAL TOC1 NEUTRAL IOC2 NTRL TOC1 FUNCTION NEG SEQ TOC1 ▼ NEG SEQ TOC2 NTRL CT INPUTS NTRL TOC1 PKP NTRL TOC1 CURVE NTRL TOC1 TDM NTRL TOC1 RESET RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR OUTPUT RELAY 3 . OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 GND IOC1 FUNCTION ▼ S3 PHASE IOC1 PH IOC1 FUNCTION ▼ PHASE CT INPUTS PH IOC1 PKP PH IOC1 DELAY RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR OUTPUT RELAY 3 .2 of 2 S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1 S3 PHASE TOC1 XFMR PCNT DIFF PH TOC FUNCTION XFMR INST DIFF ▼ RESTD GND FLT PHASE CT INPUTS ▼ PH TOC1 PKP THERMAL MODEL PH TOC1 CURVE PHASE TOC1 PH TOC1 TDM PHASE TOC2 PH TOC1 RESET PHASE IOC1 RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR PHASE IOC2 RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR GROUND TOC1 OUTPUT RELAY 3 GROUND TOC2 .. GND TOC1 PKP GND TOC1 CURVE GND TOC1 TDM GND TOC1 RESET RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR OUTPUT RELAY 3 .S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Figure 16: Protection setpoint group 1(2) menu . OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 S3 NEGATIVE SEQ TOC1 NEG SEQ TOC1 FUNC GND IOC1 PKP ▼ GND IOC1 DELAY PHASE CT INPUTS RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR NTRL CT INPUTS NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR NTRL IOC1 PKP NEG SEQ TOC1 CURVE OUTPUT RELAY 3 NTRL IOC1 DELAY NEG SEQ TOC1 TDM ... OUTPUT RELAY 3 BLOCK 3 .. RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR NEG SEQ TOC1 RESET OUTPUT RELAY 6 RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR BLOCK 1 OUTPUT RELAY 3 RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR BLOCK 2 .. NTRL IOC1 FUNCTION ▼ OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 6–66 S3 GROUND IOC1 BLOCK 3 GND CT INPUTS S3 NEUTRAL IOC1 897758.

and a zone for no operation.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Transformer percent differential S3 PROTECTION The 345 provides one percent differential element per setpoint group. 10 The restraint current is calculated as a maximum of the same internally compensated currents: Eq. dual breakpoint differential/restraint characteristic. Eq. phase angle and zero sequence compensation (as required) Decaying dc offset filter Decaying dc offset filter Discrete Fourrier transform Discrete Fourrier transform S MAX Differential Current Restraint Current 897801. and security during external faults. The purpose of this characteristic is to provide a zone for differential protection operation. The settings menu of the percent differential element defines a dual slope. and compares their ratio with the user pre-defined differential/restraint characteristic. where the user can define protection sensitivity and dependability during internal faults. The differential current is calculated per-phase as a vector sum of currents from both windings after magnitude and angle compensation. 11 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–67 . The calculation of differential and restraint currents are as shown on the figure below.CDR The 345 continuously calculates per-phase differential and restraint currents. Figure 17: Calculation of transformer differential (Id) and restraint (Ir) currents Winding 1 current waveform Winding 2 current waveform Phase angle and zero sequence compensation (as required) Magnitude.

Output relays #1 “R1 TRIP” and #2 “R2 TRIP” will operate when the Trip setting is selected and the Percent Differential protection is in operation. The setting is selected based on the amount of differential current that might be seen under normal conditions. and defines the ratio of differential/restraint currents. PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 SETPOINT GROUP1 > XFMR PCNT DIFF XFMR DIFF FUNCTION Range: Disabled. and a transformer ratio that may change as a result of the transformer onload tap changer. Latched Alarm.10 x CT This setting defines the minimum differential current required for operation. until the reset command is initiated.01 Default: 0. The “ALARM” LED will flash under the phase differential operating condition. Alarm.05 to 1. If the Latched Alarm setting is selected. the “ALARM” LED will flash during the Phase differential operating condition. above which the element will operate. MINIMUM PICKUP Range: 0. 6–68 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . SLOPE 1 Range: 15 to 100% in steps of 1 Default: 25% This setting is applicable for restraint (through) currents of zero to kneepoint 1.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Figure 18: Differential / Restraint characteristic Idifferential (xCT) SLOPE 2 100% OPERATE REGION Transition Region (lineal) SLOPE 1 25% PICKUP 0.00 x CT in steps of 0. In this mode the “ALARM” LED does not turn on. and will selfreset when the condition clears. The slope is set to ensure sensitivity of internal faults at normal transformer loading. Alarm.cdr BREAKPOINT 2 Irestraint (xCT) The figure above shows the differential/restraint characteristic of the main transformer percent differential protection.30 BREAKPOINT 1 897802. Trip Default: Disabled The selection of the Latched Alarm. Output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate when the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected. with the function setting selected as Alarm. CT inaccuracies. and will stay “ON” after the condition clears. or Trip setting enables the Percent Phase Differential function. This differential current is a result of the transformer magnetizing current.

but the other set does not.5xCT Breakpoint 2 should be set below the fault current that is most likely to saturate any of the transformer CTs due to an AC component alone.50 to 4. In such cases the differential/restraint ratio can go as high as 95% to 98%.50xCT The setting for Breakpoint 1 defines the limit of linear operation of Winding 1 CT.16kV.00xCT in steps of 0. Breakpoint 1 should be set below the current that would cause CT saturation due to DC components and/or residual magnetism. For example if 10 kA is the maximum AC through fault current before Winding 2 CT (1000:5) starts to saturate.01xCT Default: 1. BREAK 2 Range: 1.00 to 10. and a Winding1 CT (500:5) rating.15 – magnitude compensation factor for Winding 2 currents Breakpoint 2 = 20*0. 2nd Harm Block Default: 2nd Harm Block This setting enables or disables the inrush inhibit function. INRUSH INHBT FUNCT Range: Disabled. Figure 19: Transformer Inrush inhibiting 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–69 . This breakpoint marks the end of slope 1.01xCT Default: 1. the Breakpoint 2 setting will be: 10kA/500 = 20 M(W2) = (4.16kV*500)/(13.8kV*1000) = 0. on a 5 MVA transformer with a ratio of 13. In such cases. Very often the Breakpoint 1 setting is based on the transformer Winding 1 nominal current (100% transformer loading).15= 3 xCT SLOPE 2 Range: 50 to 100% in steps of 1 Default: 95% The Slope 2 setting ensures stability during fault conditions of the type that produce CT saturation and spurious high differential current.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION BREAK 1 Range: 0.8kV/4.00xCT in steps of 0. The setting is expressed in times CT primary of Winding 1. one should check whether or not this setting complies with the above recommendation regarding the CT linear performance. where no CT saturation is expected to restrain (through) currents smaller than that breakpoint. accounting for up to 80% of residual flux that effectively reduces the capability of the CT by a factor of 5. Slope 2 should be set high to cater for the worst case scenario where one set of CTs saturates. None of the settings for inrush inhibit are active when the function is set to “Disabled”.

A given transformer can tolerate an overfluxing condition for a limited time. 5th Harm Default: Disabled This setting provides 5th harmonic differential protection blocking during an overexcitation condition that results from an increased V/Hz ratio. and blocks the differential protection for all three phases if the 2nd harmonic on any two of these three phases is higher than the setting for the inrush inhibit level.1 Default: 10% This setting specifies the ratio of 2nd harmonic differential current to the fundamental frequency differential current for the selected mode of 2nd harmonic inhibit.0% This setting specifies the level of 5th harmonic during overexcitation (overfluxing) transformer conditions.1 to 40. and the dividing number (divisor) will be decreased to 1. and the dividing number (divisor) is decreased from 3 to 2.0% in steps of 0.0% in steps of 0. If set to “Per phase.1 Default: 10. poses a danger to the protected transformer. If the differential current on any of the three phases goes below the differential current cut-off level of 0. Such an overexcitation condition from an increased V/Hz ratio. the 2nd harmonic current from that phase gets dropped (zeroed) from the equation for averaging. OVEREX INHT LEVEL Range: 1.04 x CT. If set to “Average. When the 5th harmonic level exceeds the specified OVEREX INHT LEVEL setting (5th harmonic ratio) the differential element is blocked. "2-out-of-3". Averaging of the 2nd harmonics is adaptive and depends on the magnitude of the differential current per-phase. The same happens if the magnitude of the differential current on one of the two remaining phases drops below the cutoff level during energization.” the function performs inrush inhibit for each phase individually. "Average" Default: Per Phase This setting specifies the mode of blocking during transformer magnetizing (inrush) conditions. The percent differential protection will be blocked from operation if the actual ratio of the differential 2nd harmonic current to the fundamental frequency differential current is above this threshold. The overexcitation inhibit works on a per-phase basis.0 to 40. So instantaneous tripping of the transformer by the differential protection is not desirable. 6–70 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . The relay uses a traditional 5th harmonic ratio for inhibiting the differential function during overexcitation conditions. INRUSH INHBT MODE Range: "Per Phase".” the relay checks the 2nd harmonic level onthe per-phase differential current. OVEREXCIT INHIBIT Range: Disabled. as the danger is associated with thermal processes in the core. If set to “2-out-of-3.” the relay calculates the average 2nd harmonic level and compares this level against the setting for the inrush inhibit level. In this case the 2nd harmonic on this phase will be dropped from summation.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS INRUSH INHBT LEVEL Range: 0.

Contact Input 1 to 10. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–71 . Logic Elements 1 to 16 Default: Off Three blocking inputs are provided in the Percent Differential menu. Virtual Input 1 to 32.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do Not Operate. Any of the assigned blocking inputs can block the function. Operate Default: Do Not Operate Any. or Trip function is selected. or Logic Element. or all. BLOCK 1/2/3 Range: Off. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm. The available selections for each block include Contact input. Virtual Input. Alarm. of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon percent differential operation. Remote Input. Remote Input 1 to 32.

6–72 SETPOINT SETPOINT SETPOINT Phase C current (IC5d) Phase B current (IB5d) Phase A current (IA5d) SETPOINT IC2d = LEVEL IB2d = LEVEL IA2d = LEVEL RUN RUN RUN IC5d = LEVEL IB5d = LEVEL IA5d = LEVEL OVEREXC INHIBIT LEVEL RUN RUN RUN INRUSH INHIBIT MODE PCNT DIFF PH A OP 5TH HMNC DIFF PH C 897803.cdr PCNT DIFF PH C OP OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 3 SETPOINT Transient Recorder Event Recorder Trip (To Breaker Failure ) Operate Output Relay 2 (W2 BKR TRIP) PCNT DIFF PH B OP 5TH HMNC DIFF PH B LED: ALARM Operate Output Relay 1 (W1 BKR TRIP) Operate output relays upon selection PCNT DIFF OP Message 5TH HMNC DIFF PH A Event Recorder 2ND HMNC DIFF PH C 2ND HMNC DIFF PH B 2ND HMNC DIFF PH A Event Recorder AND Differential 5th Harmonic 5th harmonic =1 Disabled = 0 OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT FUNCTION SETPOINT Phase C current (IC2d) Phase B current (IB2d) SETPOINT INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL PCNT DIFF PH C PKP PCNT DIFF PH B PKP PCNT DIFF PH A PKP Transient Recorder Event Recorder OR Phase A current (IA2d) Differential 2nd Harmonic 2nd harmonic Disabled = 0 Message PCNT DIFF PKP AND INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION RUN RUN RUN INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL SLOPE 2 BREAKPOINT 2 BREAKPOINT 1 AND Phase C Rest Current (ICr) Phase B Rest Current (IBr) Phase A Rest Current (IAr) Restraint Currents Phase C Diff Current (ICd) Phase B Diff Current (IBd) Phase A Diff Current (IAd) Differential Currents Off = 0 BLOCK 3: Off = 0 BLOCK 2: Off = 0 SLOPE 1 LED: PICKUP AND MINIMUM PICKUP: SETPOINT LATCH LED: TRIP R S OR BLOCK 1: Trip Alarm Latched Alarm AND Disabled = 0 PERCENT DIFF FUNCTION: RESET Command S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Figure 20: Percent Differential Protection logic diagram AND OR AND OR OR 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

Virtual Input1 to 32. and if used. and will self-reset. Latched Alarm. The output relays #1 “R1 TRIP” and #2 “R2 TRIP” will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected. the XFMR INST DIFF function will be blocked. Virtual Input. Alarm. Operate Default: Do Not Operate Any. Inputs to this protection are computed on the basis of the relay per-phase differential currents.Contact input. Alarm. OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do Not Operate. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–73 . the “ALARM” LED will flash during the operating condition. Instantaneous Differential protection is usually set to operate during high-fault current situations. The selection of output relays operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm. Alarm.00xCT This setting defines the pickup level of the differential current required for operation. INST DIFF PICKUP Range: 3.00 – 20. The “ALARM” LED will flash under the instantaneous differential operating condition. In this mode. Trip Default: Disabled The selection of the Latched Alarm. The output relays #1 “R1 TRIP” and #2 “R2 TRIP” will operate. Instantaneous Differential protection is not biased protection and operates in a fashion similar to instantaneous overcurrent protection. with the function setting selected as Alarm. When any of the selected blocking inputs . and will stay “ON” after the condition clears. of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon instantaneous Differential Protection operation. Logic Elements1 to 16 Default: Off Three blocking inputs are provided in the Percent Differential menu. its pickup is set according to the following criteria: • The pickup setting (xCT) is selected to be higher than the maximum inrush current during transformer energization • The pickup setting is set higher than the fault current for faults occuring outside the zone of protection • The pickup setting is selected to be lower than the maximum fault current during internal fault conditions.01 xCT Default: 8. when the Trip setting is selected. Contact Input 1 to 10. Remote Input 1 to 32. or Remote Input .is turned on. or all.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Transformer instantaneous differential S3 PROTECTION The 345 relay provides one Instantaneous Differential element per setpoint group. and the Instantaneous Differential protection is operational. PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 PROTECTION GROUP 1(2) > XFMR INST DIFF INST DIFF FUNCTION Range: Disabled. If the Latched Alarm setting is selected. until the reset command is initiated.00 xCT in steps of 0. when the condition clears. or Trip function is selected. or Trip setting enables the Instantaneous Phase Differential function. Operation occurs if the value of any of the computed phase differential currents is above the instantaneous differential pickup setting. the “ALARM” LED does not turn on. INST DIFF BLOCK1/2/3 Range: Off.

cdr OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 3 SETPOINT: Trip (To Breaker Failure ) Operate Output Relay 2 ((W1 BKR TRIP)) Operate Output Relay 1 ((W1 BKR TRIP)) LED: ALARM S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Figure 21: Instantaneous Differential Protection logic diagram AND OR AND OR OR 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .6–74 SETPOINT Phase C Diff current (ICd) Phase B Diff current (IBd) Phase A Diff current (IAd) Phase Differential Currents Off = 0 BLOCK 3: Off = 0 BLOCK 2: Off = 0 SETPOINT RUN RUN RUN ICd = Pickup IBd = Pickup IAd = Pickup INST DIFFERENTIAL PICKUP: LED: PICKUP AND BLOCK 1: Trip LED: TRIP INST DIFF OP INST DIFF PKP Event Recorder INST DIFF OP INST DIFF PKP Message R LATCH S OR Alarm Latched Alarm AND Disabled = 0 INST DIFF FUNCTION: SETPOINT RESET Command Operate output relays upon selection 897804.

and the measured ground current (i. Application of the restricted ground fault protection extends the fault coverage towards the neutral point. An internal ground fault on an impedance grounded wye winding will produce a low magnitude ground fault current depending on position of the fault with respect of the winding neutral point. one per winding.Ig). where the fault will go undetected. the relay provides up to two Restricted Ground Fault elements per setpoint group. Figure 22: RGF and percent differential zones of protection WINDING 35% RGF ZONE DIFFERENTIAL ZONE Rg Figure 23: Fault currents vs points from neutral 100 90 80 % Max Ifault 70 60 Ifault 50 40 30 Ip 20 Ip(x) 10 Ifault(x) 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 x = distance of fault from neutral The SR345 implementation of the restricted ground fault protection is a low impedance current differential scheme. 3I0. See the diagrams below. and applies a restraining current defined as the 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–75 . The Restricted Ground Fault (RGF) protection provides ground fault detection for lowmagnitude ground fault currents primarily for ground faults closed to the neutral point of the wye connected winding.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Restricted ground fault S3 PROTECTION Depending on the SR345 order code. expressing the dependence of the fault current with respect to the fault distance from the neutral point. Therefore. The 345 calculates the magnitude of the ground differential current as a difference between the vectors of the computed residual current. but rather the result of the transformation ratio between the primary windings and the percentage of shorted turns. the resultant differential currents may be below the pickup and/ or the slope setting of the main differential element. The resultant primary current can be negligible for ground winding faults within 30% distance from the neutral point since the fault voltage is not the system voltage.e.

before making operation decision. The ground current supervision is not active if the GND CURRENT SUPERVISION is selected as “Disabled”. When the Alarm setting is selected as a function. 6–76 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . only when the Trip setting is selected.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS maximum measured line current (Imax) to produce a percent slope value. Output relays #1 “R1 TRIP” and #2 “R2 TRIP” do not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected. CT(W2) Default:CT (W1) This setting defines the winding three-phase and ground currents used by the RGF function. Alarm. CT INPUTS Range: CT (W1). The figure below shows the typical wiring between the winding CTs and the 345 CT terminals to assure the correct performance of the protection. and will stay “ON” after the condition clears. Alarm. the algorithm checks if the ground current measured by the relay satisfies the selected GND CURRENT SUPERVISION LEVEL. If Latched Alarm is selected as a function. Transformer Winding IA IB IC Rg IG Ig E5 D5 Ia E6 D6 Ib E7 D7 Ic E8 D8 Ig Winding 1 Current Inputs . The restricted earth fault protection is also available for delta windings with in-zone grounding transformer. In this mode the “ALARM” LED does not turn on. and may jeopardize the security of the RGF protection. The RGF protection works without the supervision as well. or Trip setting enables the Restricted Ground Fault function. Latched Alarm. When the GND CURRENT SUPERVISION setting is selected as “Enabled”.CT (W1) E9 D9 Ia E10 D10 Ib E11 D11 Ic E12 D12 Ig Winding 2 Current Inputs . and the RGF protection is operational. Output relays #1 “R1 TRIP” and #2 “R2 TRIP” will operate. The slope setting allows the user to determine the sensitivity of the element based on the class and quality of the CTs used. that may result into spurious neutral current. PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 PROTECTION GROUP 1(2) > RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 1(2) RGF FUNCTION Range: Disabled.CT (W2) The 345 RGF protection includes ground current supervision mechanism o provide more security during external non-ground faults associated with CT saturation. Trip Default: Disabled The selection of Latched Alarm. the “ALARM” LED will flash and turn off after the condition clears. the “ALARM” LED will flash during the operating condition. until a Reset command is initiated. and the Restricted Ground Fault protection is operational. or for Delta corner grounded windings.

or all.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION RGF PICKUP Range: 0. delayed clearance of such a fault is not a high concern. Alarm. Since RGF protection is intended to detect small ground fault currents. On the other hand delayed RGF operation due to a spurious ground differential current caused by an out-of-zone fault can be used as a backup for downstream protections should they fail to clear the fault. The setting is presented in times ground CT primary. The ground current level is monitored if the setting is set to “Enabled”.00 to 600. Operate Default: Do Not Operate Any. OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do Not Operate.30 s The RGF pickup time delay setting defines the time required for the RGF element to operate after it has picked up. If set to “Disabled”.02 to 20 x CT (W1) in steps of 0. or during transformer energization.10 x CTg (W1) This setting defines the level of measured ground current above which operation of the RGF protection is allowed. or Trip function is selected.01 Default: 0. This time delay will override the spurious ground differential current condition caused by CT saturation due to external non-ground faults.01 Default: 0. GND CURRENT SPVSN Range: Disabled.00 S in steps of 0. the RGF function will work without ground current supervision.10 x CT (W1) This setting defines the minimum pickup level of the ground differential current required for operation. RGF SLOPE Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1% Default: 0% This setting defines the slope as the ratio between the ground differential current and the maximum line current (ground restraining current) in percentages. The pickup value is expressed in times phase CT primary rating. See the RGF Logic diagram.02 to 10. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm.00 x CTg (W1) in steps of 0. GND SUPV LEVEL Range: 0.01 Default: 0. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–77 . The measured ground current is compared to the setting only if the GND CURRENT SUPERVISION setting is set to “Enabled”. of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon restricted ground fault protection operation. The RGF element will operate if the actual ground differential/restraint ratio is greater than the slope and the ground differential current is greater than the RGF pickup setting. RGF DELAY Range: 0. Enabled Default: Disabled This setting enables or disables the ground current supervision of the RGF function.

is a concern.maximum ground fault current To detect a ground fault on the Wye winding at 15% distance from the neutral point.16kV/(10 ohms *√3) = 240A . Contact Input 1 to 10.16kV Wye winding is: Irated = 5MVA/(4.8kV/4.16kV*√3) = 693 A Slope setting. the Restricted Ground Fault function will be blocked. Remote Input 1 to 32. Example:Transformer: 5MVA.Contact input. so that the winding rated load can be used as a reference in defining the RGF slope setting.16kV. % = (36 A/693A)*100 = 5. Virtual Input1 to 32. Select 5% if the transformer is expected to run most of the time at full load.1 %. If most of the time the transformer runs at lower than the nominal loads. or Remote Input . The rated load for 4. Virtual Input. the relay shall detect ground differential current of: Igd = (15x240)/100 = 36 A/800 = 0. 6–78 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . 13. the slope setting can be set to higher value: @ 70% load the slope setting would be: (36 / 485 A)*100 = 7% @ 50% load the slope setting would be: (36 / 346 A)*100 = 10% \ @ 30% load the slope setting would be: (36 / 208 A)*100 = 17% The ground current supervision feature and/or the RGF pickup time delay can be used if CT saturation due to heavy external faults. D/Yg1 type Rg = 10 ohms Phase CTs: 800:5 Ground CT: 300:5 Ifgnd (max) = 4. Logic Elements1 to 16 Default: Off Three blocking inputs are provided in the Restricted Ground Fault menu.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS BLOCK 1/2/3 Range: Off. When any of the selected blocking inputs .is turned on.045 x CT – PKP setting for the RGF protection The transformer loading will be almost unaffected for ground faults close to the winding neutral.

Enabled = 1 GND CURRENT SUPV: SETPOINT Igd = I 3I0 + Ig I Imax = max (Ia.cdr OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 3 SETPOINT: TRIP (To Breaker Failure) Operate Output Relay 2 (W2 BKR TRIP) Message and Event Recorder LED: TRIP R LATCH S OR BLOCK 1: Trip Alarm Latched Alarm AND Disabled = 0 RGF FUNCTION: SETPOINT Command RESET CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION Figure 24: Restricted Earth Fault Protection logic diagram AND AND OR AND OR 6–79 .Ib.Ic) AND W1(2) Phase B current (Ib) W1(2) Phase A current (Ia) Winding Phase Currents Off = 0 BLOCK 3: Off = 0 BLOCK 2: RUN RGF SLOPE: RGF PICKUP: SETPOINT SETPOINT tPKP RGF PKP Message and Event Recorder: LED: PICKUP 0 RGF PKP TIME DELAY: AND Off = 0 Operate Output Relay 1 (W1 BKR TRIP) RGF OP LED: ALARM Operate output relays upon selection 897806.345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL SETPOINT W1(2) Ground current (Ig) Winding Ground Current W1(2) Phase C current (Ic) OR In = 3I0 Ig > LEVEL (x CT1) GND CURNT SPV LEVEL Disabled = 0.

When the thermal capacity exceeds the alarm level. When the thermal capacity exceeds the trip level. For instructions on how to use the keypad. The heating time constant is used when the squared load/pickup ratio is greater than the thermal capacity θ(t-1) estimated in the previous time step. Otherwise the formula uses the cooling time constant. Loads exceeding the transformer load ratings over certain period of time. At the same time the thermal capacity will start to increase at a rate depending on the current amplitude and the prior loading condition of the transformer. and the transformer heating and cooling time constants. The relay uses the transformer thermal time characteristic based on current squared and integrated over time. NOTE: NOTE 6–80 The following path is available using the keypad. 12 Where: θ(t) = Cable thermal capacity (%) at time t θ(t-1) = Cable thermal capacity (%) at time t-1 Δt/τ = Time step Δt divided by the heating/cooling time constant τ I2 = (Iphase/Ipickup )2 = Squared ratio between the actual load current and the pickup setting τ = Heating and cooling time constant (usually provided by the manufacturer). and in return may lead to short circuit conditions. the element will generate a trip signal.Working with the Keypad. As per the formula below. The measured Winding 1 phase currents are used as inputs by the Transformer Thermal protection for detection of overload (overheating) conditions. Where: TTRIP = Time to trip in seconds θ2 = 1 = Trip thermal state set to 100% τ = Heating and cooling time constant. hence the generated heat is directly proportional to the square of the flowing winding currents (I2 ). The time to trip will start timing out once the level of the computed thermal capacity (%) becomes higher than 100% thermal capacity (θ =1 ). and the 49 element picks up. I2= Squared ratio of the actual phase current and the pickup setting. please refer to Chapter 3 . The heating of the transformer is mostly of resistive type (I2R). and can prevent unnecessary tripping. the operate time (time to trip) is determined from when the element picks up until it trips. The relay will continuously calculate the transformer thermal capacity as a percentage of the total thermal capacity as follows: Eq.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Transformer thermal protection The 345 relay provides one transformer thermal overload protection. and depends on both the measured load over time. PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > THERMAL MODEL 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . The thermal model alarm can be used as a warning for the start of dangerous overloading conditions. The time to trip is estimated when the load current exceeds the PKP setting. The trip flag will drop out when the thermal capacity falls below 97% of the pickup level. the element will generate an alarm signal. usually provided by the manufacturer. can degrade the insulation.

and the accumulated thermal capacity for any of the phases is over 100%.1% Default: 80.0 min The Winding 1 heating time constant is used to compute the thermal capacity when the thermal capacity at each time step is greater than the one computed in the previous time step.0 min in steps of 0.1 min Default: 6. The transformer winding heating constant is usually provided by the manufacturer.05 to 20.01 x τH Default: 1.0% This setting sets the alarm level for the accumulated thermal capacity above which the element generates an alarm. Alarm or Trip. COOL TIME CONSTANT (τC) Range: 1. The “ALARM” LED will turn off when the thermal capacity value of all phases is below 97% of the Transformer Thermal Alarm setting.00 x τH in steps of 0. The range for this setting is given as multiples of the Heating Time Constant setting. and will stay on even after the thermal capacity for all phases drops below 97% of the Transformer Thermal Alarm setting.00 x τH The cooling time constant is used to compute the thermal capacity when the thermal capacity at any time step is smaller than the one computed in the previous time step. Latched Alarm. Any of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate when the Thermal function is selected as Latched Alarm. Trip.01 x CT(W1) Default: 1. If Latched Alarm is selected as the function.00 to 6.0 to 110. THERMAL MDL PKP Range: 0. HEAT TIME CONSTANT (τH) Range: 3.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION THERMAL MDL FUNC Range: Disabled. The thermal capacity is displayed on the relay even if the Thermal Model Function is set to “Disabled”.0 to 600. The “ALARM” LED will turn on if the thermal capacity for any phase is over the Transformer Thermal Alarm setting.00 x CT(W1) This setting sets the level of phase current above which the thermal model starts timing out the time-to-trip per the logarithmic formula above. The LED can be reset upon initiation of the "Reset" command. regardless of whether Alarm.00 x CT(W1) in steps of 0. the “ALARM” LED will flash when the thermal capacity on any phase is over the Transformer Thermal Alarm setting. NOTE: NOTE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–81 . Latched Alarm or Trip is selected as the function. THERMAL MDL ALARM Range: 1. Alarm Default: Disabled The output relays #1 “TRIP W1 BKR” and #2 “TRIP W2 BKR” will operate only if the Trip function is selected.0% in steps of 0.

% Thermal Capacity ph B.6–82 Phase C current (IC) Phase B current (IB) XFMR THERMAL Thermal Capacity ph C. % Thermal Capacity ph A. 897815. % ACTUAL VALUES TTRIP (ph C) TTRIP (ph B) TTRIP (ph A) OR Phase A current (IA) RUN XFMR COOLING CONS .cdr Ph C Thermal OP Ph B Thermal OP Ph A Thermal OP Xfmr Thermal OP Message and Event Recorder Ph C Thermal Alarm Ph B Thermal Alarm Ph A Thermal Alarm Xfmr Thermal Alarm Message and Event Recorder AND Phase Currents Off = 0 BLOCK 3 OR Off = 0 BLOCK 2 XFMR HEATING CONST XFMR THERMAL PKP q > q ALARM AND Off = 0 SETPOINT SETPOINTS SETPOINT XFMR THERMAL ALARM R S LED: ALARM OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 3 SETPOINT TRIP (To Breaker Failure) Operate #2 Trip (TRIP W2 BKR) Operate #1 Trip (TRIP W1 BKR) Operate output relays upon selection LED: TRIP LATCH OR BLOCK 1 Trip Alarm Latched Alarm AND Disabled = 0 XFMR THERMAL FUNC SETPOINT RESET Command S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Figure 25: Transformer Thermal Protection logic diagram OR AND OR 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

3400 –0.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Phase timed overcurrent protection S3 PROTECTION TIME OVERCURRENT CURVE CHARACTERISTICS The 345 relay has two setpoint groups. A.90 curve classifications for extremely. The programming of these elements is identical: PKP. B.0505 ANSI Normally Inverse 0.2840 4.0615 0.3000 –4. I = input current. very.5000 3.7222 ANSI Very Inverse 0. The ANSI curves are derived from the following formula: Eq. normally. or Definite time.1735 0. ANSI Curves The ANSI time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the ANSI C37.0094 0. two ground time overcurrent 51G(2). 13 where:T = trip time (seconds). IAC curves. M = multiplier value. two neutral time overcurrent 51N(2).0399 0. The curve shape can be either a standard curve selected from a range of standard ANSI.0274 2. E = constants Table 5: ANSI Curve Constants ANSI Curve Shape A B C D E ANSI Extremely Inverse 0.2614 0. Ipu = pickup current setpoint. and Time Dial Multiplier (TDM). When ordering the relay the user can select each group to have two phase time overcurrent 51P(2). IEC.1899 9.7989 0. C. and two negative sequence time overcurrent 51_2(2) elements. D.0800 0.2294 0.1272 ANSI Moderately Inverse 0.6791 0.8000 –0. and moderately inverse. Inverse Curve selection.1271 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–83 .

020 2.956 2.680 0.247 0.432 0.842 17.520 0.393 6.281 0.0 4.602 4.872 0.340 0.256 0.883 0.252 2.260 0.445 3.284 1.951 3.377 0.371 0.479 8.563 0.0 4.332 0.888 1. 14 where: T = trip time (seconds). the relay offers the four standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142.583 6.379 0.680 2.457 ANSI Normally Inverse 0.955 0.254 2.596 0.982 0.866 2.510 1.030 1.764 0.110 0.360 1.0 6.650 1.0 8.0 42.776 3.0 3. E = constants.736 0.622 1.0 13.594 3.325 0. IEC Curve B.133 1.972 10.134 1.166 0.955 5.004 6.324 3.274 14.255 0.128 0.226 2.604 0.533 0.378 1.021 0.474 1.055 0.766 0.503 0.019 2.594 4.208 1.146 2.082 0.0 10.675 0.559 1. K.009 17.658 0.054 2.341 13.513 0.191 0.742 0.5 2.137 7.0 2.295 2.094 0.007 13.478 0.156 0.208 1.192 1.0 9.562 1.0 5.904 6.544 2.106 4.754 0.163 1.495 0.149 0.0 4.002 3.625 0.267 0. The formulae for these curves are: Eq.016 2.268 2.133 2.125 6.532 1.251 0.051 1.937 0. I = input current.341 0.531 1.0 6.302 0.297 1.990 0.0 18.368 0.165 10.066 1.0 32.067 1.006 0.073 1.568 3.700 1.151 0.043 1.172 0.807 6.600 1.062 3.142 0.239 0.638 1.126 0.812 1.113 1.127 4.786 10.302 0.412 2.489 1.031 4.268 0.000 0.073 10.319 0.539 5.944 1.821 3.977 2.135 0.567 0.666 2.730 2.221 2.805 7.967 1.040 0.208 1.0 7.049 1.443 6.246 0. These are defined as IEC Curve A.252 5.491 1.527 1.291 4.757 0.330 0.196 4.0 40.0 17.589 8.126 1.599 2.541 0.189 0.0 25.808 10.705 10.458 2.416 2.001 1.301 2.509 7.537 0.5 2.356 8.344 0.0 ANSI Extremely Inverse 0.979 1.483 1.124 0.986 6.878 0.113 0.0 5.260 ANSI Moderately Inverse 0.378 0.537 5.148 1.452 4.994 1.329 1. M = multiplier setpoint.0 3.465 IEC Curves For European applications.298 0.275 2.075 0.755 0.076 2.102 3.508 1.864 0.291 1.492 0.0 1.0 12.270 0.439 0.068 3.093 0.704 2.098 2.257 1.123 1.185 0.063 0.656 7.079 1.689 0.170 0.854 1.407 0.161 1.369 3.554 2.382 0.441 2.729 1.5 1.466 3. 6–84 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .702 1. IEC Curve C.0 16.659 0.059 3.484 1.754 0.663 0.627 1.0 8.184 0.351 0.025 0.756 2.689 1.475 1.074 0.0 8.0 24.216 0.247 2.511 0.814 0.312 0.682 0.365 1.5 2.250 1.472 0.404 3.815 2.020 0.097 0.203 0.515 0.219 0.0 8.005 10.493 4.171 0.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Table 6: ANSI Curve Trip Times (in seconds) Multiplier (TDM) Current (I/Ipickup) 1.078 0.123 0.744 0.133 0.0 25.910 1.604 0.0 34.108 0.665 0.574 4.130 0.141 0.524 3.894 0.047 1.085 0. and Short Inverse.874 ANSI Very Inverse 8.659 2.812 1.0 10.983 0.151 0. Ipu = pickup current setpoint.5 0.818 3.0 31.415 2.

620 1.000 IEC Short Inverse 0.333 8.415 1.600 0.207 0.023 5.600 10.20 12.315 0.056 0.194 10.971 0.088 0.200 2.084 0.114 0.353 0.500 1.702 0.167 0.996 0.031 0.500 3.526 0.371 1.350 1.60 38.350 0.297 0.40 10.533 0.000 5.400 2.700 1.200 1.637 2.346 0.162 0.0 5.706 0.675 0.150 0.058 1.254 0.050 0.752 0.659 0.223 0.0 3.771 0.60 1.109 0.067 0.900 0.450 0.176 0.900 0.306 0.980 4.860 0.400 2.800 1.538 0.029 0.400 0.675 0.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION Table 7: IEC (BS) Inverse Time Curve Constants IEC (BS) Curve Shape K E IEC Curve A (BS142) 0.231 0.05 3.878 4.117 1.333 3.623 0.618 0.333 0.461 0.457 0.439 2.200 1.890 0.500 0.700 2.319 1.113 0.80 51.700 2.000 1.10 6.100 0.000 2.133 1.782 0.067 0.269 0.500 6.675 0.376 1.153 0.493 2.301 0.214 0.762 0.900 0.040 0.10 1.673 0.178 0.247 1.000 0.350 1.668 0.333 1.188 0.445 0.312 0.877 0.067 0.00 17.083 0.017 3.00 27.333 2.835 1.218 0.333 2.20 3.351 0.05 0.0 6.193 0.767 0.837 3.000 13.576 0.992 1.034 0.116 2. 15 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–85 .870 1.286 1.081 0.755 8.800 5.160 1.302 4.543 1.127 0.150 0.016 0.630 0.667 10.424 3.050 2.157 1.600 10.140 0.013 0.384 0.667 1.594 0.267 0.00 3.914 0.535 1.225 0.10 2.667 1.375 2.054 0.508 0.052 0.0 7.400 16.0 8.667 0.156 0.003 0.494 0.250 1.038 0.600 0.667 4.80 2.317 6.485 0.568 2.60 16.80 13.229 0.333 0.104 0.044 0.040 Table 8: IEC Curve Trip Times (in seconds) Multiplier (TDM) Current (I/Ipickup) 1.029 6.333 0.200 0.113 0.165 0.297 3.856 0.20 5.075 0.270 1.0 0.302 2.450 0.260 0.60 10.05 0.451 0.075 0.338 0.111 0.612 0.521 1.000 0.135 0.498 0.149 0.40 6.350 0.223 0.0 9.719 1.808 0.929 1.435 0.600 2.070 2.012 2.984 3.338 0.175 0.000 0.225 0.750 4.330 0.688 1.000 IEC Curve C (BS142) 80.135 0.270 0.350 0.026 0.829 1.544 0.411 1.042 3.800 5.528 3.000 6.050 0.200 21.800 0.80 21.712 1.027 0.800 1.404 0.711 0.700 1.10 0.000 4.100 4.988 2.428 0.200 8.169 0.602 0.311 0.000 2.822 2.667 1.096 0.800 5.169 0.000 26.500 0.675 0.778 1.40 1.062 0.192 0.518 IEC Curve A IEC Curve B IEC Curve C IEC Short Time IAC Curves The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae: Eq.423 0.025 1.124 0.0 4.20 0.249 0.300 0.089 0.356 0.063 0.00 64.323 0.700 2.386 0.247 0.05 1.333 0.781 2.501 0.115 0.667 0.978 1.000 1.080 0.0 10.058 0.446 1.350 1.020 IEC Curve B (BS142) 13.700 1.40 25.338 0.327 0.5 2.000 3.267 2.006 1.400 3.646 1.400 2.167 0.280 3.540 0.371 0.

457 2.113 0.878 2.051 0.474 1.698 0.312 0.0 5.2078 0.496 3.552 7.394 10.494 5.424 0.490 0.372 0.747 2.561 2.983 0.699 0.595 0.533 0.100 0.662 6.810 0.202 0.191 0.6379 0.025 1.0 1.862 1.227 0.117 1.027 0.200 0.221 0.025 1.375 0.061 1.210 0.7872 0.320 0.101 0.143 0.0 1.745 0.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS where: T = trip time (seconds).093 0.121 5.155 0.348 1.379 0.353 2.186 0.491 0.398 1.123 0.796 2.0 6.0 0.5 0.6200 –0.349 0.174 0.487 1.337 0.6200 1.072 0.172 0.605 5.0 20.409 0.228 0.083 1.843 1.511 0.654 0.035 0.138 2.359 1.145 0.741 10.209 10.022 1.0 8.872 3.266 0.060 0.149 0.991 0.0 7.074 0.307 0.569 0.0010 0.341 0.997 2.229 1.047 0.969 0. I = input current.0 13.178 0.901 1.026 0.401 0.026 0.419 0.781 8.298 0.997 1.569 1.695 2.0900 0.160 0.0609 0.966 1. Ipu = pickup current setpoint.0 4.269 0.495 0.490 1.102 0.114 0.434 2.591 5.0 27.434 0.422 0.983 6.0 3.493 IAC Very Inverse IAC Inverse IAC Short Inverse PHASE TIMED OVERCURRENT PROTECTION The SR345 relay has two Phase Time Overcurrent elements per protection group.061 0.374 3.0040 0.046 1.186 0.813 1.106 0.784 0.168 0.054 0.108 0. A to E = constants.0221 Table 10: IAC Curve Trip Times Multiplier (TDM) 1.025 0.239 1. Table 9: GE Type IAC Inverse Curve Constants IAC Curve Shape A B C D E IAC Extreme Inverse 0.844 1.301 0.640 0.0 29.204 0.621 2.165 2.246 0.537 0.0 1.995 4.7955 0.1947 IAC Short Inverse 0.635 2.426 3.369 3.075 0.148 1.0 4.087 0.555 2.049 2.372 0.5 2.0 10.266 0.656 0.099 4.360 0.248 0.578 0.5 1.370 6.498 0.242 5.663 2.859 1.286 0.387 8.636 0.093 2.556 8.266 2.395 1.499 1.606 0.0 6.992 8.192 2.123 0.1000 –1. There is no intentional “dead band” where the current is above 6–86 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .225 2.848 0.245 0.743 0.922 3.419 0.280 1.093 0.297 2.0 6.0 IAC Extremely Inverse 0.212 0.501 0.323 10.201 3.0 5.050 0.124 0.931 4.906 0.299 2.497 4.356 0.065 0.885 0.307 0.9586 IAC Inverse 0.215 1.674 0.314 0.488 1.719 0. The settings of this function are applied to each of the three phases to produce phase overcurrent trip or pickup.375 10.439 1.183 11.0 3.453 0.325 0.451 0.057 0.343 0.687 0.5 0.310 1.990 3.150 1.744 0.095 0.8000 –0.128 1.0 2.374 1.140 0.0 2.594 4.407 7.0 0.031 0.431 0.744 1.542 0.620 1.0 0.613 0.303 0.2461 IAC Very Inverse 0.158 2.893 0.457 1.188 6.699 0.532 0.154 0.046 0.072 2.279 0.0428 0.749 0.598 1.012 13.749 0.212 0.979 14.028 0.190 0.062 0.423 1.559 0.105 0.053 0.115 0.0 33.133 1.256 3.331 4.524 0.926 0.541 3.859 0.711 0.185 4.759 0.217 0.058 3.8630 0.770 1.196 0.2885 7.052 0.569 0.368 0.248 2.846 2.0 0.070 0.133 0.5 1.0 11.197 6.443 0.4180 0.597 3. M = multiplier setpoint.296 8.614 0.405 0.455 0.180 0.656 2.064 0.131 1.948 0.802 2.987 4.921 1.993 2.0 11.320 4.0 17.0 23.0 9.392 0.624 1.0 9.573 0.

of 2. the relay will use the CT ratings associated with transformer Winding 2. Until the reset command is initiated. Alarm. PHASE CT INPUTS Range: CT(W1). The output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected. CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) The Phase Timed Overcurrent menu provides the selection of either CT(W1) input currents or CT(W2) currents. Alarm. the operation of the element will not occur before an elapsed time after pickup.01 x CT Default: 1.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current. IEC Curve A/B/C and Short Inverse. PH TOC1(2) PKP Range: 0. Trip Default: Disabled The selection of the Latched Alarm. the time for TOC operation is defined only by the TDM setting. when the operating condition clears. a PKP setting of 0. For example the operating time for TOC set to Definite Time and a TDM set to 5 will result in 5*0.1 s. multiplied by the selected TD multiplier.00 in steps of 0. and will stay “ON” after the operation clears. the PH TOC element will use the ratings of the Winding 1 CTs entered on the relay under SYSTEM SETUP/S2 CURRENT SENSING.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION the pickup level. or Trip setting enables the Phase TOC function. PH TOC1(2) CURVE Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse.Working with the Keypad. IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short Default: Extremely Inverse This setting sets the shape of the selected inverse curve. For example. and adding approximately 8 to 10 ms output relay time. The following path is available using the keypad. The selection of Definite Time has a base time delay of 0. The “ALARM” LED will not turn on if the TOC operates when set to the function Trip. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–87 . and the fault current was 5 times bigger than the PKP level. Latched Alarm.00 This setting provides the selection for Time Dial Multiplier by which the times from the inverse curve are modified. PHASE TOC1(2) TDM Range: 0. Definite Time. specified as times CT.50 to 20.1 = 0. The output relay #1 "Trip" will operate when the Trip setting is selected. The element drops from pickup without operating if the measured current drops below 97-99% of the pickup value before the time for operation is reached. with the TOC function selected as Alarm. and will self-reset. If the CT(W2) setting is selected. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is selected with TDM = 2. please refer to Chapter 3 . the “ALARM” LED will flash during TOC operation. When Definite Time is selected. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon phase TOC operation.59 seconds. PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > PHASE TOC 1(2) PH TOC1(2) FUNCTION Range: Disabled. if Latched Alarm is selected as a TOC function. The TOC trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current.01 Default: 1.5 s applying the time delay accuracy outlined under the Technical Specification. If CT(W1) is selected. For instructions on how to use the keypad.00 x CT This setting sets the time overcurrent pickup level. The TOC pickup flag is asserted when the current on any phase is above the PKP value. However the pickup accuracy is guaranteed within the current input accuracy of 3% above the set PKP value.00 x CT in steps of 0.04 to 20. and the Phase TOC operates.

characteristic constant (5 for ANSI.Contact input. CR . If Instantaneous reset is selected. E . TDM and points from the inverse curve. Contact Input 1 to 10. The 100% “energy capacity” for the TOC element is defined by the selection of PKP. or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate. The output relays are operational only if the OC function is selected as Trip. IAC. Remote Input 1 to 32. A memory variable based on actual values currents is monitored for accumulation of energy capacity. Operate Default: Do not operate The menu for the two trip output relays . 6–88 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do not operate.RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR . and if it goes below 97-99% of this level. 16 where: TRESET . The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether Latched Alarm. or Logic Element . the phase TOC element will reset instantaneously providing the current drops below 97-99% of the Phase TOC PKP level before the time for operation is reached.turns on. the element will tend to reset. the element operates. OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do not operate.curve multiplier. Remote Input. NOTE: NOTE The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC menu regardless of the selected OC function. Linear Default: Instantaneous This setting provides for the selection of an Instantaneous or Linear reset time. the phase TOC function will be blocked.reset time in seconds. where if it reaches a level of 100% of the set energy capacity level. Virtual Input. M . User Curve and FlexcurvesTM. Logic Elements 1 to 16 Default: Off Three blocking inputs are provided in the Phase TOC menu. Definite Time. When any of the selected blocking inputs . One or both trip output relays can be selected to operate upon Phase TOC operation. or Trip function is selected.energy capacity reached (per unit). BLOCK 1/2/3 Range: Off.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS PH TOC1(2) RESET Range: Instantaneous. The accumulated energy capacity is used as an input for computation of the reset time when the “Linear” reset is selected as a setting.is available only if the Trip setting is selected as the function for the Phase Timed Overcurrent element. When Linear reset is selected. Alarm. These output relays will not operate if either Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function. Virtual Input 1 to 32. 8 for IEC curves). regardless of the Operate/ Do Not Operate value selected. upon phase TOC operation. Operate Default: Do not operate Any. the time to reset is calculated based on the following linear equation: Eq.

cdr OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 3 SETPOINTS: To Breaker Failure Trip OR BLOCK 1: Trip Alarm Latched Alarm AND PH TOC FUNCTION: RESET Command CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION Figure 26: Phase Time Overcurrent Protection logic diagram OR AND OR OR 6–89 .SETPOINT Disabled = 0 SETPOINTS 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Phase C current (IC) Phase B current (IB) Phase A current (IA) IC > PICKUP IB > PICKUP IA > PICKUP PH TOC PH C PKP PH TOC PH B PKP PH TOC PH A PKP PH TOC PKP Message and Event Recorder LED: PICKUP PH TOC OP PH TOC PH C OP PH TOC PH B OP PH TOC PH A OP Message and Event Recorder OR RUN RUN RUN PH TOC RESET TIME: PH TOC TDM: PH TOC CURVE: PH TOC PICKUP: AND CT(W1) CT(W2) phase currents selected under PH TOC INPUT setpoint Off = 0 BLOCK 3: Off = 0 BLOCK 2: Off = 0 SETPOINTS AND PH TOC INPUT: R LED: TRIP LATCH S Operate trip output relays upon selection RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR SETPOINTS (configurable only if “TRIP” function selected) LED: ALARM Operate output relays upon selection 897808.

is available only if the Trip setting is selected as the function for the Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent element. Trip Default: Disabled The selection of the Latched Alarm. and Phase IOC2 per protection group.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current. PH CT INPUTS Range: CT(W1). Operate Default: Do not operate The menu for the two trip output relays .Phase IOC1. if Latched Alarm is selected. the “ALARM” LED will flash during IOC operation.01 x CT Default: 1. regardless of the Operate/ Do Not Operate value selected. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Each of them consists of three separate instantaneous overcurrent relays. CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) The Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent menu provides a selection for either CT(W1) input currents or CT(W2) currents. NOTE: NOTE 6–90 The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC menu regardless of the selected OC function.00 sec in steps of 0.00 x CT This setting sets the instantaneous overcurrent pickup level. For example. PH IOC1(2) PKP Range: 0.01 sec Default: 0. The following path is available using the keypad. or Trip setting enables the Phase IOC function. one per phase. RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do not operate. For instructions on how to use the keypad.RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR .00 to 300. Alarm. with identical settings.Working with the Keypad. please refer to Chapter 3 . Alarm.00 x CT in steps of 0. The output relays are operational only if the OC function is selected as Trip. If the CT(W2) setting is selected. . PH IOC1(2) DELAY Range: 0. Latched Alarm. The “ALARM” LED will not turn on if the IOC is operational when set to the Trip function. will self-reset when the operation clears. Output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm function is selected. One or both trip output relays can be selected to operate upon Phase IOC operation. and will stay “ON” after the operation clears.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Phase instantaneous overcurrent protection The 345 relay has two identical instantaneous overcurrent protections . If CT(W1) is selected. These output relays will not operate if either Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function. the PH IOC element will use the ratings of the Winding 1 CTs entered on the relay under SYSTEM SETUP/S2 CURRENT SENSING. Until the Reset command is initiated.00 sec This setting provides selection for the time delay used to delay the protection operation. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon phase IOC operation. and with the IOC function selected as Alarm. PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > S3 PHASE IOC1(2) PH IOC1(2) FUNCTION Range: Disabled. the relay will use the CT ratings associated with transformer Winding 2.05 to 20. and the Phase IOC is operational. a PKP setting of 0. The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate when the Trip setting is selected.

Virtual Input 1 to 32. Alarm.is turned on. Virtual Input. or Trip function is selected. Logic Elements 1 to 16 Default: Off Three blocking inputs are provided in the Phase IOC menu. Relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm. or Logic Element . Remote Input 1 to 32.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do not operate. Operate Default: Do not operate Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon phase IOC operation. When any one of the selected blocking inputs . Contact Input 1 to 10. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–91 .Contact input. Remote Input. BLOCK 1/2/3 Range: Off. the phase IOC function will be blocked.

CT(W2) phase currents selected under PH TOC INPUT setpoint Off = 0 BLOCK 3: OR Off = 0 BLOCK 2: Off = 0 SETPOINT PH IOC INPUT: AND BLOCK 1: Trip R LATCH S LED: ALARM RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR Operate output relays upon selection 897809.cdr OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 3 SETPOINT To Breaker Failure Trip Operate trip output relays upon selection SETPOINTS (configurable only if “TRIP” function selected) OR Alarm Latched Alarm AND PH IOC FUNCTION: SETPOINT RESET Command S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Figure 27: Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection logic diagram OR AND OR 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .6–92 Disabled = 0 SETPOINT Phase C current (IC) Phase B current (IB) Phase A current (IA) RUN RUN RUN IC > PICKUP IB > PICKUP IA > PICKUP PH IOC PICKUP: SETPOINT tPKP tPKP tPKP PH IOC PKP DELAY: 0 0 0 OR PH IOC C PKP PH IOC B PKP PH IOC A PKP PHASE IOC PKP Message and Event Recorder LED: PICKUP LED: TRIP PH IOC C OP PH IOC B OP PH IOC A OP PHASE IOC OP Message and Event Recorder AND CT(W1).

the time for Ground TOC operation is defined only by the TDM setting.00 x CT SENS. CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) The Ground Timed Over-Current menu provides for the selection for either ground CT of winding 1 . Trip. the “ALARM” LED will flash. the TOC menu allows the user to select the operation of either RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR”. and will stay “ON” after the condition clears. The Definite Time selection has a default time of 0. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–93 . GND TOC1(2) FUNCTION Range: Disabled.000 x CT in steps of 0.000 x CT. if Latched Alarm is selected the “ALARM” LED will flash during the TOC operating condition. when the ground current is above the PKP value. “RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR”. please refer to Chapter 3 . and GND TOC operational. If the relay is ordered with a Sensitive Ground CT. Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate no matter whether the Alarm.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current. GND CT INPUTS Range: CT(W1). If the Trip setting is selected. The Ground TOC trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked-up for the time defined by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current. For example.01 x CT Default: 1. The following path is available using the keypad. PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > GROUND TOC The settings from the menu for Sensitive Ground TOC. With the GND TOC function selected as Alarm . Otherwise.GND TOC1(2) PKP Range: 0.005 to 3. Latched Alarm Default: Disabled The selection of the Alarm. Latched Alarm or Trip setting enables the Ground/Sensitive Ground TOC function.CT(W2). before the time for operation is reached. and will self-reset.Working with the Keypad. will appear only when the relay is ordered with the sensitive ground CT.04 to 20.000 x CT This setting sets the Time Overcurrent pickup level specified in times CT. and a default value of 1.005 to 3. input. when the operating condition clears. If CT(W1) is selected.001 x CT Default: 1. GND TOC1(2) PKP Range: 0. Latched Alarm or Trip setting is selected. with a step of 0. or ground CT of winding 2 . For instructions on how to use the keypad. a PKP setting of 0. the relay will use the ground CT rating associated with transformer Winding 2. The settings of the function are applied to the measured winding ground input current to produce pickup and trip flags.CT(W1).001xCT. Until the reset command is initiated.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION Ground timed overcurrent protection NOTE: NOTE The relay has two Ground Time Overcurrent elements per setpoint group. the GND TOC element will use the ground CT rating of Winding 1 entered on the relay under SYSTEM SETUP/S2 CURRENT SENSING. Alarm.00 x CT in steps of 0. the relay displays the menu for Ground TOC protection. The Ground TOC pickup flag is asserted. When Definite Time is selected. The element drops from pickup without operation if the measured current drops below 97-99% of the pickup value. the range for this setting is 0. or both trip output relays.000 x CT.1s. If CT(W2) setting is selected.

These output relays will not operate if either Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function.characteristic constant (5 for ANSI. Operate Default: Do not operate Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon ground TOC operation. 8 for IEC curves).S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS GND TOC1(2) CURVE Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse.00 This setting provides the selection of the Time Dial Multiplier. or both trip output relays can be selected to operate upon Ground TOC operation. If none of the standard curve shapes is appropriate. 17 where: TRESET . Definite Time. Refer to the User Curve and FlexCurve setup for more details about their configuration and usage. FlexCurve B Default: Extremely Inverse This setting sets the shape of the selected overcurrent inverse curve. Alarm. CR .RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR . Linear Default: Instantaneous This setting provides for the selection of either an Instantaneous or a Linear reset time. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is selected with TDM = 2. and the fault current was 5 times greater than the PKP level. GND TOC1(2) RESET Range: Instantaneous. a custom User curve. the operation of the element will not occur before 2. M . E . RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do not operate.reset time in seconds. Definite Time IEC Curve A/B/ C and Short Inverse IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short User Curve. GND TOC1(2) TDM Range: 0. IAC.59s has elapsed from the time of pickup. When Linear reset is selected. or Trip function is selected. NOTE: NOTE The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC menu regardless of the selected OC function.01 Default: 1. FlexCurve A. The output relays are operational only if the OC function is selected as Trip. Either one. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm. or FlexCurve can be created.50 to 20. the time to reset is calculated based on the following linear equation: Eq. OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do not operate. User Curve and FlexcurvesTM. using which the times from the inverse curve are modified.energy capacity reached (per unit). Operate Default: Do not operate The menu for the two trip output relays . 6–94 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . before the time for operation is reached.00 in steps of 0. If Instantaneous reset is selected. the ground TOC element will reset instantaneously providing the current drops below 97-98% below the Ground TOC PKP level.curve multiplier. regardless of the Operate/ Do Not Operate value selected.is only available if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Ground TOC element.

When any of the selected blocking inputs . 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–95 .Contact input. Virtual Input.turn on. Virtual Input 1 to 32.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION BLOCK 1/2/3 Range: Off. Remote Input. the Phase TOC function is blocked. Contact Input 1 to 10. Logic Element 1 to 16 Default: Off Three blocking inputs are provided in the Ground TOC menu. or Logic Element . Remote Input 1 to 32.

cdr Message and Event Recorder OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 3 SETPOINTS RLY 2 TRIP W2 BKR RLY 1 TRIP W1 BKR SETPOINTS ( configurable only if “TRIP” function selected ) To Breaker Failure Trip Operate output relays upon selection Message and Event Recorder LED: PICKUP AND GND TOC INPUT SETPOINTS LED: TRIP R LATCH S OR BLOCK 1 Trip Latched Alarm Alarm AND GND TOC FUNCTION SETPOINT RESET Command S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Figure 28: Ground/Sensitive Ground Timed Overcurrent Protection logic diagram AND OR OR 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .6–96 Disabled = 0 SETPOINTS Ground/Sens Ground current (Ig) CT(W1) CT(W2) ground current selected under GND TOC INPUT Off = 0 BLOCK 3 Off = 0 BLOCK 2 Off = 0 : : RUN : Ig > PICKUP GND TOC RESET GND TOC TD MULTIPLIER GND TOC CURVE GND TOC PICKUP : : AND GND TOC PKP LED: ALARM Operate trip output relays upon selection GND TOC OP 897810.

For example. when the operating condition clears.Working with the Keypad. if Latched Alarm is selected.01 sec Default: 0. the “ALARM” LED will flash during the IOC operating condition. and will self-reset. With the GND IOC function selected as Alarm . or both. If CT(W2) setting is selected.001 x CT. GND IOC1(2) PKP Range: 0.00 seconds. or sensitive ground current for producing pickup and trip flags. CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) The Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent menu provides for selection of either the ground CT of Winding 1-CT(W1). and will stay “ON” after the condition clears.01 x CT Default: 1. PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > GROUND IOC1(2) GND IOC1(2) FUNCTION Range: Disabled.005 to 3.00 sec This setting provides the selection of the pickup time delay used to delay operation of the protection. with a step of 0. the IOC menu allows the user to select the operation of either one of the two trip output relays “RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR”.05 to 20.000 x CT.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current. please refer to Chapter 3 . and GND IOC operational. For Sens. the range of the setting is from 0. “RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR”.GND IOC1(2) PKP Range: 0. Alarm.00 to 300. The settings of these functions are applied to the measured ground.005 to 3.001 x CT Default: 1. Latched Alarm or Trip setting enables the Ground/Sensitive Ground IOC function.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Ground instantaneous overcurrent protection S3 PROTECTION The relay has two Ground/Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent protections per setpoint group. Trip. The Ground IOC operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by the Ground IOC PKP Delay setting. Latched Alarm Default: Disabled The selection of the Alarm. or the ground CT of Winding 2.00 x CT in steps of 0.CT(W2) input. and a default value of 1. GND IOC1(2) DELAY Range: 0. Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate no matter whether the Alarm.000 x CT. If CT(W1) is selected. The element drops from pickup without operation if the ground current drops below 97 to 99% of the pickup value.000 x CT in steps of 0. For instructions on how to use the keypad. Latched Alarm or Trip setting is selected. the “ALARM” LED will flash. GND CT INPUTS Range: CT(W1). Ground CT. the relay will use the ground CT rating associated with transformer Winding 2.00 sec in steps of 0. If the Trip setting is selected.00 x CT SENS. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–97 . If the pickup time delay is set to 0. The Ground IOC pickup flag is asserted when the ground current is above the PKP value.000 x CT This setting sets the ground overcurrent pickup level specified as times CT. a PKP setting of 0. Until a reset command is initiated. the pickup and operate flags will be asserted at the same time. The following path is available using the keypad. the GND IOC element will use the ground CT rating of Winding 1 entered on the relay under SYSTEM SETUP/S2 CURRENT SENSING.

The output relays are operational only if the OC function is selected as Trip.Contact input. BLOCK 1/2/3 Range: Off. the ground IOC function is blocked. Remote Input 1 to 32. or Logic Element . 6–98 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . or all. regardless of the Operate/ Do Not Operate value selected. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm. Remote Input. NOTE: NOTE The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC menu regardless of the selected OC function. Contact Input 1 to 10. OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do not operate.is available only if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Ground IOC element. Operate Default: Do Not Operate The menu for the two trip output relays .turns on. Alarm.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do Not Operate. Virtual Input 1 to 32. of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon ground IOC operation. When any of the selected blocking inputs . One or both trip output relays can be selected to operate under the operating condition.RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR . These output relays will not operate if either Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function. or Trip function is selected. Operate Default: Do not operate Any. Logic Element 1 to 16 Default: Off Three blocking inputs are provided in the Ground IOC menu. Virtual Input.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Disabled = 0

Ground/Sens. Ground current (Ig)

CT(W1), CT(W2) ground
current selected under
GND TOC CT INPUT

Off = 0

BLOCK 3

Off = 0

BLOCK 2

SETPOINT

RUN
Ig > PICKUP

GND IOC PICKUP

GND IOC CT INPUT
SETPOINT

LED: PICKUP

tPKP

0

GND TOC PKP

Message and Event Recorder

GND IOC PKP DELAY

AND

Off = 0

SETPOINT

LATCH

LED: ALARM

Operate trip
output relays
upon selection

GND TOC OP

Message and Event Recorder

OUTPUT RELAY 6

OUTPUT RELAY 5

OUTPUT RELAY 4

OUTPUT RELAY 3

SETPOINTS:

897811.cdr

RLY 2 TRIP W2 BKR

RLY 1 TRIP W1 BKR

SETPOINTS
( configurable only if “TRIP”
function selected )

To Breaker Failure
Trip

Operate
output relays
upon
selection

LED: TRIP

R

S

OR

BLOCK 1

Trip

Alarm

Latched Alarm

AND

GND IOC FUNCTION

SETPOINT

RESET

Command

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION

Figure 29: Ground/Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection logic
diagram

AND

AND

OR
OR

6–99

S3 PROTECTION

Neutral timed
overcurrent
protection

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

The relay has two Neutral Time Overcurrent elements per setpoint group. The settings of
this function are applied to the calculated neutral current to produce pickup and trip flags.
The Neutral TOC pickup flag is asserted when the neutral current is above the PKP value.
The Neutral TOC trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by
the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current. The element drops from
pickup without operating if the neutral current drops below 97-99% of the pickup value,
before the time for operation is reached. When Definite Time is selected, the time for
Neutral TOC operation is defined only by the TDM setting.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > S3 NEUTRAL TOC1(2)
NTRL TOC1(2) FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Alarm, Latched Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Neutral IOC
function. With the NTRL IOC function selected as Alarm , and NTRL IOC operational, the
“ALARM” LED will flash, and will self-reset, when the operating condition clears. Until the
reset command is initiated, if Latched Alarm is selected, the “ALARM” LED will flash
during the IOC operating condition, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears. If the
Trip setting is selected, the IOC menu allows the user to select the operation of either
one of the two trip output relays “RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR”, “RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR”, or both. Any or
all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate no matter whether Alarm,
Latched Alarm or Trip setting is selected.
NTRL CT INPUTS
Range: CT(W1), CT(W2)
Default: CT(W1)
The menu of the Neutral Time OverCurrent element provides for selection of either CT
(W1), or CT(W2) input currents. If CT(W1) is selected, the NTRL TOC element will use the
neutral current computed by the relay based on Winding 1 phase currents and the
Winding 1 CT ratings. If CT(W2) setting is selected, the NTRL TOC element will use the
computed neutral current from Winding 2 phase currents and Winding 2 CT ratings.
NTRL TOC1(2) PKP
Range: 0.04 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the time overcurrent pickup level specified as times CT. For example, a
PKP setting of 0.9 x CT(W1) with CT(W1) rating of 300:5 translates into 270A primary
current.
NTRL TOC1(2) CURVE
Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse Definite Time IEC Curve A/B/C
and Short Inverse IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short
Default: Extremely Inverse
This setting sets the shape of the selected overcurrent inverse curve.
NTRL TOC1(2) TDM
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
This setting provides for selection of the Time Dial Multiplier by which the times from the
selected inverse curve are modified. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is
selected with TDM = 2, and the fault current was 5 times bigger than the PKP level,
operation of the element will not occur before 2.59s have elapsed from pickup.

6–100

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

S3 PROTECTION

NTRL TOC1(2) RESET
Range: Instantaneous, Linear
Default: Instantaneous
Selection of an Instantaneous or Linear reset time is provided using this setting. If
Instantaneous reset is selected, the Neutral TOC element will reset instantaneously
providing the current drops below 97-99% below the Neutral TOC PKP level before the
time for operation is reached. When Linear reset is selected, the time to reset is
calculated based on the following linear equation:
Eq. 18

where:
TRESET - reset time in seconds;
E - energy capacity reached (per unit);
M - curve multiplier;
CR - characteristic constant (5 for ANSI, IAC, Definite Time.
The 100% “energy capacity” for the TOC element is defined by the selection of PKP, TDM
and the points from the inverse curve. A memory variable based on actual values
currents is monitored for accumulation of energy capacity, where if it reaches a level of
100% of the set energy capacity level, the element operates, and if it goes below 97-99%
of this level, will tend to reset. The accumulated energy capacity is used as an input for
computation of the reset time when “Linear” reset is selected as a setting.
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate
The menu for the two trip output relays - RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR - is
available only if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Neutral Timed
Overcurrent element. One or both trip output relays can be selected to operate upon
Neutral TOC operation.
NOTE:

NOTE

The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC
menu regardless of the selected OC function. These output relays will not operate if
either Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function, regardless of the Operate/
Do Not Operate value selected. The output relays are operational only if the OC function
is selected as Trip.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any, or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate, upon Neutral TOC
operation. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the
Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip function is selected.
BLOCK 1/2/3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
There are three independent blocking inputs in the Neutral TOC menu. The function is
blocked if any of the three blocking inputs is detected “high”. The selection of a block
input includes Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6–101

6–102

Disabled = 0

SETPOINTS

Neutral current (IN)

CT(W2), CT(W2)
neutral current
computed by the relay

Off = 0

BLOCK 3

Off = 0

BLOCK 2

Off = 0
RUN
IN > PICKUP

NTRL TOC RESET

NTRL TOC TDM

NTRL TOC CURVE

NTRL TOC PICKUP

LED: PICKUP

AND

NTRL TOC CT INPUT

SETPOINTS

AND

NTRL TOC PKP

Message and Event Recorder

LATCH

Operate trip
output relays
upon selection

Message and Event Recorder

OUTPUT RELAY 6

OUTPUT RELAY 5

OUTPUT RELAY 4

OUTPUT RELAY 3

SETPOINTS:

NTRL TOC OP

LED: ALARM

897812.cdr

RLY 2 TRIP W2 BKR

RLY 1 TRIP W1 BKR

SETPOINTS
(configurable only if “TRIP”
function selected)

To Breaker Failure
Trip

Operate
output relays
upon
selection

LED: TRIP

R

S

OR

BLOCK 1

Trip

Latched Alarm

Alarm

AND

NTRL TOC FUNCTION

SETPOINT

RESET

Command

S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Figure 30: Neutral Timed Overcurrent Protection logic diagram

AND

OR
OR

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

S3 PROTECTION

Neutral
instantaneous
overcurrent
protection

The relay has two Instantaneous Overcurrent elements per setpoint group. The settings of
this function are applied to the calculated neutral current to produce pickup and trip flags.
The Neutral IOC pickup flag is asserted when the neutral current is above the PKP value.
The Neutral IOC operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined
by the Neutral IOC Delay setting. If the pickup time delay is set to 0.00 seconds, the pickup
and operate flags will be asserted at the same time. The element drops from pickup
without operation if the neutral current drops below 97-99% of the pickup value.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1 (2) > S3 NEUTRAL IOC1(2)
NTRL IOC1(2) FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Alarm, Latched Alarm or Trip setting enables the Neutral IOC
function. With the NTRL IOC function selected as Alarm , and NTRL IOC operational, the
“ALARM” LED will flash, and will self-reset, when the operating condition clears. Until the
reset command is initiated, if Latched Alarm is selected, the “ALARM” LED will flash
during IOC operation, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears. If the Trip setting is
selected, the IOC menu allows the user to select the operation of either one of the two
trip output relays “RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR”, “RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR”, or both. Any or all of the
output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate no matter whether the Alarm, Latched
Alarm, or Trip setting is selected.
NTRL CT INPUTS
Range: CT(W1), CT(W2)
Default: CT(W1)
The Neutral Overcurrent menu provides selection for either CT (W1), or CT(W2) phase
inputs. If CT(W1) is selected, the NTRL IOC element will use the neutral current computed
by the relay based on Winding 1 phase currents and the Winding 1 CT ratings. If CT(W2)
setting is selected, the relay will use the computed neutral current based on Winding 2
phase currents and Winding 2 CT ratings.
NTRL IOC1(2) PKP
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the neutral instantaneous overcurrent pickup level specified in times CT.
NTRL IOC1(2) DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 300.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec
Default: 0.00 sec
This setting provides for selection of the pickup time delay used to delay the operation of
the protection.
RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate
The menu for the two trip output relays - RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR - is
available only if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Neutral IOC element.
One or both trip output relays can be selected to operate upon Neutral IOC operation.

NOTE:

NOTE

The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC
menu regardless of the selected OC function. These output relays will not operate if
either Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function, regardless of the Operate/
Do Not Operate value selected. The output relays are operational only if the OC function
is selected as Trip.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6–103

Virtual Input 1 to 32. Contact Input 1 to 10. Remote Input. 6–104 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Alarm. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm. The function is blocked if any of the three blocking inputs is detected “high”. Logic Element 1 to 16 Default: Off There are three independent blocking inputs in the Neutral IOC menu. Selection of a block input includes Contact input. Remote Input 1 to 32.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do Not Operate. Operate Default: Do Not Operate Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon the Neutral IOC operation. BLOCK 1/2/3 Range: Off. Virtual Input. or Logic Element. or Trip function is selected.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL Disabled = 0 SETPOINTS Neutral current (IN) CT(W2).cdr RLY 2 TRIP W2 BKR RLY 1 TRIP W1 BKR SETPOINTS (configurable only if “TRIP” function selected) To Breaker Failure Trip Operate output relays upon selection LED: TRIP R S OR BLOCK 1 Trip Alarm Latched Alarm AND NTRL IOC FUNCTION SETPOINT RESET Command CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION Figure 31: Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection logic diagram AND AND OR OR 6–105 . CT(W2) neutral current computed by the relay Off = 0 BLOCK 3 Off = 0 BLOCK 2 Off = 0 RUN IN > PICKUP NTRL IOC PICKUP SETPOINTS LED: PICKUP tPKP NTRL IOC PKP DELAY 0 NTRL TOC PKP Message and Event Recorder AND NTRL IOC CT INPUT SETPOINTS LATCH Operate trip output relays upon selection Message and Event Recorder OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 3 SETPOINTS: Neutral IOC PKP LED: ALARM 897813.

50 x CT This setting defines the negative sequence TOC pickup level associated with the ratings of the CTs selected under NEG SEQ CT INPUT. the relay will use the CT ratings associated with transformer winding 2. If the CT(W2) setting is selected. or Trip. PHASE CT INPUTS Range: CT(W1). PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > NEG SEQ TOC1(2) NEG SEQ TOC1(2) FUNC Range: Disabled.01 x CT Default: 0. if Latched Alarm is selected as a negative sequence TOC function. the NEG SEQ TOC element will use CT ratings associated with transformer winding 1. Until a reset command is initiated. For example if CT(W1) = 100:5. and the negative sequence current computed by the relay. Alarm.00 x CT in steps of 0. The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate if the function Trip is selected. The negative sequence overcurrent elements are uniquely suited to detect phase-phase faults and are not sensitive to balanced loads. CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) The Negative Sequence TOC menu provides selection for either CT(W1) input currents or CT(W2) currents. Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate with the negative sequence TOC function selected as Latched Alarm. 6–106 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . where it is calculated as .S3 PROTECTION Negative sequence timed overcurrent protection CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS The 345 relay has two Negative Sequence Overcurrent elements per setpoint group. and the CT(W2)=500:5.04 to 20. The negative sequence overcurrent protection responds to negative sequence |I2|current. While negative sequence elements do not respond to a balanced load.IEC Curve A/B/ C and Short Inverse.5 xCT with NEG SEQ CT INPUT = CT(W1) will be equivalent to a pickup of 0. Trip Default: Disabled The selection of the Latched Alarm.IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short Default: Ext Inverse This setting defines the shape of the selected overcurrent inverse curve. Alarm. The “ALARM” LED will flash under the neg. a pickup of 0. If CT(W1) is selected. and will self-reset when this operating condition clears. they do detect the negative sequence current present in an unbalanced load.5x100 = 50Amps negative sequence current. select an element pickup setting above the maximum expected I2 current due to load unbalance. is above the NEG SEQ TOC PKP setting for a time greater than the selected time under NEG SEQ TOC DELAY. The output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected. sequence current NEG SEQ TOC1(2) CURVE Range: . Alarm. sequence TOC operating condition. Latched Alarm. or Trip setting enables the Negative Sequence TOC function.Definite Time. NEG SEQ TOC1(2) PKP Range: 0. with the negative sequence TOC function selected as Alarm. and will stay “ON” after the condition clears. For this reason. The same pickup setting with NEG SEQ CT INPUT selected as CT(W2) will lead to a pickup threshold of 250 Amps neg. the “ALARM” LED will flash during the TOC condition.ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse. The “ALARM” LED will not turn on if the negative sequence TOC function is set to Trip.

the element will tend to reset. which modifies the time response of the selected curve. where if it reaches a level of 100% of the set energy capacity level.curve multiplier.characteristic constant (5 for ANSI. BLOCK 1/2/3 Range: Off. or Logic Element. or both. When Linear reset is selected. Contact Input 1 to 10. the element operates.reset time in seconds. the time to reset is calculated based on the following linear equation: Eq. E . The accumulated energy capacity is used as an input for computation of the reset time. OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do not operate. 19 where: TRESET . when the “Linear” reset is selected as a setting. the operation of the element will not occur before the elapse of 2. Alarm.is available only if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Negative Sequence TOC element. Any one of the assigned blocking inputs can block the function. These output relays will not operate if either Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function. TOC PKP level. and if it goes below 97-98% of this level. The selections for each block include Contact input. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is selected with TDM = 2.00 in steps of 0. If Instantaneous reset is selected. before the time for operation is reached. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–107 .05 to 20. RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do not operate. M . Definite Time. Operate Default: Do not operate The menu for the two trip output relays . TDM and points from the inverse curve. Seq.01 Default: 1. NOTE: NOTE The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC menu regardless of the selected OC function. the Negative Sequence TOC element will reset instantaneously providing that the current drops below 97-98% of the Neg. One. Relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm. or Trip function is selected.00 This setting provides a selection for Time Dial Multiplier. Logic Element 1 to 16 Default: Off Three blocking inputs are provided in the negative sequence TOC menu.energy capacity reached (per unit). Operate Default: Do not operate Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon the negative sequence TOC condition. CR . NEG SEQ TOC1(2) RESET Range: Instantaneous. Linear Default: Instantaneous The reset of the negative sequence timed overcurrent can be selected as either “Instantaneous” or “Linear”. Virtual Input. Remote Input 1 to 32.59 seconds from pickup. trip output relays can be selected to operate under the Negative Sequence TOC operating condition. IAC. User Curve. and the fault current was 5 times bigger than the PKP level.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION NEG SEQ TOC1(2) TDM Range: 0. The 100% “energy capacity” for the TOC element is defined by the selection of PKP. Remote Input. A memory variable based on actual values currents is monitored for accumulation of energy capacity. regardless of the Operate/ Do Not Operate value selected.RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR . The output relays are operational only if the OC function is selected as Trip. Virtual Input 1 to 32.

6–108 Disabled = 0 SETPOINTS I_2 Calculated Negative Sequence Current Off = 0 BLOCK 3: Off = 0 BLOCK 2: Off = 0 SETPOINTS Adjust PKP I_2 x t = RUN I_2 > PICKUP NEG SEQ TOC RESET NEG SEQ TOC TDM NEG SEQ TOC CURVE LED: PICKUP Message and Event Recorder NEG SEQ TOC PKP AND NEG SEQ TOC PICKUP LED: ALARM Operate trip output relays upon selection NEG SEQ TOC OP Message and Event Recorder OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 3 SETPOINTS 897807.cdr RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR SETPOINTS (configurable only if “TRIP” function selected) To Breaker Failure Trip Operate output relays upon selection LED: TRIP R LATCH S OR BLOCK 1: Trip Alarm Latched Alarm AND NEG SEQ TOC FUNCTN: SETPOINT RESET Command S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Figure 32: Negative Sequence Timed Overcurrent logic diagram AND AND OR OR 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

Group 1 is the default setpoint group. it may not be desirable to change setpoint groups. the active setpoint group will stay active.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS S4 Controls Figure 33: Controls menu S4 CONTROLS CHANGE SETP GROUP VIRTUAL INPUTS LOGIC ELEMENTS ▼ S4 CHANGE SETP GROUP SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE ▼ BLK GROUP CHANGE W1 BREAKER FAIL W2 BREAKER FAIL RESET S4 VIRTUAL INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ▼ VIRTUAL INPUT 2 . and vice versa. and the input configured under “BLK GROUP CHANGE” is asserted. or via communications. such as an overcurrent. the user can set a condition under “BLK GROUP CHANGE”. Switching between these two groups is available automatically by assigning an input (contact. BLOCK 1 OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 BLOCK LOGIC Change setpoint group The 345 relay has two identical setpoint groups. For example if the active group was Group 1 at the time of a trip. even if the input configured to switch to the other setpoint group is asserted.. remote.. where if asserted. logic element). A setpoint change can also be prevented if the breaker is open. so that a fault detected before a reclosure will not cause a group change while the breaker is open.Group 1 and Group 2 for all protection elements. OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 6 .. In such cases. cdr TRIGGER LOGIC PICKUP TIME DELAY DROPOUT TIME DELAY BF CURRENT RLY 1 TRIP W1 BKR BF EXT INITIATE RLY 2 TRIP W2 BKR BF TIME DELAY 1 OUTPUT RELAY 3 BF TIME DELAY 2 . virtual. the breaker opens. TRIGGER SOURCE 1 LOGIC ELEMENT 16[8] TRIGGER SOURCE 2 TRIGGER SOURCE 3 S4 W1 BREAKER FAIL BF FUNCTION ▼ 897767A1. Under some application conditions.. The relay can automatically switch from Group 1 protections to Group 2 protections.. by setting up the switching conditions under “Change Setpoint Group”... or voltage element pick up.. the relay 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–109 . VIRTUAL INPUT 32 S4 LOGIC ELEMENTS LOGIC ELEMENT 1 LOGIC ELEMENT 2 LOGIC ELEMENT 3 ▼ S4 LOGIC ELEMENT 1 LOGIC E1 NAME ▼ LOGIC E1 FUNCTION LOGIC ELEMENT 4 LOGIC E1 ASSERTED .

Remote Input 1 to 32. if the “BLK GROUP CHANGE” input is asserted.S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS will maintain Setpoint Group 1. if both the input “SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE” and the blocking input “BLK GROUP CHANGE” are de-asserted. when asserted. Logic Elements 1 to 16 Default: Off This setting defines an input that can be used to block changing setpoint groups. Setpoint group 2 will stay active as long as the “SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE” input is asserted. If no group change supervision is selected. when this input is de-asserted. and will revert to Group 1. Virtual Input 1 to 32. Vice versa. Contact Input 1 to 10. When the assigned input is asserted. PATH: CONTROLS > CHANGE SPNT GROUP SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE Range: Off. Logic Elements 1 to 16 Default: Off This setting selects an input used to change from Setpoint Group 1 to Setpoint Group 2. 6–110 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Remote Input 1 to 32. The relay will default to Setpoint Group 1. Virtual Input 1 to 32. Contact Input 1 to 10. even if the input “SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE” is asserted. the relay will not switch from Group 2 to Group 1. BLOCK GROUP CHANGE Range: Off. changing from one setpoint group to the other one is blocked. even if the input under “SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE” is de-asserted.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–111 . the state of the virtual input will be latched. VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Off. On Default: Off The state of each virtual input can be controlled under SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROL > VIRTUAL INPUTS menu. each of the virtual inputs selected for control need be “Enabled” under SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS. For this purpose.Logic diagram SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE LED: Setpoint Group 2 AND SETPOINT OR Off AND SETPOINT BLK GROUP CHANGE Use Setpoint Group 2 Off AND ACTUAL VALUES Group 1 Active LED: Setpoint Group 1 OR Default to Setpoint Group 1 AND 897791. To prolong the time of the virtual input pulse. and its type “SelfReset” or “Latched” specified. PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > VIRTUAL INPUTS. or by using communication protocols. Refer to the logic diagram in the S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS chapter for more details.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS Figure 34: Switching setpoint groups .cdr Virtual inputs There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input commands entered via the relay keypad. If “Latched” type is selected. entering “On” command will lead to a pulse of one protection pass. If Self-Reset type was selected. one can assign it as a trigger source to a Logic Element with a dropout timer set to the desired pulse time. upon entering “On” command.

The option to trigger auxiliary output relays is provided for any of the selected Logic Element functions. Referring to the Logic Element logic diagram below. The “PICKUP” LED will turn on upon a Logic Element pickup condition except when the Logic Element function is selected as Control. or Trip. the user can define whether to use the “ON”. The Trip output relay will be triggered when Trip is selected as a function. 6–112 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Latched Alarm. virtual. Changing the state of any of the assigned inputs used as trigger sources. unless a blocking input is present. and the Logic element operates. The logic provides for assigning up to three triggering inputs in an “OR” gate for Logic Element operation. or Latched Alarm.S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Figure 35: Virtual inputs scheme logic SETPOINT V INPUT FUNCTION Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 AND “Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1" S From Control menu LATCH ACTUAL VALUES “Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0" AND V INPUT 1 NAME: (Operand) R OR V Input 1 Status SETPOINT Latched AND V INPUT 1 TYPE Self-Reset 897774. When Trip is selected as a function. The “ALARM” LED will turn on upon Logic Element operation if the Logic Element function selected is either Alarm. or Control is selected. Alarm. In addition. Control. For instructions on how to use the keypad. Alarm. or from the output operand of a protection. or control element.cdr Logic elements The 345 relay has 16 Logic Elements available to build simple logic using the state of any programmed contact.Working with the Keypad. the Logic Element can be set to one of four functions: Control. Latched Alarm. Latched Alarm. will change the state of the Logic Element. Trip Default: Disabled This setting defines the use of the Logic Element. please refer to Chapter 3 . The following path is available using the keypad. and up to three blocking inputs in an “OR” gate for defining the block signal. The “TRIP” LED will turn on upon Logic Element operation if the Logic Element function is selected as Trip. the Logic Element will trigger Output Relay # 1 (Trip) upon operation. PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > S4 LOGIC ELEMENTS LE1(16) FUNCTION Range: Disabled. Output relay #1 (Trip) will not be triggered during Logic Element operation if Alarm. or “OFF” state of the programmed element by selecting ASSERTED: “On” or “Off”. Pickup and dropout timers are available for delaying Logic Element operation and dropout respectively. or remote input.

or an output flag from a protection. OUTPUT RELAYS 3 to 6 Range: Do not operate. TRIGGER LOGIC Range: OR. or control element. a virtual input. AND Default: OR This setting defines block source operation as either “OR” or “AND”. when the LE is “Off”. When set to “AND” all three sources must be asserted before the Logic Element is blocked.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS LE1(16) ASSERTED Range: On. a remote input. a virtual input. 3 Range: Off. The selection of auxiliary relay outputs is available no matter whether Control. 2. If asserted “Off” is selected. TRIGGER SOURCE 1. When set to “OR” any of the inputs will trigger the Logic Element. RESET DELAY Range: 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms Default: 0 ms This setting specifies the time delay from a reset timer that starts upon expiry of the pickup time delay and prolongs the operation of the Logic Element until this time expires. This input can be a contact input. Alarm. a remote input. This input can be a contact input. 2. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–113 . or an output flag from a protection. The asserted “On” selection provides an output “high” when the LE is "On". or control element. Any input from the list of inputs Default: Off Each of the three blocks is configurable by allowing the assigning of an input selected from a list of inputs. PKP DELAY Range: 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms Default: 0 ms This setting specifies the pickup time delay before Logic Element operation. Any input from the list of inputs Default: Off Each of the three trigger sources is configurable by allowing the assigning of an input selected from a list of inputs. 3 Range: Off. Off Default: Off This setting defines the Logic Element state “On” or “Off” to be used as an output. Latched Alarm. When set to “AND” all three sources must be asserted before the Logic Element is triggered. then the LE output will be “high”. BLOCK LOGIC Range: OR. When set to “OR” any of the inputs will block the Logic Element. or Trip function is selected. BLOCK 1. or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon Logic Element operation. AND Default: OR This setting defines trigger source operation as either “OR” or “AND”. as well as an input from any of the other seven logic inputs. Operate Default: Do not operate Any.

cdr OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 3 SETPOINTS Operate Output Relay1 (TRIP) Message Logic Elem 1 OP Event Recorder Transient Recorder AND TRIGGER SOURCE 3 Off TRIGGER SOURCE 2 Off TRIGGER SOURCE 1 SETPOINT AND LATCH LED: TRIP R S OR TRIGGER LOGIC AND Control Trip Alarm Latched Alarm Disabled = 0 AND LOGIC EL FUNCTION RESET Command S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Figure 36: Logic Element logic diagram AND OR 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .6–114 SETPOINT SETPOINT OR SETPOINT Off BLOCK 3 Off BLOCK 2 Off BLOCK 1 SETPOINT AND OR BLOCK LOGIC Off SETPOINT Off On LE1 ASSERTED STATE tPKP RST TIME DELAY PKP TIME DELAY SETPOINT LED: PICKUP tRST LED: ALARM Operate output relays upon selection Logic Elem 1 PKP Logic Elem 1 DPO 897816A1.

Code Type FC134C unsigned 16 bits Definition Logic Element Trigger 0 Off 0x0040 Contact IN 1 On 0x0041 Contact IN 2 On 0x0042 Contact IN 3 On 0x0043 Contact IN 4 On 0x0044 Contact IN 5 On 0x0045 Contact IN 6 On 0x0046 Contact IN 7 On 0x0047 Contact IN 8 On 0x0048 Contact IN 9 On 0x0049 Contact IN 10 On 0x0060 Contact IN 1 Off 0x0061 Contact IN 2 Off 0x0062 Contact IN 3 Off 0x0063 Contact IN 4 Off 0x0064 Contact IN 5 Off 0x0065 Contact IN 6 Off 0x0066 Contact IN 7 Off 0x0067 Contact IN 8 Off 0x0068 Contact IN 9 Off 0x0069 Contact IN 10 Off 0x0080 Virtual IN 1 On 0x0081 Virtual IN 2 On 0x0082 Virtual IN 3 On 0x0083 Virtual IN 4 On 0x0084 Virtual IN 5 On 0x0085 Virtual IN 6 On 0x0086 Virtual IN 7 On 0x0087 Virtual IN 8 On 0x0088 Virtual IN 9 On 0x0089 Virtual IN 10 On 0x008A Virtual IN 11 On 0x008B Virtual IN 12 On 0x008C Virtual IN 13 On 0x008D Virtual IN 14 On 0x008E Virtual IN 15 On 0x008F Virtual IN 16 On 0x0090 Virtual IN 17 On 0x0091 Virtual IN 18 On 0x0092 Virtual IN 19 On 0x0093 Virtual IN 20 On 0x0094 Virtual IN 21 On 0x0095 Virtual IN 22 On 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–115 . shows the list of available Logic Inputs. from the 345 Communications Guide.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS The following table.

S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 6–116 Type Definition 0x0096 Virtual IN 23 On 0x0097 Virtual IN 24 On 0x0098 Virtual IN 25 On 0x0099 Virtual IN 26 On 0x009A Virtual IN 27 On 0x009B Virtual IN 28 On 0x009C Virtual IN 29 On 0x009D Virtual IN 30 On 0x009E Virtual IN 31 On 0x009F Virtual IN 32 On 0x00A0 Virtual IN 1 Off 0x00A1 Virtual IN 2 Off 0x00A2 Virtual IN 3 Off 0x00A3 Virtual IN 4 Off 0x00A4 Virtual IN 5 Off 0x00A5 Virtual IN 6 Off 0x00A6 Virtual IN 7 Off 0x00A7 Virtual IN 8 Off 0x00A8 Virtual IN 9 Off 0x00A9 Virtual IN 10 Off 0x00AA Virtual IN 11 Off 0x00AB Virtual IN 12 Off 0x00AC Virtual IN 13 Off 0x00AD Virtual IN 14 Off 0x00AE Virtual IN 15 Off 0x00AF Virtual IN 16 Off 0x00B0 Virtual IN 17 Off 0x00B1 Virtual IN 18 Off 0x00B2 Virtual IN 19 Off 0x00B3 Virtual IN 20 Off 0x00B4 Virtual IN 21 Off 0x00B5 Virtual IN 22 Off 0x00B6 Virtual IN 23 Off 0x00B7 Virtual IN 24 Off 0x00B8 Virtual IN 25 Off 0x00B9 Virtual IN 26 Off 0x00BA Virtual IN 27 Off 0x00BB Virtual IN 28 Off 0x00BC Virtual IN 29 Off 0x00BD Virtual IN 30 Off 0x00BE Virtual IN 31 Off 0x00BF Virtual IN 32 Off 0x01C0 Remote IN 1 On 0x01C1 Remote IN 2 On 0x01C2 Remote IN 3 On 0x01C3 Remote IN 4 On 0x01C4 Remote IN 5 On 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS Code Type Definition 0x01C5 Remote IN 6 On 0x01C6 Remote IN 7 On 0x01C7 Remote IN 8 On 0x01C8 Remote IN 9 On 0x01C9 Remote IN 10 On 0x01CA Remote IN 11 On 0x01CB Remote IN 12 On 0x01CC Remote IN 13 On 0x01CD Remote IN 14 On 0x01CE Remote IN 15 On 0x01CF Remote IN 16 On 0x01D0 Remote IN 17 On 0x01D1 Remote IN 18 On 0x01D2 Remote IN 19 On 0x01D3 Remote IN 20 On 0x01D4 Remote IN 21 On 0x01D5 Remote IN 22 On 0x01D6 Remote IN 23 On 0x01D7 Remote IN 24 On 0x01D8 Remote IN 25 On 0x01D9 Remote IN 26 On 0x01DA Remote IN 27 On 0x01DB Remote IN 28 On 0x01DC Remote IN 29 On 0x01DD Remote IN 30 On 0x01DE Remote IN 31 On 0x01DF Remote IN 32 On 0x01E0 Remote IN 1 Off 0x01E1 Remote IN 2 Off 0x01E2 Remote IN 3 Off 0x01E3 Remote IN 4 Off 0x01E4 Remote IN 5 Off 0x01E5 Remote IN 6 Off 0x01E6 Remote IN 7 Off 0x01E7 Remote IN 8 Off 0x01E8 Remote IN 9 Off 0x01E9 Remote IN 10 Off 0x01EA Remote IN 11 Off 0x01EB Remote IN 12 Off 0x01EC Remote IN 13 Off 0x01ED Remote IN 14 Off 0x01EE Remote IN 15 Off 0x01EF Remote IN 16 Off 0x01F0 Remote IN 17 Off 0x01F1 Remote IN 18 Off 0x01F2 Remote IN 19 Off 0x01F3 Remote IN 20 Off 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–117 .

S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 6–118 Type Definition 0x01F4 Remote IN 21 Off 0x01F5 Remote IN 22 Off 0x01F6 Remote IN 23 Off 0x01F7 Remote IN 24 Off 0x01F8 Remote IN 25 Off 0x01F9 Remote IN 26 Off 0x01FA Remote IN 27 Off 0x01FB Remote IN 28 Off 0x01FC Remote IN 29 Off 0x01FD Remote IN 30 Off 0x01FE Remote IN 31 Off 0x01FF Remote IN 32 Off 0x8002 Any Trip 0x8042 Therm O/L Trip OP 0x8044 Therm O/L Trip DPO 0x84C1 LE 1 Trip PKP 0x84C2 LE 1 Trip OP 0x84C4 LE 1 Trip DPO 0x8501 LE 2 Trip PKP 0x8502 LE 2 Trip OP 0x8504 LE 2 Trip DPO 0x8541 LE 3 Trip PKP 0x8542 LE 3 Trip OP 0x8544 LE 3 Trip DPO 0x8581 LE 4 Trip PKP 0x8582 LE 4 Trip OP 0x8584 LE 4 Trip DPO 0x85C1 LE 5 Trip PKP 0x85C2 LE 5 Trip OP 0x85C4 LE 5 Trip DPO 0x8601 LE 6 Trip PKP 0x8602 LE 6 Trip OP 0x8604 LE 6 Trip DPO 0x8641 LE 7 Trip PKP 0x8642 LE 7 Trip OP 0x8644 LE 7 Trip DPO 0x8681 LE 8 Trip PKP 0x8682 LE 8 Trip OP 0x8684 LE 8 Trip DPO 0x9001 Ph IOC1 Trip PKP 0x9002 Ph IOC1 Trip OP 0x9004 Ph IOC1 Trip DPO 0x9041 Ntrl IOC1 Trip PKP 0x9042 Ntrl IOC1 Trip OP 0x9044 Ntrl IOC1 Trip DPO 0x9081 Gnd IOC1 Trip PKP 0x9082 Gnd IOC1 Trip OP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS Code Type Definition 0x9084 Gnd IOC1 Trip DPO 0x90C1 Ph TOC1 Trip PKP 0x90C2 Ph TOC1 Trip OP 0x90C4 Ph TOC1 Trip DPO 0x9101 Ntrl TOC1 Trip PKP 0x9102 Ntrl TOC1 Trip OP 0x9104 Ntrl TOC1 Trip DPO 0x9141 Gnd TOC1 Trip PKP 0x9142 Gnd TOC1 Trip OP 0x9144 Gnd TOC1 Trip DPO 0x9181 Ph IOC2 Trip PKP 0x9182 Ph IOC2 Trip OP 0x9184 Ph IOC2 Trip DPO 0x91C1 Ntrl IOC2 Trip PKP 0x91C2 Ntrl IOC2 Trip OP 0x91C4 Ntrl IOC2 Trip DPO 0x9201 Gnd IOC2 Trip PKP 0x9202 Gnd IOC2 Trip OP 0x9204 Gnd IOC2 Trip DPO 0x9241 Ph TOC2 Trip PKP 0x9242 Ph TOC2 Trip OP 0x9244 Ph TOC2 Trip DPO 0x9281 Ntrl TOC2 Trip PKP 0x9282 Ntrl TOC2 Trip OP 0x9284 Ntrl TOC2 Trip DPO 0x92C1 Gnd TOC2 Trip PKP 0x92C2 Gnd TOC2 Trip OP 0x92C4 Gnd TOC2 Trip DPO 0x9301 SGnd TOC1 Trip PKP 0x9302 SGnd TOC1 Trip OP 0x9304 SGnd TOC1 Trip DPO 0x9641 SGnd IOC1 Trip PKP 0x9642 SGnd IOC1 Trip OP 0x9644 SGnd IOC1 Trip DPO 0x9681 SGnd IOC2 Trip PKP 0x9682 SGnd IOC2 Trip OP 0x9684 SGnd IOC2 Trip DPO 0x9701 Pcnt Diff Trip PKP 0x9702 Pcnt Diff Trip OP 0x9704 Pcnt Diff Trip DPO 0x9741 RGF1 Trip PKP 0x9742 RGF1 Trip OP 0x9744 RGF1 Trip DPO 0x9781 RGF2 Trip PKP 0x9782 RGF2 Trip OP 0x9784 RGF2 Trip DPO 0x97C1 Inst Diff Trip PKP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–119 .

S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 6–120 Type Definition 0x97C2 Inst Diff Trip OP 0x97C4 Inst Diff Trip DPO 0x9801 NSeq TOC1 Trip PKP 0x9802 NSeq TOC1 Trip OP 0x9804 NSeq TOC1 Trip DPO 0x9841 NSeq TOC2 Trip PKP 0x9842 NSeq TOC2 Trip OP 0x9844 NSeq TOC2 Trip DPO 0x99C1 SGnd TOC2 Trip PKP 0x99C2 SGnd TOC2 Trip OP 0x99C4 SGnd TOC2 Trip DPO 0x9C01 LE 9 Trip PKP 0x9C02 LE 9 Trip OP 0x9C04 LE 9 Trip DPO 0x9C41 LE 10 Trip PKP 0x9C42 LE 10 Trip OP 0x9C44 LE 10 Trip DPO 0x9C81 LE 11 Trip PKP 0x9C82 LE 11 Trip OP 0x9C84 LE 11 Trip DPO 0x9CC1 LE 12 Trip PKP 0x9CC2 LE 12 Trip OP 0x9CC4 LE 12 Trip DPO 0x9D01 LE 13 Trip PKP 0x9D02 LE 13 Trip OP 0x9D04 LE 13 Trip DPO 0x9D41 LE 14 Trip PKP 0x9D42 LE 14 Trip OP 0x9D44 LE 14 Trip DPO 0x9D81 LE 15 Trip PKP 0x9D82 LE 15 Trip OP 0x9D84 LE 15 Trip DPO 0x9DC1 LE 16 Trip PKP 0x9DC2 LE 16 Trip OP 0x9DC4 LE 16 Trip DPO 0xA002 Any Alarm 0xA042 Therm Lvl Alrm OP 0xA044 Therm Lvl Alrm DPO 0xA482 Relay Not Ready 0xA4C1 LE 1 Alarm PKP 0xA4C2 LE 1 Alarm OP 0xA4C4 LE 1 Alarm DPO 0xA501 LE 2 Alarm PKP 0xA502 LE 2 Alarm OP 0xA504 LE 2 Alarm DPO 0xA541 LE 3 Alarm PKP 0xA542 LE 3 Alarm OP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS Code Type Definition 0xA544 LE 3 Alarm DPO 0xA581 LE 4 Alarm PKP 0xA582 LE 4 Alarm OP 0xA584 LE 4 Alarm DPO 0xA5C1 LE 5 Alarm PKP 0xA5C2 LE 5 Alarm OP 0xA5C4 LE 5 Alarm DPO 0xA601 LE 6 Alarm PKP 0xA602 LE 6 Alarm OP 0xA604 LE 6 Alarm DPO 0xA641 LE 7 Alarm PKP 0xA642 LE 7 Alarm OP 0xA644 LE 7 Alarm DPO 0xA681 LE 8 Alarm PKP 0xA682 LE 8 Alarm OP 0xA684 LE 8 Alarm DPO 0xABC1 HI Amb Temp PKP 0xABC2 HI Amb Temp OP 0xABC4 HI Amb Temp DPO 0xAC01 LO Amb Temp PKP 0xAC02 LO Amb Temp OP 0xAC04 LO Amb Temp DPO 0xAC41 Self Test Alrm PKP 0xAC42 Self Test Alarm OP 0xAD01 R1 CoilMonAlrm PKP 0xAD02 R1 CoilMonAlrm OP 0xAD04 R1 CoilMonAlrm DPO 0xAD41 R2 CoilMonAlrm PKP 0xAD42 R2 CoilMonAlrm OP 0xAD44 R2 CoilMonAlrm DPO 0xAD81 BKR1 Fail Alrm PKP 0xAD82 BKR1 Fail Alrm OP 0xAD84 BKR1 Fail Alrm DPO 0xADC2 BKR1 Stat Fail OP 0xAEC2 BKR2 Stat Fail OP 0xAF41 BKR2 Fail Alrm PKP 0xAF42 BKR2 Fail Alrm OP 0xAF44 BKR2 Fail Alrm DPO 0xB001 Ph IOC1 Alarm PKP 0xB002 Ph IOC1 Alarm OP 0xB004 Ph IOC1 Alarm DPO 0xB041 Ntrl IOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB042 Ntrl IOC1 Alrm OP 0xB044 Ntrl IOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB081 Gnd IOC1 Alarm PKP 0xB082 Gnd IOC1 Alarm OP 0xB084 Gnd IOC1 Alarm DPO 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–121 .

S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 6–122 Type Definition 0xB0C1 Ph TOC1 Alarm PKP 0xB0C2 Ph TOC1 Alarm OP 0xB0C4 Ph TOC1 Alarm DPO 0xB101 Ntrl TOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB102 Ntrl TOC1 Alrm OP 0xB104 Ntrl TOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB141 Gnd TOC1 Alarm PKP 0xB142 Gnd TOC1 Alarm OP 0xB144 Gnd TOC1 Alarm DPO 0xB181 Ph IOC2 Alarm PKP 0xB182 Ph IOC2 Alarm OP 0xB184 Ph IOC2 Alarm DPO 0xB1C1 Ntrl IOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB1C2 Ntrl IOC2 Alrm OP 0xB1C4 Ntrl IOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB201 Gnd IOC2 Alarm PKP 0xB202 Gnd IOC2 Alarm OP 0xB204 Gnd IOC2 Alarm DPO 0xB241 Ph TOC2 Alarm PKP 0xB242 Ph TOC2 Alarm OP 0xB244 Ph TOC2 Alarm DPO 0xB281 Ntrl TOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB282 Ntrl TOC2 Alrm OP 0xB284 Ntrl TOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB2C1 Gnd TOC2 Alarm PKP 0xB2C2 Gnd TOC2 Alarm OP 0xB2C4 Gnd TOC2 Alarm DPO 0xB301 SGnd TOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB302 SGnd TOC1 Alrm OP 0xB304 SGnd TOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB641 SGnd IOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB642 SGnd IOC1 Alrm OP 0xB644 SGnd IOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB681 SGnd IOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB682 SGnd IOC2 Alrm OP 0xB684 SGnd IOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB701 Pcnt Diff Alrm PKP 0xB702 Pcnt Diff Alrm OP 0xB704 Pcnt Diff Alrm DPO 0xB741 RGF1 Alarm PKP 0xB742 RGF1 Alarm OP 0xB744 RGF1 Alarm DPO 0xB781 RGF2 Alarm PKP 0xB782 RGF2 Alarm OP 0xB784 RGF2 Alarm DPO 0xB7C1 Inst Diff Alrm PKP 0xB7C2 Inst Diff Alrm OP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS Code Type Definition 0xB7C4 Inst Diff Alrm DPO 0xB801 NSeq TOC1 Alrm PKP 0xB802 NSeq TOC1 Alrm OP 0xB804 NSeq TOC1 Alrm DPO 0xB841 NSeq TOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB842 NSeq TOC2 Alrm OP 0xB844 NSeq TOC2 Alrm DPO 0xB9C1 SGnd TOC2 Alrm PKP 0xB9C2 SGnd TOC2 Alrm OP 0xB9C4 SGnd TOC2 Alrm DPO 0xBC01 LE 9 Alarm PKP 0xBC02 LE 9 Alarm OP 0xBC04 LE 9 Alarm DPO 0xBC41 LE 10 Alarm PKP 0xBC42 LE 10 Alarm OP 0xBC44 LE 10 Alarm DPO 0xBC81 LE 11 Alarm PKP 0xBC82 LE 11 Alarm OP 0xBC84 LE 11 Alarm DPO 0xBCC1 LE 12 Alarm PKP 0xBCC2 LE 12 Alarm OP 0xBCC4 LE 12 Alarm DPO 0xBD01 LE 13 Alarm PKP 0xBD02 LE 13 Alarm OP 0xBD04 LE 13 Alarm DPO 0xBD41 LE 14 Alarm PKP 0xBD42 LE 14 Alarm OP 0xBD44 LE 14 Alarm DPO 0xBD81 LE 15 Alarm PKP 0xBD82 LE 15 Alarm OP 0xBD84 LE 15 Alarm DPO 0xBDC1 LE 16 Alarm PKP 0xBDC2 LE 16 Alarm OP 0xBDC4 LE 16 Alarm DPO 0xC042 Output Relay 3 On 0xC082 Output Relay 4 On 0xC0C2 Output Relay 5 On 0xC102 Output Relay 6 On 0xC142 Self-Test Rly 7 On 0xC182 Output Relay 1 On 0xC1C2 Output Relay 2 On 0xC202 BKR Connected 0xC2C2 BKR2 Connected 0xC4C1 LE 1 PKP 0xC4C2 LE 1 OP 0xC4C4 LE 1 DPO 0xC501 LE 2 PKP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–123 .

S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 6–124 Type Definition 0xC502 LE 2 OP 0xC504 LE 2 DPO 0xC541 LE 3 PKP 0xC542 LE 3 OP 0xC544 LE 3 DPO 0xC581 LE 4 PKP 0xC582 LE 4 OP 0xC584 LE 4 DPO 0xC5C1 LE 5 PKP 0xC5C2 LE 5 OP 0xC5C4 LE 5 DPO 0xC601 LE 6 PKP 0xC602 LE 6 OP 0xC604 LE 6 DPO 0xC641 LE 7 PKP 0xC642 LE 7 OP 0xC644 LE 7 DPO 0xC681 LE 8 PKP 0xC682 LE 8 OP 0xC684 LE 8 DPO 0xC882 Setpoint Group2 On 0xCA02 52a Contact OP 0xCA42 52b Contact OP 0xCA82 Reset OK 0xCCC2 BKR Stat Open 0xCD02 BKR Stat Clsd 0xCD42 Setpoint Group1 On 0xDA02 BKR2 52a Cont OP 0xDA42 BKR2 52b Cont OP 0xDA82 BKR2 Stat Open OP 0xDA84 BKR2 Stat Open DPO 0xDAC2 BKR2 Stat Clsd OP 0xDAC4 BKR2 Stat Clsd DPO 0xDB02 Trip BKR 1 OP 0xDB04 Trip BKR 1 DPO 0xDB42 Trip BKR 2 OP 0xDB44 Trip BKR 2 DPO 0xDC01 LE 9 PKP 0xDC02 LE 9 OP 0xDC04 LE 9 DPO 0xDC41 LE 10 PKP 0xDC42 LE 10 OP 0xDC44 LE 10 DPO 0xDC81 LE 11 PKP 0xDC82 LE 11 OP 0xDC84 LE 11 DPO 0xDCC1 LE 12 PKP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS Code Type Definition 0xDCC2 LE 12 OP 0xDCC4 LE 12 DPO 0xDD01 LE 13 PKP 0xDD02 LE 13 OP 0xDD04 LE 13 DPO 0xDD41 LE 14 PKP 0xDD42 LE 14 OP 0xDD44 LE 14 DPO 0xDD81 LE 15 PKP 0xDD82 LE 15 OP 0xDD84 LE 15 DPO 0xDDC1 LE 16 PKP 0xDDC2 LE 16 OP 0xDDC4 LE 16 DPO 0xE002 Any Block 0xE042 Therm O/L Blck OP 0xE182 Output Relay 1 BLK 0xE1C2 Output Relay 2 BLK 0xE882 Group Change Blk 0xF002 Ph IOC1 Block 0xF042 Ntrl IOC1 Block 0xF082 Gnd IOC1 Block 0xF0C2 Ph TOC1 Block 0xF102 Ntrl TOC1 Block 0xF142 Gnd TOC1 Block 0xF182 Ph IOC2 Block 0xF1C2 Ntrl IOC2 Block 0xF202 Gnd IOC2 Block 0xF242 Ph TOC2 Block 0xF282 Ntrl TOC2 Block 0xF2C2 Gnd TOC2 Block 0xF302 SGnd TOC1 Block 0xF642 SGnd IOC1 Block 0xF682 SGnd IOC2 Block 0xF702 Pcnt Diff Block 0xF742 RGF1 Block 0xF782 RGF2 Block 0xF7C2 Inst Diff Block 0xF802 NSeq TOC1 Blk 0xF842 NSeq TOC2 Blk 0xF9C2 SGnd TOC2 Block 0xFB02 Trip BKR1 Blk 0xFB42 Trip BKR2 Blk 0xFB82 2nd Hmnc Diff Blk 0xFBC2 5th Hmnc Diff Blk 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–125 .

For instructions on how to use the keypad. and will turn off upon clearing the condition. and at least one of the phase currents is above the BF CURRENT setpoint. Remote Input.01 s Default: 0. one per winding breaker.00 s in steps of 0. When the 345 relay allows the configuration of only one breaker failure function.01 x CT Default: 1. PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > W1(W2) BREAKER FAIL BF FUNCTION Range: Disabled.00 x CT This setting selects the current level to be monitored by the BF logic after the programmed time delays. a Breaker Failure will be declared.S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Winding breaker failure There are two Breaker Failure functions. If Latched Alarm is selected.00 s This timer does not start before a trip condition is recognized. Latched Alarm Default: Disabled If set to Alarm. The following path is available using the keypad.05 to 20. Remote Input 1 to 32. and will be triggered upon operation of any protection element with a FUNCTION setting set to Trip.5 power cycle time is added to the expected breaker time-to-trip time for the BF DELAY1 and BF DELAY 2 timers.e. Contact Input 1 to 10. BF TIME DELAY 1 Range: 0. this function is always associated with the Winding 1 breaker. the ALARM LED will flash upon detection of the Breaker Failure condition. BF CURRENT Range: 0. the W2 BREAKER FAIL logic will be triggered only upon operation of a protection element with the function set to Trip. please refer to Chapter 3 . NOTE: NOTE W1 BREAKER FAIL logic is triggered only upon operation of a protection element with a function set to Trip.00 x CT in steps of 0. and will remain ON when the condition clears. Logic Element 1 to 16 Default: Off This setting selects the external initiate signal to launch the Breaker Failure function.00 s in steps of 0.1 s This timer starts when breaker trip command is issued from any of the protection elements. 6–126 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . BF TIME DELAY 2 Range: 0. BF TIMER DELAY 1 has expired. Virtual Input. The BF function monitors the phase currents after a trip command from a protection element is initiated. and will operate the selected output relays. or Logic Element. The operation of the filter that reduces the overreaching effect of the assymetrical offset currents will cause the measured current to ramp down to zero after the breaker trips. and the CT INPUT set to CT(W1).01 s Default: 0.03 to 1.00 to 1. and the CT INPUT associated with Winding 1 CT . If any phase current is above the set current level after the BF DELAY timer/timers expire. BF EXT INITIATE Range: Off. Similarly. Virtual Input 1 to 32. The Breaker Failure scheme also provides the setup for BF initiate from the external input via Contact Input. and the CT INPUT set to CT(W2).Working with the Keypad.i. Alarm. The ALARM LED turns OFF upon initiation of a "Reset" command. CT(W1). It is strongly recommended that a margin of 1. the ALARM LED will flash during the Breaker Failure condition.

The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm. or Trip function is selected. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–127 . Alarm.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do Not Operate. Operate Default: Do Not Operate Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon Breaker Failure detection.

6–128 SETPOINT Range: Contact Input. Remote Input. Logic Element Off = 0 OR BF EXT INITIATE SETPOINT Trip From Protection operation Phase C current (Ic) Phase B current (Ib) Phase A current (Ia) Ic > PICKUP Ib > PICKUP Ia > PICKUP : SETPOINT BF CURRENT SETPOINT tPKP RUN BF TIME DELAY 1 SETPOINT tPKP RUN BF TIME DELAY 2 LATCH LED: ALARM OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 3 SETPOINTS Operate output relays upon selection W1(W2) Breaker Failure Message and Event Recorder R S OR Phase Currents Alarm Latched Alarm AND Disabled = 0 BF FUNCTION RESET Command S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Figure 37: Breaker Failure logic diagram AND AND OR OR 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Virtual Input.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–129 .CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS S5 Inputs/Outputs Figure 38: Inputs/Outputs menu S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT INPUTS OUTPUT RELAYS VIRTUAL INPUTS S5 CONTACT INPUTS SELECT DC VOLTAGE ▼ CONTACT INPUT 1 S5 DEBOUNCE TIME CONTACT INPUT 1 CONTACT INPUT 2 . VIRTUAL INPUT 32 S5 VIRTUAL INPUT 32 VI 32 NAME ▼ 897768A1. 166V) is selectable. All contact inputs are wet type contacts (refer to the 345 typical wiring diagram) that require an external DC voltage source.... The voltage threshold (17V. ▼ CONTACT INPUT 2 CONTACT INPUT 10 CONTACT INPUT 3 DEBOUNCE TIME .. and it applies for all ten contact inputs.. CONTACT INPUT 10 S5 OUTPUT RELAYS RLY 1 W1 BKRTRIP RLY 2 W2 BKRTRIP RELAY 3 AUXILIARY ▼ S5 RLY 1 W1 BKR TRIP RLY 1 SEAL-IN ▼ BLOCK RLY 1 TRIP RELAY 4 AUXILIARY RELAY 5 AUXILIARY RELAY 6 AUXILIARY S5 RLY 2 W2 BKR TRIP RLY 2 SEAL-IN ▼ BLOCK RLY 2 TRIP S5 RELAY 3 AUXILIARY OUTPUT TYPE S5 VIRTUAL INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUT 1 VIRTUAL INPUT 2 VIRTUAL INPUT 3 ▼ VIRTUAL INPUT 4 S5 VIRTUAL INPUT 1 VI 1 NAME ▼ VI 1 FUNCTION VI 1 TYPE . etc. 84V. which can be used to provide a variety of functions such as for circuit breaker control..cdr VI 32 FUNCTION VI 32 TYPE Contact inputs The 345 relay is equipped with ten (10) contact inputs. external trips. 33V. blocking of protection elements.

Contact Input 3 and Contact Input 4 are named by the factory as 52a and 52b respectively and are used for monitoring the Winding2 breaker open/close state when wired to the Winding 2 breaker auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b. Contact Input 1 and Contact Input 2 are named by the factory as 52a and 52b respectively and are used for monitoring the Winding1 breaker open/close state when wired to the Winding 1 breaker auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b. 33 V. can be named to reflect the function it represents within the application. The state will be recognized if the input is maintained for a period consisting of the protection pass plus the debounce setting. it 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Up to 18 alpha-numeric characters are available for names. Output relays The 345 relay is equipped with seven electromechanical relays: two special relays designed for Winding 1 Breaker trip and Winding 2 Breaker trip. The special purpose relays have fixed operating characteristics and the general purpose relays can be configured by the user. The debounce time is adjustable by the user. Because of de-bouncing. four general purpose relays (Auxiliary Relays 3 to 6). momentary contacts must have a minimum dwell time greater than half power frequency cycle. PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > CONTACT INPUTS SELECT DC VOLTAGE Range: 17 V. 84 V. • 6–130 The Trip relays reset after the breaker is detected in a state corresponding to the command. and a Critical Failure relay. 166 V Default: 84 V CONTACT INPUT 1 Range: Select alpha-numeric name Default: Bkr1 52a (CI#1) CONTACT INPUT 2 Range: Select alpha-numeric name Default: Bkr1 52b (CI#2) CONTACT INPUT 3 Range: Select alpha-numeric name Default: Bkr2 52a (CI#3) CONTACT INPUT 4 Range: Select alpha-numeric name Default: Bkr2 52b (CI#4) CONTACT INPUT X [5 to 10] Range: Select alpha-numeric name Default: Input X DEBOUNCE TIME ↘ CONTACT INPUT X [1 TO 10] Range: 1 to 64 ms Default: 2 ms Each of the contact inputs 5 to 10. When a relay feature sends a command to one of these special relays. The debounce time is used to discriminate between oscillating inputs.S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS The contact inputs are either open or closed with a programmable debounce time to prevent false operation from induced voltage. Operation of the two Trip output relays is designed to be controlled by the state of the circuit breaker as monitored by a 52a or 52b contact.

Yes No Trip Relay remains operational until 52a indicates an open breaker. The following path is available using the keypad.99 s in steps of 0. thus extending its pulse width. 52a Contact Configured 52b Contact Configured Relay Operation Yes Yes Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an open breaker. No Yes Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an open breaker. or a default interval of 100 ms after the initiating input resets.Working with the Keypad.04 s This setting defines the time to be added to the reset time of the Relay 1 Trip output. but the breaker does not change state. the Trip Output relay will be blocked. or 100 ms after the feature causing the trip resets. PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY 1 W1 BKRTRIP RLY1 SEAL-IN Range: 0.99 s in steps of 0. This is useful for those applications where the 52 contacts reporting the breaker state are faster than the 52 contacts that are responsible for interrupting the coil current. 52a nor 52b. the output relay will be reset after a default interval of 2 seconds. When the selected input is asserted. • If neither of the breaker auxiliary contacts. is programmed to a contact input. Note that the default setting for the seal-in time is 40 ms.W1 breaker "Trip" • If the initiating feature resets. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–131 . Output Relay 1 . the Trip Relay is de-energized after either the delay programmed in the Breaker Failure feature. Virtual Input 1 to 32.01 Default: 0.04 s This setting defines the time to be added to the reset time of the Relay 2 Trip output. This is useful for those applications where the 52 contacts reporting the breaker state are faster than the 52 contacts that are responsible for interrupting the coil current. Logic Elements 1 to 16 Default: Disabled This setting defines a block to the Trip Output relay.00 to 9. Contact Input 1 to 10. Remote Input 1 to 32.00 to 9. For instructions on how to use the keypad. then this delay is added to the reset time. BLOCK RLY 1 TRIP Range: Disabled. • If a delay is programmed for the Trip contact seal-in time.W2 breaker "Trip" PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY 2 W2 BKRTRIP RLY2 SEAL-IN Range: 0. Output Relay 2 .01 Default: 0.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS will remain operational until the requested change of breaker state is confirmed by a breaker auxiliary contact and the initiating condition has reset. No No Trip Relay operates until either the Breaker Failure delay expires (if the Breaker Failure element is enabled). please refer to Chapter 3 . thus extending its pulse width.

Remote Input 1 to 32. the Close Output relay will be blocked. When the selected input is asserted.S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS BLOCK RLY 2 TRIP Range: Disabled. Virtual Input 1 to 32. The block function can be useful for breaker maintenance purposes. Logic Elements 1 to 16 Default: Disabled This setting defines a block to the Close Output relay. Contact Input 1 to 10. 6–132 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

SETPOINT (BREAKER) 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL OR RESET (Input) Breaker Control SETPOINT (BF) Alarm Latched Alarm Disabled = 0 BF FUNCTION: SETPOINT (BF) 100 ms timer TRIP 2 sec timer RUN tRST BF TIME DELAYS RUN timed reset No feedback change OR RESET (Communications) LED: TRIP Trip request OR RESET (Relay Keypad) Remote Open Local Open (Relay Keypad) AND TRIP (Protection.cdr TRIP To Breaker Failure TRIP Operate Output Relay 1 (TRIP) LED: TRIP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS Figure 39: Relay 1 "TRIP" and Relay #2 "TRIP" logic diagram OR AND AND OR OR AND OR OR OR OR AND OR 6–133 . Controls) Relay ( Ready = 1) At least one contact programmed Breaker Open LED: BREAKER OPEN OR (Selected Input. ON = 1) AND Disbaled = 0 BLOCK TRIP RLY SETPOINT 52a contact (Breaker Close = 1) AND Contact input 52a CONTACT SETPOINT (BREAKER) 52b contact (Breaker Open = 1) Contact input 52b CONTACT SETPOINT tRST Trip Output Seal-In time 897775.

control.6 ) Self-Reset AND Message & Event Recorder Relay( Ready = 1) AND Assigned aux. or maintenance features.Working with the Keypad. If the Latched type is selected. The following path is available using the keypad. PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS 6–134 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Latched Default: Self Reset Figure 40: Auxiliary relays RESET (Relay Keypad) RESET (Communications) OR AND RESET (Input) Breaker Control SETPOINT OR Latched OR AND RELAY (3-6) AUXILIARY OUTPUT TYPE Operate Aux Output Relay ( 3 . For instructions on how to use the keypad. or Latched. and will be de-energized upon the reset command. If the SelfReset type is selected. PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RELAY 3(6) AUXILIARY OUTPUT TYPE Range: Self Reset. outputs: From Protection Feature OR From Control Feature 897777. the output relay will stay energized. All these relays are available for selection for operation of protection. please refer to Chapter 3 .cdr From Maintenance Feature Virtual inputs There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input commands entered via the relay keypad. after the element dropout. the output relay will be energized as long as the element is in operating mode and will reset when the element drops out. or by using communication protocols. Each auxiliary relay can be selected as either Self-Reset.S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Auxiliary Output Relays 3 to 6 The 345 relay is equipped with four auxiliary output relays numbered from 3 to 6.

one can assign it as a trigger source to a logic element with a dropout timer set to the desired pulse time. To prolong the time of the virtual input pulse. NOTE: NOTE Virtual input programming begins with enabling the Virtual Input Function. VI x TYPE Range: Self-Reset. the user can assign a command On/Off to the enabled Virtual Input under SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > S4 VIRTUAL INPUTS. a Virtual Input type can be selected to be either Self-Reset. will latch the virtual input state. Selecting the Latched type. Next. the Virtual Input will be evaluated for one protection pass only. upon “On” initiation and it will reset. When Self-Reset is selected and the “On” command is executed. All virtual inputs will appear under the S4 CONTROLS > SETPOINTS > S4 VIRTUAL INPUTS menu. See also the Virtual Inputs section under S4 CONTROLS. The "On" state of the Virtual Input will not be retained in the case of cycling of the relay control power supply. the virtual input will keep the state “On” until reset command “Off” is initiated.cdr 6–135 . on how to trigger a virtual input signal state. when the “On” command is executed.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS VI x NAME Range: Select Alpha-Numeric Name Default: Virtual IN x VI x FUNCTION Range: Disabled/Enabled Default: Disabled The Virtual Input is enabled and ready to be triggered when set to Enabled. When the Latched type is selected. the virtual input is evaluated as a pulse at a rate of one protection pass. Referring to the Virtual Inputs logic diagram below. Latched Default: Self-reset When the Self-Reset type is selected. NOTE: NOTE Figure 41: Virtual inputs scheme logic SETPOINT V INPUT FUNCTION Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 AND “Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1" S From Control menu LATCH ACTUAL VALUES “Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0" AND V INPUT 1 NAME: (Operand) R OR V Input 1 Status SETPOINT Latched Self-Reset 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL AND V INPUT 1 TYPE 897774. and selecting the Virtual Input Type Self-Reset or Latched under SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS. or Latched.

Remote outputs Remote Inputs are available for programming under the EnerVista SR3 Setup software. 6–136 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Refer to the 345 Communications Guide for details.S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Remote inputs Remote Inputs are available for programming under the EnerVista SR3 Setup software. Refer to the 345 Communications Guide for details.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–1 .Digital Energy Multilin 345 Transformer Protection System Chapter 7: Maintenance Maintenance Information about the relay and the breaker can be obtained through the features included in the Maintenance page.

OUTPUT RELAY 6 MAIN BOOT DATE MAIN BOOT TIME COMM FIRMWARE REV COMM BUILD DATE COMM BUILD TIME COMM BOOT REVISION M3 W2 BKRTRIP COIL RLY2 COIL FUNCTION ▼ COMM BOOT DATE RLY2 COIL DELAY COMM BOOT TIME BYPASS BKR STATUS SERIAL NUMBER OUTPUT RELAY 3 ETHERNET MAC ADR . FPGA VERSION OUTPUT RELAY 6 M3 BKR MAINTENANCE W1 BKRTRIP COIL W2 BKRTRIP COIL M4 BKR MONITOR W1 BKR TRIP COIL M5 AMBIENT TEMP AMBIENT TEMP ▼ ▼ W2 BKR TRIP COIL HI ALARM LEVEL LOW ALARM LEVEL M5 RELAY MAINT AMBIENT TEMP HYSTERESIS LEVEL TIME DELAY OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 4 897761A1.cdr 7–2 M6 FACTORY SERVICE OUTPUT RELAY 5 ENTER FACT. PSWD OUTPUT RELAY 6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ....CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE Figure 1: Maintenance main menu MAINTENANCE M1 RELAY INFO M3 BKR MAINTENANCE M4 BKR MONITOR ▼ M3 W1 BKRTRIP COIL M1 RELAY INFO RLY1 COIL FUNCTION RELAY NAME ▼ ▼ RLY1 COIL DELAY ORDER CODE M5 RELAY MAINT MAIN FIRMWARE REV M6 FACTORY SERVICE MAIN BUILD DATE MAIN BUILD TIME MAIN BOOT REVISION BYPASS BKR STATUS OUTPUT RELAY 3 ..

20 This screen shows the relay boot code revision. COMM BUILD DATE Dec 10 2009 This screen shows the relay communication firmware build date.30 This screen shows the relay firmware revision. MAIN BOOT TIME 17:13:42 This screen shows the relay boot code time. MAIN BOOT REVISION 1. COMM BOOT REVISION 1.20 This screen shows the relay communication boot code revision. MAIN BUILD DATE Jan 14 2010 This screen shows the relay firmware build date. COMM FIRMWARE REV 1.20 This screen shows the relay communication firmware revision. MAIN FIRMWARE REV 1.CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M1 RELAY INFORMATION M1 Relay information PATH: MAINTENANCE > M1 RELAY INFO RELAY NAME Range: alpha-numeric name of up to 18 characters Default: Transformer Name ORDER CODE 345-EPSG5HEMNN2EDN This screen shows the relay order code. COMM BUILD TIME 15:42:15 This screen shows the relay communication firmware build time. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–3 . MAIN BOOT DATE Nov 27 2009 This screen shows the relay boot code date. MAIN BUILD TIME 14:16:56 This screen shows the relay firmware build time.

A0.00 7–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .D8 Each 345 relay has a unique Mac Address. COMM BOOT TIME 14:48:29 This screen shows the relay communication boot code time.F4. ETHERNET MAC ADR 00.A0.M1 RELAY INFORMATION CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE COMM BOOT DATE Nov 27 2009 This screen shows the relay communication boot code date. SERIAL NUMBER BL0A09000684 Each 345 relay has a unique Serial Number. FPGA VERSION 1.08.

CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE M3 Breaker maintenance W1 (W2) Breaker trip coil The Trip coil monitoring is performed by a built-in voltage monitor on the Form A output relays: RLY1 W1 BKR TRIP and RLY2 W2 BKR TRIP. With such connections. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–5 . the circuit integrity for the Trip coil is effectively normal. a Trip alarm will be set and the “ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs will be on. or if in general a high resistance is detected in the circuitry. the trickle current will be maintained by the resistor when the breaker is open. For these applications the setting for “BYPASS BKR STATUS” should be set to ENABLED. regardless of the breaker position (open or closed). Figure 2: Trip Coil circuit with voltage monitoring DC + Output Relay 1 (TRIP) DC + Output Relay 2 (TRIP) External jumper A2 External jumper B4 B3 A4 V V A3 B5 52a contact 52a contact Trip Coil Trip Coil 897786. If the Trip coil circuit gets disconnected. and effectively the relay detects healthy current through the circuit.cdr DC - DC - Example 2: Some applications require that the Trip coil be monitored continuously. An external jumper must be made between terminals “A2” and “A3” for Output Relay 1 (RLY1 W1 BKR TRIP) coil monitoring and "B$" and "B5" for Output Relay 2 (RLY2 W2 BKR TRIP) coil monitoring. Example 1: The figure below shows the connections of the breaker trip coil to the relay’s trip output relay for voltage monitoring of the trip circuit. This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor (see the table) across breaker auxiliary contact 52a in the trip circuit. As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above the threshold of the trickle currents (see Technical Specification for Form A output relays). The voltage monitor is connected across the Form A contact.

M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE Figure 3: Trip circuits with continuous monitoring DC + Output Relay 1 (TRIP) External jumper A2 B3 V A3 52a contact R By-pass resistor Trip Coil 897787. 7–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .cdr DC - The following path is available using the keypad. and will self-reset. For instructions on how to use the keypad. or Latched Alarm. The “ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs will light up upon detection of a RLY1(2) coil circuitry problem. please refer to Chapter 3 . Latched Alarm Default: Disabled Selecting Alarm. Any or all of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate when the RLY1(2) Coil Monitor function is selected as Alarm. with the RLY1(2) Coil Monitor function selected as Alarm. If Latched Alarm is selected. enables the RLY1(2) Coil Monitor monitoring function. the “ALARM” LED will flash during the RLY1(2) Coil Monitor condition. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon RLY1(2) Coil Monitor operating condition.cdr DC DC + Output Relay 2 (TRIP) External jumper B4 A4 V B5 52a contact R By-pass resistor Trip Coil 897788. until the reset command is initiated. and will stay “ON” after the condition clears.Working with the Keypad. or Latched Alarm. PATH: MAINTENANCE > M3 BKR MAINTENANCE > W1(W2) BKR TRIP RLY1(2) COIL FUNCTION Range: Disabled. when the condition clears. Alarm.

monitoring of the RLY1(2) coil will be blocked when the breaker is open. The selection of the relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Alarm. and selected output relays operate.CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE RLY1(2) COIL DELAY Range: 1 to 10 sec in steps of 1 sec Default: 5 s This setting defines the RLY1(2) Coil Monitor Delay. Enabled Default: Disabled Set the “BYPASS BKR STATE” to Enabled when a by-pass resistor is connected across the breaker auxiliary contact for continuous RLY1(2) circuit integrity monitoring. The circuits will be monitored regardless of breaker position. of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon detection of RLY1(2) Coil. OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do not operate. BYPASS BKR STATUS Range: Disabled. When “BYPASS BKR STATE” is set to Disabled. “ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs light up on the front panel. or Latched Alarm. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–7 . or a RLY1(2) coil circuitry problem. before targets appear on the display. Operate Default: Do not operate Any. function is selected. or all.

cdr OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 3 SETPOINT: Operate output relays upon selection R LATCH S OR Trip Coil current above threshold Alarm Latched Alarm AND Disabled = 0 TRIP COIL FUNCTION: RESET Command M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE Figure 4: Trip coil monitoring logic diagram AND AND OR AND OR 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .7–8 SETPOINT Disable = 0 Enabled = 1 BYPASS BKR STATE SETPOINT 52a/b INPUTS Breaker Closed Trip From output relay 1(2) tPKP Trip Coil Montr PKP Message TRIP COIL DELAY: SETPOINT LED: MAINTENANCE Transient Recorder Event Recorder Trip Coil Montr OP Message LED: ALARM 898020.

can be monitored under MAINTENANCE > M4 BKR MONITOR. Unhealthy W2 BKR TRIP COIL Healthy Range: Healthy. as well as the trip circuits. PATH: MAINTENANCE > M4 BKR MONITOR W1 BKR TRIP COIL Healthy Range: Healthy. the relay will display the message "Unhealthy" for the corresponding coil.CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M4 BREAKER MONITOR M4 Breaker monitor The status of the breaker trip coils. Unhealthy 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–9 . In the case where a breaker coil or circuit fails.

For example the air conditioning. heating or ventilation system should be checked. There are several factors that can alter the measurement that need to be considered for the application of this feature. and will automatically reset when the condition clears. until a reset command is initiated. LOW ALARM LEVEL Range: -40°C to 20°C in steps of 1°C Default: 10°C This setting specifies the temperature level monitored by the Ambient Temperature Alarm low logic. PATH: MAINTENANCE > M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE > AMBIENT TEMP AMBIENT TEMPERATURE Range: Disabled. Any assignable output relays can be selected to operate when this function is enabled. TIME DELAY Range: 1 to 60 min in steps of 1 min Default: 1 sec This timer starts when either the high or low level thresholds have exceeded their respective levels. • Any forced air flow or obstructions that can interrupt even distribution of the ambient temperature. outputs). 7–10 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M5 Relay maintenance Ambient temperature The SR3 has a temperature monitor feature that measures the ambient temperature around the chassis of the relay. VT. the “ALARM” LED will flash upon the activating condition. The alarm will occur when the temperature remains below this level. Alarm. If the operating condition is satisfied when Alarm is selected as the function. HI ALARM LEVEL Range: 20°C to 80°C in steps of 1°C Default: 60°C This setting specifies the temperature level monitored by the Ambient Temperature Alarm high logic. and will stay “ON” after the condition clears. The alarm will occur when the temperature remains above this level. HYSTERESIS LEVEL Range: 2°C to 10°C in steps of 1°C Default: 2°C This setting allows the user to select the dropout level for the feature. The relay extrapolates the ambient temperature from an internal temperature sensor inside the product. • Installation of the relay should be for normal operation (CT. the LED “ALARM” will flash upon the activating condition. The purpose of the feature is to measure the immediate temperature around the product. This feature can be used to signal the customer that the product is being subjected to temperatures that can degrade the product life and proper action should be initiated. Latched Alarm Default: Disabled This setting enables the ambient temperature functionality. inputs. If Latched Alarm is selected.

cdr Latched Alarm Alarm SETTING AMB TEMP ALARM Disabled = 0 Off = 0 Off = 0 Remote Reset Off = 0 Lockout Reset Emergency Restart SETTINGS S4 CONTROLS RUN RUN AND AND T < Low Temp T > High Temp Hi Alarm Level Low Alarm Level SETTINGS AMB TEMP ALARM Emergency Restart Input Lockout Reset Input Remote Reset Input INPUTS KEYPAD RESET OR AND OR OR SETTING TIME DELAY RUN tRST AND AND AND AND R LATCH S R LATCH S OR OR Operate output relays upon selection Amb Temp LO Alarm State: Operate Amb Temp LO Alarm State: Pickup TARGET MESSAGE Amb Temp LO Alarm OP Any Alarm OP Amb Temp LO Alarm PKP LOGIC OPERAND Amb Temp HI Alarm State: Operate Amb Temp HI Alarm State: Pickup TARGET MESSAGE Amb Temp HI Alarm OP Any Alarm OP Amb Temp HI Alarm PKP LOGIC OPERAND Output Relay 6 Output Relay 5 Output Relay 3 Output Relay 4 ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do Not Operate.345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 897771. Figure 5: Ambient Temperature Alarm logic diagram 7–11 . Operate Default: Do Not Operate Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Ambient Temperature Alarm operation.

M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE 7–12 CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

Digital Energy Multilin 345 Transformer Protection System Appendix Change notes Manual Revision history Table 1: Revision History MANUAL P/N RELEASE DATE 1601-9098-A1 12 February 2010 1601-9098-A2 6 December 2010 1601-9098-A4 9 May 2011 Table 2: Major Updates for SR345-A4 Page Number CHANGES Manual revision number from A3 to A4 Chapter 2 Terminal Lug information added to Electrical Installn.1 .Maintenance) General Increase number of Logic Elements to 16 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL appendix . Section Table 3: Major Updates for SR345-A2 Page Number CHANGES Manual revision number from A1 to A2 Chapter 1 Add Comm option 3E to Order Code Table Chapter 7 Add Ambient Temp section (Ch 7 .

2 CHANGES Minor Corrections 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .CHANGE NOTES APPENDIX Table 3: Major Updates for SR345-A2 Page Number General appendix .